Home

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual

1. 2 Connection example Connection example 1 EL LINE I Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS422 signal External device side CD DCD 1 1 FG swt sw2 2 FG 2 2 RD RXD TXD 1 OFF 1 OFF TX _ 15 RDA R SD TXD 3 RxD D on a gee RoB 4 4 4 P SDA ER DTR RTS j3 oFF 3 OFF RX po SpE sc 5 cts 6 20 4 ON 4 OFF 3 DSRA DR DSR DTR RTS R H e psr S _OFF 5 OFF 16 DSRB E RS RTS A S a ON EGEE 7 DTRA CS CTS CD CTS 20 pTRB 7 OFF 7 OFF CIRI 9 7 sG O O SG 1 or 14 RTSA SiON RTSB CTSA CTSB SG e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control Connection example 2 KS 1 KS 10P Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS422 signal External device side CD DCD il FG sw sw2 FG h FG y 19 RD RXD 2 2 Rro a on 1 on oaa s RDA K OUT SD TXD 3i eee dis RDB ER DTR 4 4 CS DATA SDA z 3 OFF NM SDB SG RS le Il 6 4 OFF oe he DSRA DR DSR ER OUT 16 RI 7 7 5 ON O DSRB RS RTS SG ieee ao 21 BI
2. CHT ERR clear request Di Clear request gt User frame User frame CH2 ERR clear request oi Clear request E Data for user modem initialization Data for modem init XZY moritortest X Y monitor test Maden fasten MANE Madan Finbar mora Data for modem connection Data for modem conn CHI Tac control and others moritor test CHI Trans control monitor Modem function system setting Modem function CHT MC protocol monitor CHT ME protocol monitor X OO CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control Flash ROM Detail Eee HOM Ait paa F CH1 MC protocol system setting CH1 MC protocol Witeto cove fie Curent value Monitoring module display CH1 Non procedure system setting CH1 Non procedure Cannot execute test zaje e File save File read Close So Stop monitor Evecute lest Close x1 The selection menus for system setting registration are displayed by scrolling on the Monitor screen during online operation The selection buttons pertaining to flash ROM registration are displayed in blue on the screen 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC Setting Items MELSEC Q The following table lists the selection menus for system setting registration to be displayed Function User frame registration Data for modem initialization registration Resetting buffer memory flash ROM setting values to default values Flash ROM writ
3. 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Correspondence between the data communication functions and system configurations The following shows system configurations that can use the data communication functions of the Q series C24 The words in the reference section column in the table below represent the following manuals e Application MELSEC Q L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application e Reference MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual e Operating GX Configurator SC Version2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function a Communication using the MC protocol O Available X Not available Funct System configuration Ref i unction eference section Programmable controller CPU device memory read write olol lolo Intelligent function module buffer memory read write o ol lol o Sequence program read write EAr aF Reference Programmable controller CPU status control remote RUN STOP etc On demand function A Application Global function O function Accessing the programmable controller of other stations in the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Ethernet Programmable controller CPU monitoring function olx x x Application Reference b Communication using the non procedure protocol O Available X Not available Funct E configuration Ref fi unction eference
4. MELSECNET H External device Remote I O network Remote I O station 2 Available functions The following table lists the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Availabilty Communications using the MC protocol controller CPU monitoring function Communications using procedure Programmable controller CPU monitoring Programmable controller CPU monitoring function Communications using the bidirectional protocol Data reception by interrupt program Communications using the pre defined protocol Communications using dedicated instructions Communications via public line etc modem function Transmission DC code control including Xon Xoff control Control DTR DSR control Communications protocol switching G Independent linked operation of each interface Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package O See 4 Connecting the GX Developer hl a O Available X Not available 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x1 The following functions are available when communicating with the MELSECNET H remote I O station using the MC protocol Available function Function Batch read and batch write Random read test random write Device memory read write Monitor data registration monitoring Batch read of multiple blocks batch write of multiple blocks Buffer
5. Use the input Use the input output signalasa X output signal as a contact contact It should be output to an output signal 1 10 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 It is possible to access the control CPU and non control CPUs using the MC protocol and through GX Developer from the external device In addition data communication with the control CPU of the Q series C24 can be performed using the non procedure bidirectional protocol Example When communicating with the MC protocol External Non control CPU Control CPU Q series C24 device Command message transmitted using a Pg ER ee QnA compatible 4C Specify the QCPUtobe frame Communication using the MC protocol read write O3FFH gt 03EQx to 03E3xH r i i Device memory etc i i i accessed by the I O number 1 of the requested module bee eas ee cise ee oe 4 Response message de If the MC protocol GX Developer is used to access other stations it is possible to access the control CPU and non control CPUs of the station to be accessed even if the relay station and the accessed station are multiple CPU systems Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control CPU of the module to be routed through is the same or different External device Peripheral device Local station Communication through GX Developer Station to b
6. App 55 App 55 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Program example lt Read command gt Ve PLS M10 Changes the read command into pulses lt Setting of read instruction gt HI M11 X101E _ 4 mov K2 DO Sets the read instruction MOV HE8 D1 Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the Z REMTO JI KI K1 HO H2 0 K2 M100 flash ROM access area of the buffer memory M100 M101 SET M11 Sets the read flag M101 SET M200 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction lt Flash ROM read request gt M11 X1017 SET Y1017 Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal X1017 PLS M12 Registration result acquisition command lt Read of read result gt M12 X101E Reads the read result from the Z REMFR JI KI KI Ho H4 D2 Ki M102 flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 M102 M103 D2 KO PLS M13 No of data byte registered E acquisition command M103 SET M201 Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction RST Y1017 Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal RST M11 Sets the read flag lt Read of the number of data bytes registered gt Reads the number of registered MI3 X101E data bytes from the flash ROM H k eL RENFR ul KI K1 HO H5 D3 KI M104 Sess ae of the buffer iaa yis memory to D3 r Converts the number of registered L J It f L o k2 D30 data bytes into the word units r Adds 1 word when the number of D50 D
7. Flash ROM system parameters write result Modem function error code Modem function sequence status Make text file End setup Cancel 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Auto refresh settings can be also set for items not listed below with GX Works2 Refer to Appendix 1 1 3 Setting items Setting item Buffer memory address CH1 CH2 Reference section Flash ROM access register read delete result CH1 CH2 LED ON status communication error status 1 201H 202H PE 1 Section 9 6 10 Switch setting error mode switching error status 203H Section 11 1 Number of registered user frame 204H Flash ROM system parameters write result 220H Modem function error code 221H Modem function sequence status 222H Number of data registrations for connection 223H Number of data registrations for initialization 226H Number of notification execution 229H Data storage area 1 notification execution data No 22AH Data storage area 2 notification execution data No 22EH Section 9 6 2 Data storage area 3 notification execution data No 232H User s Manual Application Data storage area 4 notification execution data No 236H Data storage area 5 notification execution data No 23AH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal c
8. Default The unit of transmission data count words bytes is in accordance with the word byte units designation in QSCU e Transmission data count The transmission data count designated with the BIDOUT instruction is written and sent as the data length Transmission data The transmission data designated with the BIDOUT instruction is written and then sent 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the transmission data length See Section 9 4 5 a When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC designate as follows Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00x to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFx When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with the bu
9. cccccccccc cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenegenaas 1 1 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication Module o oo cece cece eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenenenenaa 1 2 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B ceccescesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereseeeeeeateas 1 13 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2 1 to 2 20 2 1 Applicable System wie s cieccsdetieieeentinn a nie wader didi EA aden a a 2 1 2 2 Combinations of Programmable Controller CPU and External Device and Available Functions 2 4 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System ossiani iiiar ndita aniei i ei eiei 2 8 2 4 Use with Basic Model QCPU woc c c cccccccccccissscsscccssccsciescssacctsaccasdecdsuacsauaedsadessaueessacesaadesucceacocieaasdeacds 2 9 2 5 Use with Redtindant CPUS iicccsccccsaciiccvaacestvansiisacazcgactaeeaad advvscgaatedeaad asaeeada ctanaasd agesiada cos aadd aciaaaga atateastacs 2 10 2 6 Use on MELSECNET H Remote I O Stations cccccccsssccccceecesesseeeeeeeeessssaaeeeeeeeesesssaeeeeeeesesees 2 12 2 7 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version cccecceesseceeeeeeeseeeeeetsaees 2 16 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 42 gt 3 1 Performance Specifications ccccceeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeseaeeseaeeseaeeecaeeesaceeseneeeeaeeseaeeeseeeasessineesans 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification cccceeccccescceeecceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeaeeecaeee
10. e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same O Available X Not available x1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the OUTPUT instruction they are not used in the same channel e ONDEMAND BIDOUT BIDIN CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the OUTPUT instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2x occurs 10 8 10 8 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error 10 9 MELSEC Q 3 Whether an OUTPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OUTPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off
11. 1 The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions The initial status indicates the status where transmission has stopped and reception data has been discarded The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions are as follows 1 When the power is turned on the Reset switch on the CPU module is operated or the Q series C24 mode is switched 2 When the receive data was cleared 3 When the CD DCD signal was turned off when data communications were performed by setting CD terminal check enable during full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface 2 Generation of framing error in external device When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device through the RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated by the noise etc in the external device Send an arbitrary code to identify the head of the send data from the Q series C24 to the external device Before data communication check the Q series C24 interface specifications 3 Data communications with external device computer etc over a multidrop link When the external device programmable controller CPU are connected by a 1 n multidrop link each the Q series C24 receives the data transmitted by the external device With a multidrop link receive data by user frame 1 If data is not received by user frame a Sequence program that ignores the receive data other than the receive data addressed to
12. 2 Reception by received data count For fixed length reception a This method is used to receive messages of the same length size from the external device every time b When the Q series C24 receives data of the received data count preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a reception data read request to the sequence program When the sequence program receives the read request from the Q series C24 it reads data up to the received data count received from the external device c The received data count default value is set to 511 words However it can be changed within the size of the receive data storage area depending on the data contents exchanged with the external device 1 When the receive complete code and received data count are set to GX Configurator SC both become valid In this case if the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code before receiving data that are equivalent to the receive data count Reception data read request X3 XA is set to ON For details on how to change the receive complete code and received data count see Section 9 4 7 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list The following shows the list of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the non procedure protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory area for storing the data received from the
13. Retransmission time transmission Do not retransmit method designation E r Flash ROM setting Details Write to P Save file E Select input Read from i ae Load file DTR DSR control DC1 2 3 4 control DC1 3 control DC2 4 control Make text file Execute test Close 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items Buffer ea ae address Item cH Reference section User s Manual Application ee Half duplex communications control designation Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation User s Manual Application ee oe Retransmission time transmission method Gesignation INo reception monitoring time timer 0 designation Cu 13CH User s Manual Application 92H 132H Section 3 2 1 User s Manual Application 7 5 Chapters 6 and 7 rae 2030H to 21304 to PESO Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th User s Manual Application 2038H 2138H Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 vF 1cm Section3 34 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 6 MC protocol system setting Purpose For data transmission using the MC protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen CHO MC protocol system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO MC protocol system setting Setting screen ME Module
14. Details Save file Cannot execute test Close Make text file Setting item ETE TEA address Item Reference section BAu to 15An to Output frame No designation 1st to 100th 146 BDU User s Manual Application H 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 12 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values This section explains how to reset the values set in the buffer memory flash ROM to their default values Startup procedure Online Monitor Test Select monitor Test module Monitor Test Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Default request for System setting default Procedure 2 Click on Execute test The setting values in the buffer memory will return to their default values Procedure 3 Change the setting of Flash ROM write allow prohibit to Allowed Procedure 4 In the Monitor screen select Write request for System setting write Procedure 5 Click on Execute test The setting values in the flash ROM will return to their default values When confirming the processing results in GX Configurator SC perform Read from module Items subject to this operation in the Monitor screen Setting item Current value Setting value System setting can be made default with the following procedure Execute test System setting default Make Fl
15. Zi l Outside cable diameter x 4 10 i le ga i i 1 Re e i l s B 1 Ht 4 1 1 pape gp il l 1 icc O l pi ed PS ace L J R2 LUO 1 72 Di z a B 90 4 5 27 4 Unit mm 1 R2 Bending radius near connector Outside cable diameter X 4 3 QJ71C24N R4 nn J Qut Issn Pi u bese SO 1 1 Qu TAS OSS R3 1 i Qu Mars 1 WU u oh Ba r2 AN amp 2 ure Og ene e On See EE Qu m Qu Qu C Qa Qu Lj KOZ 23 L 90 a 1 5 he 274 Unit mm 1 R3 Bending radius near the plug in socket block Outside cable diameter x 4 2 r2 Bending radius near the wire connection Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 21 App 21 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Interfaces Appendix 6 1 RS 232 interfaces used for the Q series C24 The connectors listed below are used as RS 232 interface connectors Module model First 6 digits of the serial number Manufacturer Other than the following DDK Ltd 17L 10090 27 D9AC FA e 140112 to 170213 e First 4 digits are 1703 and the HIROSE Electric Co Ltd RDED 9SE LN 55 sixth digit is 3 Other than the following DDK Ltd 17L 10090 27 D9AC FA e 140111 to 170218 e First 4
16. 1 For versions of a software package that support the new functions of the Q series C24 refer to Section 2 7 b Communication support tools for external devices ActiveX control library MX component SWnD5C ACT E The n in the model name is 0 or greater 1 1 Depending on the version of MX Component used different versions of Q series C24 are supported See the manual of MX Component for the details When using GX Works2 refer to the following e GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common e GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 2 Combinations of Programmable Controller CPU and External Device and Available Functions The following describes the system configurations and available functions when using the Q series C24 1 System configurations System configurations combinations of programmable controller CPU and external device for data communication are shown below a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration ELSES ll b External device and Q series C24 with n 1 system configuration lojojo 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Extern
17. 10 29 10 29 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Error 1 Incase of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFH or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 Program example The following example shows a program that reads the communication status of a target module When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F The function reads the communication status of M5 K_YSYNYNq_ gt v cei cc c er srsusy uo DO aie F a target module and stores it in a device 10 30 10 30 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 9 ZP CSET Receive data clear Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register Constant data Se ee user File register JOO module device zZ KH Others n Word uoco e a a sl o z l 2 O Instruction Executing Instruction code condition form ZP CSET f l ZP CSET Un S4 S2 D1 aH 1 x41 Ifthe originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module 00 to F
18. 2 More than one OUTPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next OUTPUT instruction only after the execution of the first OUTPUT instruction is completed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 4 How to detect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Cause of reception error Reference section A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 User s Manual Application Designated number of transmission data was larger than the size that could be stored in the sa Section 6 2 2 transmission area 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting a transmission error 1 The following device and input signal turn ON e OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the OUTPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result address 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write 1 to the LED off Communication error clear request address OH 1H 2 To turn off
19. Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 8956 22F Cu Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 8959 22FFH 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component When an external device is a personal computer use separately sold communication support tools MX Component This allows a communication program for the external device to be created regardless of MC protocol s transmitting receiving procedure For details on MX Component refer to Appendix 7 and the operating manual of MX Component 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Data communication using the non procedure protocol is a function for sending and receiving data between a programmable controller CPU and an external device using the message format and transmission control procedure specified by the user Data can be transferred using the non procedure protocol when it is necessary to perform data communication using the protocol for external devices such as a measuring instrument and a bar code reader In that case transmission receive data processing can be simplified by using the communication functions with the user frames described in the User s Manual Application This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the non procedure protocol Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence
20. Stop monitor Close Start monitor 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 MELSEC Q Displays e Module The following information is displayed Module name The name of the module installed I O Address The start input output signal number of the target module Implementation Position The slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The last character of the product information indicates the function version of the module Example If the last character is B it means that the module is of function version B e Unit access Module access Displays access permissions when the Q series C24 ready X1E is turned on and the watchdog timer error X1F is turned off Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether or not the module for which the user set the parameters matches the module installed e Remote password setting status Displays the setting status of the remote password Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error occurrence e Error Display Displays the error codes for any errors that have occurred in any of the functions being used Error details corrective action Displays the error details and corrective action for the error code selected in Error Display Error details and corrective actions are displayed when GX Developer Version 8 17T or later used Checking using the hardware information screen of the GX
21. 3 Setting from GX Developer The following parameters should be set through GX Developer in order to use the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote I O station Each of setting is the same way as when setting the parameters for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU station see Section 4 5 and after See the operating manual for GX Developer for how to display each setting screen Parameter setting items for the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote I O station Parameter setting item Setting Remarks 1 0 Assignment Set the module mounting information See Section 4 5 1 Set the transmission specification and the Switch setting for I O and ue ae communication protocol for communication See Section 4 5 2 intelligent function module with the external device Remote password setting Perform settings for the remote password User s Manual Application 1 Connect GX Developer to a MELECNET H remote I O station and set the parameters 2 Reset the MELECNET H remote I O station after changing the setting 4 When monitoring setting with GX Configurator SC a About the automatic refresh setting 1 Use GX Developer to perform Read from PLC Write to PLC of data created by the automatic refresh setting It cannot be performed from GX Configurator SC 2 The devices used for the automatic refresh setting must be of the types M B D or W 1 GX Configurator SC should be connected to a MELECNET H remote I O sta
22. Close the Flash ROM setting screen Close 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 1 Online operation 4 Start the Monitor Test screen Is the original data saved YES Is the data saved in a file MELSEC Q Select a target intelligent function module screen See Section 9 3 1 YES Read the data from the file Load file Read the data from the module s flash ROM Read from module j Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to allowed gt y Display the system setting sub screens for changing the setting values y Click each of the setting items corresponding to the setting values to be changed For each item enter or select the new setting value in the Setting value field Designate the setting value for the item to be changed then click on the Execute test button The setting value will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM x1 Have you changed all the applicable setting values Do you wish to write the new setting values to the module s buffer memory In the Flash ROM setting screen click on the button Then in the file designation dialog box designate the file name under which the data will be saved All of the new setting values will be saved in the file 2 Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to prohibi
23. SET M202 J REMFR instruction abnormally completed lt Change processing of CH2 gt M20 MoV KI D10 F Sets the switching mode No designation rvcy H85B0 D11 1 Sets the transmission specifications after g switching designation Loo Ron K KI HO HI30 10 K2 mo4 Jf Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area M104 M105 _ SET M21 J Sets the CH2 change command M105 A J SET M203 J REMTO instruction abnormally completed M21 M23 M24 X1004 X100B e d H t 4 SET Y1009 J Sets the CH2 mode switching request RST M21 X100D J RST Y1009 J Resets the CH2 mode switching request X100F E 1 PLS M22 J CH2 mode switching completed M22 d Z REMFR JI KI KI Ho H203 D12 KI M106 Jj Transfers the mode switching error status App 60 App 60 APPENDICES KO KO MIOS M107 f Hi 012 012 M107 JL if App 61 M300 M301 M300 M204 M205 Resets the changing flag J Sets the change completion flag Reexamines the modifications REMFR instruction abnormally completed MELSEC Q App 61 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet The following sheet is for recording parameter setting values set by GX Developer Use as many copies as needed x In order to review the setting values of the utility package GX Configurator SC print out the content of the file generated by t
24. Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00n to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device so that it is smaller than the size of the transmission data s designated area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area 2 Size of arbitrary data portion to be sent from the programmable controller CPU To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area
25. ssssssssssssssessrssrssrsersersrrsrrsrrserseess 3 20 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory sssesssssesresissrssrsersrrsrsrrsrnsrnsrnsrrsensrnss 3 23 10 A 10 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 1 to 4 35 Ai Hamad ling PrOCAUtiOns aneas eae EE A E die detente 4 1 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation c ceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeesaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenas 4 2 4 3 Part Names and Functions snene adeno adnan ignited E iaa 4 3 4 4 External WirinG ss iti ihiasien E A iain uaa aes 4 5 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex communications cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeees 4 6 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface 00 ececcecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseaeseeeseaeseaeeeeeeateaes 4 8 4 5 Settings Ton GX Developer ree aaa T A 4 13 4 5 1 I O assignment SettiNgS osson iiinis annia rid a i 4 13 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module ssssesesseeeeserereersensensrrsrnsrrsrnsrnsnens 4 14 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeneenes 4 21 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC c ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeatens 4 23 4 7 Individual Station TeSt cccccceccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeecaeeeeaeeeceaeceeaeeecaeeecanessaeeseaeescaeeesaeeeseeesaeesessaeeesuneeeaes 4 2
26. 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 7 Turn off command MELSEC Q b Initializing communication error information by writing Communication error information can be initialized by writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the communication error clear request and to turn LED off address OH 1H The displayed LEDs and communication error information may be turned on off in the following cases e NEU to NAK turn on off depending on the status e C N to SIO turn on when errors occur and keep the ON status even after the operation returns to normal 1 Communication error clear request and to turn LED off address 0H 1H The contents of the error information corresponding to each bit in this request area are the same as those for the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202hn For more details see Section 11 1 1 1 The following describes the correspondence between the LED OFF request areas and the LED ON status storage areas e Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off address 0H LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side address 2014 e Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off address 1H LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side address 202n 2 Example of a program for turning off displayed LEDs The following shows an example of a program that issues an initialization request for all the communication error inf
27. 201 to 207 Functional protocol No Manual og 1 External device model Not allowed Pre defined 16643 to 18436 to 0 Protocol unexecuted protocol Other than 0 External device model support Up to 32 bytes are stored in ASCII function codes 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex 16660 to 18452 to 16676 18468 4124n 4824n 16677 18469 4125x 48251 16678 18470 4126x 48261 16679 18471 41271 48271 16680 18472 41281 48281 16681 18473 4129H 48291 16682 18474 412An 482An 16683 18475 412Bx 482Bx 16684 18476 412Cx 482Cx 16685 18477 412Dx 482Dx 16686 18478 412Ex 482Ex 16687 18479 412Fx 482Fx i al Checking protocol execution log Execution log 1 Protocol name 0 No protocol executed Other than 0 Protocol name Up to 32 bytes in ASCII codes are stored Communication type Protocol unexecuted Send only Receive only Send and receive Functional protocol Unregistered protocol Execution status 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for reception 4 Receiving 5 Completed Execution result 0 Normal Other than 0 error code Error Matched packet No 0 Error occurred or Communication type of the executed protocol is Send only 1 to 16 Matched packet No Number of retries 0 No retry 1 to 10 Number of retries System area Use prohibited 0 No
28. Example of FROM instruction Read ae FROMP HO H254 D0 Ki Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on the CH1 side from address 254n FROMP HO H264 DI KI Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on the CH2 side from address 264H r b15 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO O i 1 1 m ER DTR signal ON DR DSR signal ON RS RTS signal ON 14 1 07 CD DCD signal ON ER DTR signal ON DR DSR signal ON 0 0 DO 0 D1 0 11 10 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence status 11 11 This section explains how to read the current status of the data communication using the MC protocol stored in the buffer memory When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the MC protocol monitor screen see Section 9 6 4 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to check the status of the data communication using the MC protocol 1 Transmission sequence status address 2554 2651 The status of data communication using MC protocol is stored as a numerical value as shown below b15 to bO Buffer memory address 255 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 2651 0to9 Information on the CH2 side The following shows the correspondence between the numerical values in the transmission sequence status storage area and the data communication status Request from an external device External device
29. Hexa Error Contents decimal e The data does not match the parity bit Match the Q series C24 and external Parity error f setting device settings e The sum check calculated by the Q Sum check error series C24 and the transmitted sum Check the external device sum check check are not the same Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data e Received message that is different from Protocol error the control procedure with the communication protocol setting communications e The data does not match the stop bit e Match the Q series C24 and external Framing error setting device settings e The next data was received before the hts i e Decrease the transmission rate and restart Overrun error Q series C24 received all the preceding SIO i be dat data communications ata e Designation method error in part of a message e A command that does not exist was designated e The number of processing points is outside the range for the command e A device that does not exist was designated e Received data that cannot be used Programmable controller access e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data transmission Character area error e The CPU cannot communicate with the e Replace the CPU with a CPU that can tae Q series C24 communicate with the Q series C24 Paar Check and correct the external device e The PC No is not FF or a stati
30. MELSEC Q 9 6 5 Non procedure monitor test Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the non procedure protocol The test operation for the receive data clear is explained in Section 9 7 Operating procedure Monitor screen CHL Non procedure monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Non procedure monitor test 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor Test items Buffer memory address i Reference section CH2 Data transmission result 267H Chapter 11 Data reception result Receive user frame nth User s Manual Application User frame being transmitted X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal completion X09 CH2 Transmission processing in progress X0A CH2 Reception data read request Chapter 6 X04 CH1 Reception abnormal detection Y07 CH2 Transmission request Y01 CH1 Reception data read completion Y08 CH2 Reception data read completion Received data count designation Receive complete code designation User frame use enable disable designation 4 i 14Ex to First frame No designation 1st to 4th AEn to B1H 454 H Receive user 1524 to Last frame No designation 1st to 4th B24 to B5H 456 H i i User frame receive format designation 1st to 2020n to 2120 to oe User s Manual Application 4th 2023H 2123H Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 20244 to 21244 to 4th 2027H 2127H CR LF
31. Number of data registrations for connection 0 Number of data registrations for initialization 0 Number of notification execution 0 Data storage area 1 notification execution data No 2 notification execution data No 3 notification execution data No 4 notification execution data No 5 notification execution data No Current value display Make text file r Flash ROM setting Details Write to module Read from 3 mi Load file Save file Cannot execute test Monitoring Stop monitor Close Monitor Test items It Buffer memory address Ref i em eference section cH2 X10 Modem initialization completion X11 Dialin progress O X12 Connectionin progress O X13 Initialization connection abnormal completion X14 Modem disconnection completion Pp o o o o O X16 Notification abnormal completion X15 Notification normal completion ificati Y10 Modem initialization request User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Buffer ERA address Item cH Reference section E 12 Modem disconnection request J o O Y14 Notification issued ier Hocem cometonchaeldesan m GX Developer designation No communication interval time designation units min 3w RS CS control yes nodesignation m baat User s Manual Application Remote password
32. Q series C24 k 6 1 6 is repeated afterward Stored 0 1 iig 4 a value 2 Values 7 to 9 are stored when mode switching or initialization of transmission sequence is performed REMARKS When the target interface is not set to use the MC protocol 0 is stored in the transmission sequence status address 255H 265n 2 Example of a program that reads from transmission sequence DO D1 status address 255 2651 The following shows an example of a program that reads from the transmission sequence status input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction Read command R Reads the status of data communication 1i ROWE He Aa on the CH1 side from address 255 FROHP HO H265 m Ki Reads the status of data communication on the CH2 side from address 265n b15 to bO The CH1 side is waiting to receive a command message and is using non procedure or bidirectional protocol 4 CH2 is accessing the programmable controller CPU upon reception of a command message 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 5 Reading the switch setting status This section explains how to read the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Monitor test others screen see Section 9 6 10 1 The switch settings can be changed when the mode is switched or when the UINI instruc
33. RW Area where it is possible to read write from to the programmable controller CPU and an external device R Area where only reading is possible from the programmable controller CPU and an external device System area used by the system or area not used by the corresponding protocol 3 Meaning of symbols shown in the Registration column Indicates whether or not it is possible to use a value in the corresponding area by registering it to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Allowed Area that can be registered and used Not allowed Area that cannot be registered IMPORTANT Do not write data in the System area of the buffer memory If data is written to any of the system areas the programmable controller system may malfunction Some of the user areas are partially system areas Care must be taken when performing read write to the buffer memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Use the FROM TO instructions or other applicable commands to access the buffer memory listed in this section when a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in Appendix In QCPU the access to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to access directly using the FROM TO instructions or other instructions from the sequence program except when accessing the buffer memory as shown in the programming on each
34. Register the user frame used in the following functions On demand function using the MC protocol e Data transmission receive function using the non procedure protocol Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen User frame e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Setting screen Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Setting value E The data which can be changed is shown by Hff and the following byte Please specify the registering part of the control code as code Hex Ex 02024 03 in case of registering a 5 bytes of data STx 02H C24 ETX 03H User frame 1 H03e8 2 H03e9 3 H03ea 4 H03eb 5 H03ec 6 H03ed 7 HO3ee amaa r Flash ROM setting Details Write to r le Save file Cannot execute test Raad kamin oad fle module Make text file Close Setting item Item Buffer memory address om cH2 User frame 1 to 200 ooo ee User s Manual Application Use code to specify hexadecimal numbers in the control code registration field if QSCU is used for registering a user frame Example To register the 5 bytes of data STX 02H C24 and ETX 03x specify the following 02C24 03 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration Purpose Re
35. Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel 2002 Microsoft Excel 2003 Microsoft Excel 2007 Microsoft Access 2000 or Microsoft Access 2002 Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 Visual C App 26 App 26 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 5 Support for functions dedicated for data communication with programmable controllers MX Component provides the functions necessary for data communication with programmable controllers including functions for opening closing communication lines and reading writing devices Multi function communication programs can thus easily be developed with MX Component Sets one device LONG type Writes to buffer memory Reads clock data from programmable controller CPU For details of the functions refer to the MX Component Programming Manual 6 Collecting data on Excel without programming Using MX Component and MX Sheet SWnD5C SHEET E allows users to collect programmable controller device data on Excel with only simple setting and without any programming App 27 App 27 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 7 2 Usage procedure of MX Component This section explains the procedure for creating programs and sample programs using MX Component 1 Procedure for creating programs The procedure for creating programs is outlined below The usage procedure below uses Visual Basic NET 2003
36. d External device and Q series C24 with m n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example 1 External device 1 External device 2 RS 232 RS 232 SD SD RD C24 1 SD RD SDA SDB RDA RI RDB SG FG RS 422 485 cable LR_ Terminal resistor 2 Connection example 2 External device 1 C24 1 External device 2 C24n mooo A Er e TA e mA p Ii T SDA Li i SDA II SDA i I SDB h SDB h SDB RDA l RDA l RDA CRI Ifi I I R RDB ae RDB A i RDB SG x l sG tb __Jl SG 1 l 11 I FG V gt FO Jv FG Weta we go FG RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable CR Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 Settings for GX Developer This chapter explains various settings via GX Developer that allow the Q series C24 to perform data communication with external devices See the User s Manual Application for how to perform the remote password setting 4 5 1 I O assignment settings Setting purpose The I O assignment settings perform the settings for the types of modules to be mounted on a base unit the range of input output signals and switches of the Q series C24 Startup procedure PLC parameters gt I O assignment For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Q parameter setting x PLC name PLC system
37. 0022H to 005F x that are not used by the Q series C24 can be used The Q series C24 stores the received error codes as a completion status in the control code for the BIDOUT instruction They are also stored in the data transmission result address 2571 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The error codes are added by the Q series C24 When an error code is transmitted the Q series C24 writes the same error code in the data reception result address 258p 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the BIDIN instruction for data reception see Chapter 10 X3 Read request CH1 Create control data from DO MO Q series C24 ready X1E Reception data read request X3 BIDIN instruction BIDIN instruction complete device G BIDIN Un DO D10 MO Processing for normal completion stores receive data etc BIDIN instruction complete device 1 OFF Normal completion Receive data count address 6004 Receive data address 6011 to 7FFH Data reception Response transmission Start the local station programmable controller The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 When data is received from the external device the reception data read request
38. 1 bit Sum check code No Write during RUN Allowed Setting modification Prohibited Communication rate setting 9600 bps e Switch 2 0001 Communication protocol setting MC protocol format 1 e Switch 3 0000H e Switch 4 0000H e Switch 5 0000H Station number setting 0 station Procedure 3 Performing a loopback test 1 Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status and turn the power on or reset the CPU communication is enabled in about one second 2 Create a program for a loopback test on the external device side and send a command message like the one in the example below to the Q series C24 The commands used are as follows When performing communication test in an A compatible 1C frame TT command for an example see the following page When performing communication test in a QnA compatible frame 0619 command x See the Reference Manual when performing communication tests in a QnA compatible frame Procedure 4 Checking loopback test result 1 The Q series C24 sends a response message to the external device when it receives a loopback test command message x The Q series C24 sends the external device the received data as is 2 Check on the external device whether the data received from the Q series C24 matches the data sent from the external device 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 5 Ending the loopback test Perform the following procedure according to
39. 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data from the external device to the Q series C24 one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship below is maintained 1 Reduce the transmission data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage area 2 Size of data sent from the external device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL From external device 2 Head 321GFEDCBA MELSEC Q Receive data list The following describes the data list when data received from an external device is stored to the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive data storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L H next address L H order Under the following conditions when the receiv
40. 9 6 10 PLC CPU information clear request x x x x x i Section 11 1 7 Accumulated count of unlock process normal x completion Accumulated count of unlock process normal Auto refresh completion i setting Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit p disconnect ee annie oe ete pepe pe O Setting possible X Setting impossible 1 GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later supports the Q series C24 of function version B 2 See Section 2 7 of this manual for how to check the software version of GX Configurator SC App 5 App 5 APPENDICES For received data For transmitting data For confirmation of communication protocol execution status App 6 MELSEC Q 3 Additional setting items in GX Works2 In addition to the setting items in GX Configurator SC the following items can be also configured in the auto refresh setting with GX Works2 Setting item Reception area Reception area user setting area Reception area user setting area 2 Transmission area Transmission area user setting area Transmission area user setting area 2 Protocol execution status Buffer memory address CH2 600H to 7FFH AOOH to BFFH COOH to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH 400H to SFFH 800Hto GEFH Version 1 31H or later Software version CH1 Predefined protocol function error code Protocol execution count COOH to 1AFFH Version 1 40S or later Version 1 31H or later 2600H to
41. ActEasy IF ACT control for utility setting type b Program example For each development software the program examples are described below 1 Visual Basic NET 2003 2 Visual C NET 2003 3 Visual Basic 6 0 4 Visual C 6 0 1 When Visual Basic NET 2003 is used Private Sub Command1_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command1 Click Ikkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Connection tkkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Integer Get LogicalstationNumber AxActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn AxActEasylF1 Open If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 29 App 29 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Private Sub Command2_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command2 Click tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Read Dim rtn As Integer Dim idata 5 As Short DO D4 are read rtn AxActEasylF1 ReadDeviceBlock2 DO0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox D0 D4 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command3 Click tkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Disc
42. Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 roy Fe i Designate the transmission data count in word units z Designate K10 when the unit is bytes e OUTPUT uo 0 ott Ho 7 The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent oep g M101 J After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal MO turns i _ ON for one scan VI NOY D mig Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and SET M102 issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are w all executed by the programmable controller CPU RST M101 The completion flag is reset by an external instruction RST M102 7 10 10 10 10 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 4 G INPUT Data can be received in any user defined message format using the non procedure protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function i t Index register data EEA user File register OETA module device Constant Others wora uvu ic wora Instruction Executing code condition Command Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module ae 9 User BIN16 bit E A to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit s Head number of the devices in which control data is stored eser sste Dovie rame Device name T Head number of the devices in which receive da
43. Configurator SC is used to change the system setting values of the Q series C24 and save the new values to a file or write them to the Q series C24 s flash ROM 3 Siar j Do you wish to NO change the setting values via Ai van Go to 1 setting via online operation oiline operation YES offline operation Start the Flash ROM setting Select a target intelligent function module screen See Section 9 3 1 screen Is the original data saved in a file Read the data from the file Load file Display the system setting sub screen Select in the Flash ROM setting screen for changing the setting values See Section 9 4 Click on each of the setting items f Change the setting values in the corresponding corresponding to the setting values system setting sub screens you wish to change For each item See Sections 9 4 1 to 9 4 11 enter or select the new setting value Have you changed all the applicable setting values In the Flash ROM setting screen click on the button Then in the file designation dialog box designate the file name under which the data will be saved All of the new setting values will be saved in the file x1 eeaeee aA This operation is allowed only in the Flash ROM setting screen See Section 9 3 3 x1 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup
44. Error code S1 2 Transmission data count Set the transmission data count 2 x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated and set the number of words when words are selected as the unit types 3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the OUTPUT instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the OUTPUT instructions 10 7 10 7 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the non procedure protocol of the module specified in Un QCPU Q series C24 _ Channel to be _ used is set by b15 to bO E i J the control data S2 0 E 1 S i 2 AA HOH Nn ______ a oS Channel 2 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the OUTPUT instruction or executing the OUTPUT instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution
45. Operation of QJ71C24N R2 R4 e If the cancellation is requested when protocols are not executed the cancellation is completed in no operation e If the cancellation is requested when the communication protocol setting is other than the communication protocol mode the value of the cancellation designation area is ignored e When the protocol with the communication type of Send amp receive is cancelled execute the receive data clear after the cancellation When the response from the other device is slow and data are received after the cancellation the receive data remains in the OS area receive data area For details of the receive data clear refer to Section 6 1 4 e When Protocol cancellation specification is 1 Cancellation request the next CPRTCL instruction cannot be executed 10 26 10 26 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Program example The following is a program in which a cancellation is requested to the protocol being executed when the start I O number of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 is 0000 Devices used by program example Device Purpose M100 Cancellation request command flag M101 Cancellation request flag M110 Turns ON during execution of the CPRTCL instruction U0 G16448 Cancellation designation area M100 M101 M110 uo i if 1 H mov K1 16448 J Cancellation request SET ii J Set a flag for cancellation request a Pii K2 RST W101 y Cancellation comple
46. RUN ERR 1 RUN ERR NEU NEU NEU NEU r NEU NEU CH1 SD SD CH2 CH1 SD SD CH2 CH1 SD SD CH2 RD RD RD RD RD RD CH1 RS 422 485 Q SDA 2 CH1 RS 232 SDB 4 RDA 2 CH1 gt RS 232 RDB SG eo L I CH2 RS 422 485 SDA SDB 4 RDA 2 CH2 RDB RS 232 OO SG FG al I QO QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 5 5 1 The appearance of the QJ71C24 is almost the same as that of the QJ71C24N except for the model name part and serial number plate 2 The appearance of the QJ71C24 R2 is almost the same as that of the QJ71C24N R2 except for the model name part and serial number plate PN Name Contents O Display LED Display LED For details see 1 RS232 interface for serial communication with external 2 RS 232 interface devices D Sub 9 pin RS422 485 interface for serial communication with external RS 422 485 interface devices 2 piece terminal block RS422 485 interface for serial communication with external RS 422 485 interface devices 2 piece plug in socket block Serial number plate Indicates the serial No of the serial communication module 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO O
47. This section explains how to clear the programmable controller CPU information 1 Programmable controller CPU information a This is information about the access target CPU type used in MC protocol communications The Q series C24 obtains this information from the access target CPU at the time of initial access and stores it inside the Q series C24 Since access is made based on this information the processing speed will be increased from the second access b The programmable controller CPU information is cleared in the following cases When the programmable controller is powered OFF and then ON or when the CPU module is reset When the programmable controller CPU information clear request is executed 2 Ifthe programmable controller CPU information has not been correctly obtained Problems including the following may occur e Accessible device range is narrowed Error code 7140 Some of commands and or devices cannot be used Error code 7142p 714Dn In the above case execute the programmable controller CPU information clear request If initial access is made at startup of the access target CPU or while the network is unstable the programmable controller CPU information may not be correctly acquired 3 Operation of the programmable controller CPU information clear request a Write 4C43nH to the programmable controller CPU information clear request address 80n Set by the user b15 to bO Buf
48. Transmission setting status address 2511 2611 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 251H O O O O 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 261H O0 O OJ O 1 0 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Communication rate setting LL Setting modification LL Operation setting allow prohibit Data bit setting 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the setting status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads the setting of various switches of the Q series C24 from the setting status For details on ERR occurrence XE XF of the input output signals used in the program see Section 11 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction jH FROMP HO H203 DO K1 Reads error description from address 203 F KO DO Reads station number setting and switch setting description from address 200 Reads communication protocol setting and FROMP HO H200 DI Kt FROMP HO H250 D2 K2 transmission setting description on the CH1 side from addresses 250n to 2514 FROMP HO H260 D4 K2 Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on CH2 from addresses 2604 to 261n Restarts the Q
49. a lt Read command gt X1020 Read from buffer memory Changes the read command M10 X101E M100 M101 PLS M10 b L into pulses Reads the word byte units t H H RENFR ui KI KI HO H96 DO KI M100 designation area data of the buffer memory to DO rH SET M200 4 Normal completion of REMEPR instruction M101 H SET M201 Jj Abnormal completion of b lt Write command gt X1021 REMFR instruction Write to buffer memory Changes the write command into pulses Sets the word byte units PLS m1 y i AIOTE If Hov hi pi designation to byte mate Transfers the setting value to Z REMTO J1 KI KI HO H96 Di KI M102 J the word byte units designation area of the buffer memory App 39 t SET M202 J Normal completion of REMTO instruction M103 SET M203 7 J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction App 39 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand data The following program example sends on demand data using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals For the on demand function refer to the Reference Manual and the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions The following program sends on demand data from the CH1 side when the transmission command X1022 turns ON a Devices used e Transmission COMMANA cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeenees X1022 e Transmission command pulse s
50. command 0001H or monitoring stop command 0000p is set for send receive data monitoring designation address 2018H 2118H in the QJ71C24N R2 R4 For details of send receive monitoring refer to the User s Manual Application c RS DTR signal status specification ON OFF status of the RS RTS ER DTR signal is specified When the functional protocol 204 to 207 is executed corresponding bits of the RS DTR signal status designation address 92H 132H are turned ON OFF in the QJ71C24N R2 R4 For details of RS DTR signal status designation refer to Section 3 2 1 10 28 10 28 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 8 G P SPBUSY This instruction reads the status of data transmission and reception executed with dedicated instructions Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register data Eor user File register JOO module device Constant Others D uneo Z wel Instruction Executing code condition Comand G SPBUSY G SPBUSY GP SPBUSY fo GP SPBUSY Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Head number of devices in which the read communication status is D are System Device name Function 1 The function reads the execution status of a dedicated instruction directed to a module
51. e Registration result acquisition command seeeeeeeeeeeeee M13 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO S UCO sizes ter cia civetulerivereier vested a M200 to 203 Registration instruction ccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeeteeas DO Frame Now aienandiaicandiaiaiecieiecienieniediecieeieniedie D1 e Registration result oo ce ceeceeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeteeas D2 Number of data bytes registered 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeees D3 SUSOR TAM G cries tatvee chia cele ncterianteertlanitenladididlacieetieterecteardd D4 to 8 b Buffer memory settings used in this example adeci Address Decimal Hex mal Setting Name value ry O Register read delete instructions Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage App 53 App 53 APPENDICES 2 Program example lt Registration command gt ana PLS lt Setting of user frame gt M10 M12 XIGIE i LMOV Kl MOV H3E8 s i K10 s L H3946 s H3030 MOV H3030 MOV H4646 Trov H3030 Z RENTO JI Kl KI HO H2 00 K2 M100 M101 H r PLS M101 H SET lt Registration command 2 gt M11 X101E H Z RENTO 1 Kl Kl HO H5 D3 K6 M102 M103 SET M103 SET lt Flash ROM write request gt M12 X1018 SET X1018 lt Read of App _ F registration
52. or divide the transmission data before sending 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When transmitting ABCDEFG123 The transmit area is the default value CH1 side address Buffer memory 400 1 n 5or10 esmes Transmission data count In accordance with the word byte units designation 4011 B A Word units 5 42u 41u Bytes units 10 4024 D C 44n 43H 43 E amp E 2 45 Transmission data designation L__ 461 Behe ete eeu ea Sequentially store the transmission data to low address L gt H next 4041 1 G address L gt H in the order of transmission 31H 47Tu 4051 3 2 33H 324 4064 5 4 35H 34n N N 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission data A sequence program for transmission data is explained below For details on the OUTPUT instruction used for data transmission see Chapter 10 Transmission instruction In case of the CH1 side Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO G OUTPUT Un MO M1 Processing for normal completion Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Q series C24 ready X1
53. sent from the other device Increase the Response monitoring time timer 1 value Default 5 seconds If an error has occurred in the CPU refer to the QCPU Q mode User s Manual Maintenance and Inspection and take corrective actions Increase the Response monitoring time timer 1 value Default 5 seconds If an error has occurred in the CPU refer to the QCPU Q mode User s Manual Maintenance and Inspection and take corrective actions Check the cancelled protocol in the CPRTCL instruction s control data execution count result and eliminate the cause of the cancellation If necessary clear the error information by error clear request YE YF To prevent concurrent execution of the CPRTCL instruction set the CPU to STOP before writing the protocol setting data Check the data length of the packet sent from the device Divide the packet data into several parts and send them separately Correct the data sent from the device If the protocol was edited in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function check the packet format of the external device to see if the number of digits is set correctly 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal Invalid number of digits error Data length error Value range error Data length setting error data quantity setting error Decimal point position error 7E00u to System error 7E05x 7E06s Buffer memory
54. 1 10L or later Versions prior to Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later SWODSC QSCU E 40E are not usable SWOD5C QSCU E 00A Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later QTAHIQZSHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later iene ane Q02PH QO6PHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 68W or later Version 1 13P or later Multiple CPU system Versions prior to Single CPU system f SWODSC QSCU E 40E Q12PH Q25PHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 7 10L or later are not usable Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 45X or later Version 1 14Q or later Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU single CFU system v ersion 8 76E or later Version 2 17T or later Refer to the GX Works2 Multiple CPU system CPU system Version TO ti ersion perating Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Q0 Single CPU system 6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 48A or later Version 2 12N or later Manual Common Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Version 2 17T or later Multiple CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 62Q or later Version 2 12N or later Multiple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system QO6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or later Version 2 17T or later Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Single CFU system Version 8 76E or later Version 2 17T or later Multiple CPU system CPU modules other than the Single CPU system When installing an MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later diaa n e
55. 2 Designate the storage capacity of transmission data stored in D10 to D11 in the program example above and data length stored in D2 in the program example above within the range of the buffer memory the user has assigned for an on demand function 10 6 10 6 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 G P OUTPUT Data can be sent in any user defined message format using the non procedure protocol Applicable device Set Internal device aa direct device Intelligent function A Index register data aes user File register a module device Z Constant Others n uoco wora Instruction Executing code condition Command G OUTPUT apail eom e e a o H Command Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit rst Head number of the devices in which control data is stored User User system Device name S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored D Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data transmission channel S1 0 Transmission channel Channel 1 CH1 side 12 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Transmission result by an OUTPUT instruction are stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0
56. 21 2 3 H HMW gate OFF time nsee 3 9 How to detect reception error bidirectional AAA ETE le A EN EE EEA 7 13 How to detect reception error non procedure EET E EEEE EE EE TE A ENEE 6 19 How to detect transmission errors bidirectional E E E 7 22 How to detect transmission errors non proceduro h oroeurure ra rann n 6 30 I I O assignment settings eee 4 13 Individual station loopback test 4 29 Individual station test eee 4 26 Initializing error information eee 11 6 INPUT eaae ea inant terete 10 11 Installing utility package 0 eee eee tees 9 4 Interrupt pointer cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 21 L LEDs displayed srera 4 4 Linked operation ccccceeeeeeeeeeeteees 4 18 List the functions of the Q series C24 3 14 List of applications and assignments of the buffer MOMOTSY ceeceeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeteeetenes 3 23 List of input output signals for the programmable controller CPU 005 3 20 M IV A bite en tect ALE tea rete teeta he 2 5 Monitor test 0 c csccccsctecteeeseceeteeteceteeeee 9 36 Multiple CPU system ceeeee 1 9 5 3 N E E A EE EA eer erect AEAT 2 4 NAK a aa e aa eee ged aa 11 42 Non procedure protocol ceseeees 6 1 Index 1 O P Q R ONDEMAND 0 ccceeceeeseeeeseeeseetenees 10 3 Operation MOdEC ccccceeeeeeeteeeteeees 11 14 OUTPUT eoe errr cept
57. 7 bit code The codes 00H to 1FH marked are used as Q series C24 control codes The DC codes 11H to 14H can be changed by the user as o_ _1_ _z_ _s_ _4_ _s_ _s_ _7_ 111 wo J Q 0 Q0 0 Oo S2 oOoz zr aj IQ0 nmo n0w FE JX 1 l aN lt xXx SF lt lo Fr DH Tmo FINX xk ES lt CHwWODWDOND 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F o 5 3 App 19 App 19 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 5 External Dimensions 1 QJ71C24N QU71C24 The external dimensions of the QJ71C24 are almost the same as those of the QJ71C24N except for the model name part and serial number plate nn Outside cable diameter x 4 10 K 98 pH P L 90 es Unit mm 1 R1 Bending radius near terminal block Outside cable diameter X 4 2 R2 Bending radius near connector Outside cable diameter x 4 3 r4 Bending radius near crimp contact Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 20 App 20 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24 R2 The external dimensions of the QJ71C24 R2 are almost the same as those of the QJ71C24N R2 except for the model name part and serial number plate
58. Buffer memory Data reception result Receive data count x When the received data count is larger than the allowable received data count only the data up to the allowable received data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 1 MELSEC Q Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 More than one BIDIN instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDIN instruction only after the execution of the first BIDIN instruction is completed If the communication data count is set in byte units and the receive data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of receive data to the programmable controller CPU OOH is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive data storage area 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 4 How to detect rec
59. CH2 side switch 3 upper level 1 2 3 Communication rate Bit ee Communication rate Bit ee ae Remarks Unit b15tob8 O b8 Unit e b15tob8 O b8 mo O Try lowering the communication rate when data cannot be communicated normally with an external device due to overrun x1 Transmission speed of 230 400 bps is available for only CH1 of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 x2 When connecting external devices to both of two interfaces the total of the communication speed should be 115 200bps or less 230 400 bps or less if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 When connecting an external device to either of two interfaces the maximum of 115 200 bps is available for the interface the maximum of 230 400 bps if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 In this case set 300 bps for the other interface to which no external device is connected x3 Set 00H to the interface for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting The serial communication module will operate at the communication speed set on GX Developer c Communication protocol setting CH1 side switch 2 CH2 side switch 4 GX Developer connection GX Developer communication rate and transmission specifications are For connection to MELSOFT ae automatically set Formati o 1 For communication with ASCII code in the specified form of an A compatible 1C MC protocol Format3 frame or QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame a i a For communication wit
60. Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information H W Information H W Information r Module Display format Module Name 0J71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B ii o HES C DEC H W LED Information _ HAW SW Information _ Item Value Item t Value 18D WAIT 0000 23D WAIT 0000 1 CONFIG o7co CH1 S10 0001 CH2 SIO 0000 CH1 MODE 0001 CH1 PRO 0000 CH2 PRO 0000 2 CONFIG o7co CH1 P S 0000 CH2 P S 0000 CH2 MODE 0006 CH1 C N 0000 CH2 C N 0000 ST NO 0000 CH1 NAK 0000 CH2 NAK 0000 CH1 ACK 0000 CH2 ACK 0000 CH1 NEU 0001 CH2 NEU 0000 CH2 ERR 0000 CH1 ERR 0001 nitor Stop monitor Close 11 2 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Displays 1 H W LED Information Right side Left side CH1 information Right side CH2 information Displays the transmission status and the communications error status of the Q series C24 Displays 201H 202H of the buffer memory b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 2014 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information of CH1 side Xu j Ly x For system E SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK 1 LED ON error Lo KK 0 LED OFF no error NEU b15 b14 b13 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 elo Joo
61. GX Configurator SC Version 2 21X or later as an add in to GX Developer Version 8 98C or later 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Operating system and performance required for a personal computer i Performance required for a personal computer Operating system 1GB or more 32 bit version Windows 7 Pentium 1GHz or more 2GB or more 64 bit version The following functions cannot be used when the computer is running under Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 This product may not perform properly when these functions are used Activating the application with Windows compatible mode Simplified user switch over Remote desktop Large font size Advanced setting of Display Properties DPI setting other than 100 64 bit version Windows XP Mode Windows Touch 1 Supported by Windows 7 Use the product as a user having a privilege higher than USER for Microsoft Windows Vista 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 3 Utility Package Operation 9 3 1 Operation overview GX Developer screen LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Tools Window Help The following settings must be performed before starting mer mran tE ae ute u erge data s stoart a Te Ciak paratie the intelligent function module utility Transfer ROM Delete unused comments Set the project using GX Developer Set QCPU Q mode for the PC series Clear all parameters IC
62. Manual protocol Fowerg pits First 2 digits ot year Not allowed Pre defined gt Lower 8 bits Day of week execution logs b15 to b8 b7 to bo protocol Year 00H to 99H first 2 digits Day of week 00H to 06H support 00H Sunday to 06H Saturday function E ti we Same as Execution log 1 DE Use prohibited System area 20224 to ae 4FO0H to 4FFFH O ti Send receive ities 20480 to 24575 area tor Pre defined 50004 i 5FFFH pre defined Pre defined protocol function buffer RW Not allowed protocol support ise 24576 to 32767 sabe 1 Tables a and b on the following page list the assignment of block monitoring device areas No 1 to No 10 for the programmable controller CPU monitoring function CH1 side 8272 to 8361 2050H to 20A9H CH2 side 8528 to 8617 2150H to 21A9h 2 In the pre defined protocol mode the area can be used as a user setting area the send and receive data storage areas 3 For the QJ71C24 R2 the initial value of OH is set for both CH1 and CH2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q a CH1 side buffer memory address decimal hexadecimal N th block monitoring device 5 6 8272 8281 8290 8299 8308 8317 8326 8335 8344 8353 2050H 2059H 2062H 206BH 2074H 207DH 2086H 208FH 2098H 20A1H Monitoring device designation 8273to 8282to 8291to 8300to 8309t0 8318to 8327to 8336to 8345to 8354to 8274 8283 8292 8301 8310 8319 8328
63. Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System English version 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System English version 4 1 Install GX Configurator SC in GX Developer Version 4 or later in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator SC Japanese version or GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator SC English version cannot be used in combination 2 GX Configurator SC is not applicable to GX Developer Version 3 or earlier Install GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function as an add in to GX Developer Version 8 78G or later amp 3 The recommended resolution is 1024 X 768 pixels or higher for Windows Vista and Windows 7 X4 For 32 bit Windows 7 install GX Configurator SC Version 2 21X or later as an add in to GX Developer Version 8 91V or later For 64 bit Windows 7 install
64. No 801FH 8183 to 8191 1FF7Hto Use prohibited System area 1FFFH Flash ROM write allow prohibit designati 8192 yan l asl Wniea ow prohibit designation l RW Nobuliowea Sesion sda 20001 designation 0 Write prohibited 1 Write allowed 8194 Callback function designation Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 4 Callback connection during designated number Setting 5 Callback connection during max designated number is 10 3 Setting 6 Section 9 4 4 Auto Callback connection during fixed are Setting 1 Auto Callback connection Allowed User s Manual during designated number Setting 2 Fu Auto Callback connection Application during max designated number is 10 i Callback denial notification accumulated count designation Ou Not specified 2002 to FFFFu Notification accumulated number count 8195 to 8198 200314 to Use prohibited pmenaes area 2006x 8199 Auto modem initialization designation 0 Do not auto initialize 1 Auto initialize Moden initialization time DR DSR signal valid invalid Allowed 0 Do not ignore DR DSR signal 1 Ignore DR DSR signal Section 9 4 4 Complete signal handling for modem function designation User s Manual 0 Do not turn on off X13 to X16 Not allowed Application 8193 20011 For callback function For designation of modem function 2 2007H 1 Turn on off X13 to X16 8200 2008H 8202 Wait time of notific
65. Not executed waiting for registration of programmable controller CPU monitoring 8708 8964 r ai F 1 Wait for programmable controller CPU monitoring time 2204H 23041 Allowed User s Manual Application waiting to access programmable controller CPU 2 Accessing programmable controller CPU Programmable 3 Sending monitoring results controller Gi Programmable controller CPU monitoring function execution result Not allowed Users Manual monitoring Application 8709 8965 current function 2205n 2305H 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code 8710 8966 transmission 1 or more Number of transmissions 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address 3 Initial Preto A Reference Decimal Hex Application Registration section val Mc Non Bi Pa Monitoring condition arrival block No Programmable 0 The monitoring condition is not enabled for any block 8711 8967 controller CPU 1 to 10 Registration order of word bit block nth Net alowed User s Manual 22071 23071 monitoring 4096 CPU abnormal monitoring block Application function The latest block No for which monitoring condition is enabled is stored Use prohibited System area Callback permit accumulated count 8944 2 0 or more Accumulated count Callback denial accumulated count SOG 0 A ted count or more Accumulated coun Section 9 6 2 B046 2 For callback Auto callback connection permit a
66. PLC fie PLCRAS Device Program Boot fie SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment lot Lad Switch setting fea oes Intell x C24N ae X Detailed setting E pa the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Auto C Detal 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Defautt Sett should be set hen poino iok Eo estas sinaw Import Muiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Defaut Check End Cancel Display description Item name Setting for item Remarks Type Select intelli Model name Enter the module model name to be mounted Example QJ71C24N Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the start I O signal Hexadecimal for the target module 1 0 assignment E Switch setting Set the communication rate transmission specifications communication protocol etc See Section 4 5 2 Detailed setting Select the control CPU of the Q series C24 when a multiple CPU system is employed Multiple CPU settings Select when using a multiple CPU system See QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module Setting purpose In the switch setting for I O modules and intelligent functional modules set the transm
67. PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the non procedure protocol 1 Transmission area The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the programmable controller CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to SFFH CH1 side and 800 to 9FFH CH2 side CH1 side i Sssseee The unit of transmission data count words bytes address Buffer memory is in accordance with the word byte units designation in QSCU 400 Transmission data count 3 The transmission data count designated with the 401H OUTPUT instruction is written to 2 w Transmission data le f wi nnn The transmission data designated with the OUTPUT Fa instruction is written 5FFu Default setting 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length See Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows
68. Q series C24 using either of the following functions use the Q series C24 of function version B When the Q series C24 of function version A is used only the control CPU can be accessed Access to the non control CPU will result in an error e Communication using MC protocol e Communication using GX Developer External device Multiple CPU system Communication using GX Developer Communication using MC protocol I AIE Q series C24 of function version B 2 Ifthe other stations to be accessed belong to the multiple CPU system the modules used for routing and QCPUs at the local station all the relay stations and the accessed station should be modules of function version B or later This has to hold in all cases of accessing the non control CPU of the module used for routing and the accessed station x1 Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control CPU of the module to be routed through is the same or different External device Local bat Peripheral device HHA l Communication through GX Developer ARS Communication using the MC protocol Setting from GX Developer cc Link IE Controller Network Relay station 1 CPU No 1 2 CPU No 2 3 CPU No 3 4 CPU No 4 Module used for routing controlled by CPU
69. Q series C24 allows the sequence program to read the receive data up to the receive complete code received from the external device The receive complete code can be changed to match the specifications of the external device An arbitrary 1 character 1 byte code within the 00H to FFH range can be designated The Q series C24 issues a receive data read request to the programmable controller CPU as follows according to the set value of the receive end code 1 When receive complete code not changed Default value ODOAn CR LF is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device If LF is received within the time set in the no reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the receive data up to CR LF to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the reception data read request X3 X4 to the programmable controller CPU Timer 0 set time External device Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 XA 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e If the next data LF etc is not received within the time set in the non reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the received data up to CR to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the following signals to the programmable controller CPU When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 0 Reception abnorm
70. REMTO instruction Buffer memory head address for on demand function Data length for on demand function Transfers the setting value to the on demand function designation area of the buffer memory Sets the on demand data transmission flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the transmission request signal Resets the on demand data transmission flag Normal completion of on demand data transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of on demand data transmission On demand execution result acquisition command Reads the on demand execution result of the buffer memory to D8 LED ON status acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Reads the LED ON status of the buffer memory to D9 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 41 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol The following program example receives data under the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol Refer to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol Refer to the User s Manual Application for data communication using the user frames 1 Program conditions The fo
71. SG DR OFF CD DCD 24 Te l 25 7 OFF These switches should ER DTR CNT be ON when the KS 485 8 OFF is at the terminal of the line x Data communication can be made in half duplex communication e Transmission control cannot be used App 24 App 24 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports any types of communication paths between IBM PC AT compatible personal computers and programmable controllers It allows the users to establish using simple processing only without having to know about the different communication protocols used in the individual communication It also supports various programming languages allowing for a wide range of application development This section provides the overview of the functions provided by MX Component and explains the procedure up to creation of applications x See Operating Manual and Programming Manual of MX Component for the details Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component This section provides the overview of MX Component Different communication paths operating systems programming languages and functions are supported depending on the version of MX Component used 1 Support for a wide range of communication paths to programmable controllers MX Component supports a wide range of communication paths to programmable controllers It is possible to construct systems according to the needs of
72. Send amp rece Send Recv Mor Functional H7B RD Opera Send amp rece Save CSV file MELSEC Q Select a target module and write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM With a dedicated instruction CPRTCL execute the protocol that was written to the flash ROM In the Protocol execution log list information of the executed protocol such as protocol name start and end times and dates execution result can be monitored With the circuit trace function communication data and control signal states can be also confirmed Communication using the modem function is not available for the pre defined protocol 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Pre defined protocol system setting In the Pre defined protocol system setting window of GX Configurator SC Intelligent function module utility register the system setting value for data communication with the pre defined protocol For information on how to display the setting screen refer to Section 9 4 9 Setting screen CH1 Pre defined protocol system setting Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24 N Setting item Setting value Execution log options Error logs Details Select input Setting range Error logs Alllogs Setting item The condition for registering protocol execution logs can be specified Execution log options Error logs Faile
73. Set monitoring time or shorten the specified time and then transmit data from the external device to find a cause from the timeout error Part of the messages is not read e Transmission from the external device is interrupted Perform cancel processing to complete the CPRTCL instruction execution Bidirectional procedure Pre defined 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 7 Communication error NAK Symptom Corrective action See section that describes Bidirectional procedure Pre defined the communication error signal C N P S PRO SIO that are turned on simultaneously when the NAK signal is turned on e Take corrective action corresponding to the contents of the error Communication error signal NAK turned Since the error code is added to NAK and is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external on device when the NAK signal is turned on take the corrective action described in the error code table see Section 11 2 Since the error code added when NAK is transmitted is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory shown below it can also be checked at the Q series C24 Error code storage buffer memory address CH1 side CH2 side 11 3 8 Communication error C N Symptom Corrective action E E be installed in the CPU can be installed e PC No designated local e Change the PC No to local station FF ora station FF or a station station No set with th
74. TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Error Code Tables The following shows the error codes error contents and corrective action for errors that are generated during communication between the Q series C24 and an external device The signal name in the following table indicates the CHO side LED on status or communication error status that is stored into buffer memory address 201H 202H when an error occurs The CHO side LED on status and communication error status can be confirmed by GX Developer s System monitor or GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 11 1 1 For errors without a corresponding signal name entered to errors generated with the MC protocol communication NAK comes on 11 2 1 Error code table The following table lists the error codes error details and corrective actions for the errors that may occur during communication using MC protocol excluding A compatible 1C frame non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol or pre defined protocol The error codes with a mark in the table are those for when the target CPU is not a Q QnACPU s Protocol Error code Signal Hexa Error Description 9 Corrective action Bidire Pre name MC re decimal ctional defined 3E8H e Refer to the QCPU User s Manual to Error detected by the CPU Hardware Design Maintenance and 3FFFuH Inspection and take corrective action e Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and take corre
75. Tp instruction execution a the scan at the completion of f the Input instruction execution Reception data External device side 1 App 17 i 2ms 2 Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Input instruction when receiving 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N Unit ms e Scan time 10 ms 10 0 09 X 100 7 0 26 00 ms x2 When only using CH1 of the Q series C24 and when processing only 30 bytes of data received the time until the reception data read request X3 comes on is displayed after the Q series C24 receives data from the network 3 When DX3 direct mode is used the Q series C24 is accessed at the time of the instruction execution on the sequence program DX3 speeds up reading input compared to X3 refresh mode For differences between modes refer to the user s manual function explanation program fundamentals of the CPU module used App 17 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Processing time of dedicated instructions The following table lists the operation processing time rough standard of each dedicated instruction The operation processing time differs slightly depending on the system configuration and communication protocol a For Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Processing time unit ms namie on the right Transmission Transmission receive ee QJ71C024 QJ71C24N QJ710
76. When an external device sent a command message and received an abnormal end response message take corrective action with the error according to the error code in the response message see Section 11 2 11 49 11 49 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 When the following problem occurs at the time of access to other station CPU clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 e Accessible device range is narrowed Error code 7140n Some of commands and or devices cannot be used Error code 7142H 714Dn b When response messages cannot be received Change the setting value for the response monitoring time timer 1 default value is 5 seconds See the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after changing the setting value check the communication protocol setting of the corresponding interface the ON status of the displayed LED and the connection cable c When the first part of a response message cannot be received Increase the setting value of the message wait time the default value is 0 ms See the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after increasing the setting value it is necessary to reduce the processing time from the end of transmission processing to the start of reception processing on the external device side 11 50 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 14 Undecidable data are transmitted or r
77. X Y1F wovP KI DO Designate the receive channel MOvP Ko D2 Clear the receive data count storage device to 0 vovP Ki0 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count With the normal completion the receive data within MO MI 6 BIDIN UO DO D10 MO the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory 10 20 rt Mov D2 Z0 J After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal M0 comes fBNOV D10 D110 Kozo on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the programmable controller CPU 10 20 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 7 G P CPRTCL Protocols and functional protocols written to the flash ROM with the predefined protocol support function can be executed For details of the functional protocol refer to Section 10 7 1 Applicable device Internal device ee direct device Intelligent function ENA user File register ee module device Executing Instruction code condition Command G CPRTCL G CPRTCL Command GP CPRTCL __ GP cPRTCL Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Upper 2 digits when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Channel to communicate with other devices 1 Channel 1 CH1 side BIN16 bit Device name 2
78. area gt Size of data portion sent from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Arrangement of receive data The following example illustrates the arrangement of data received from the external device when it is stored in the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive data storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L H next address L H order If the received data is ABCDEFG123 it will be stored as shown below for the CH1 side Q series C24 Receive area buffer memory Receive 5 data count 00x 05x Data B A length 424 44H 0005 Di C L HY 444 43x Receive Fae data 46x 45x i 1 G 31n 47x 3 2 33H 32h External device Normal completion When the data length unit is in bytes OOH is stored in the higher byte of the last data storage position in the receive area when the data length of the message is an even byte 3 Contents of receive data The contents of receive data including the receive data as indicated in Section 7 2 2 are explained below a Control codes The types of control codes are listed in the table below Signal Code ws Contents Application name hexadecimal Code for starting data transmission Response code to the opposite side when data was r
79. assignment Multiple CPU ettinas Default Check End Cancel Display details Select Inteli Modelname Select QJ71C24N Select 32 points Start XY Enter 0000 4 On I O assignment click the Switch setting button The window shown on the next page appears 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e Switch setting for intelligent function module Set the transmission specifications and communication protocols with external devices 1 Set items as follows and click the End button Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX t Type Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 S a a of inte QU IC24N DE SS e E 2 2 E ES eS SSeS ES en EE SE SEU nA S E el a EP E Se a s a a a a S 14 13 13 1414 Display details Item Setting Setting details value Input format Set the input format to hexadecimal swoi swin gt O CH2 Communication rate setting 19200bps Operation setting Independent Data bit 8 Parity bit Exist CH2 A Switch 3 07DE eo Even odd parity Even Transmission A Stop bit 2 setting Sum check code Disable Online change Enable Setting modifications Allowed CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 4 0009 Predefined protocol switchs 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELS
80. c 2000 VideoSoft Corporation SPREAD Copyright c 1996 FarPoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080006 R SH NA 080006 R 1503 MEE MODEL QJ71C24 U KI E MODEL CODE 13JL86 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
81. command lt Read of delete result gt M12 X101E Reads the delete result from the t c eL REMFR JI Ki Ki HO H4 D2 Ki M102 flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 M102 M103 SET 201 Normal completion of REMFR instruction M103 i SET M202 Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction RST Y10918 J Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal RST CAR J Sets the delete flag App 58 App 58 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting This section provides a program example that changes the communication protocol and transmission setting using the REMFR REMTO instructions and I O signals When the module is used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the station No cannot be changed because the UINI instruction is unavailable For changing the communication protocol and transmission setting refer to the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions When the change command X1031 turns on the communication protocol and transmission setting are changed Address Decimal Hexadecimal CH1 a Devices used by user Change command cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeseeetieesieetieesieeeeees X1031 Changing flag 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeseesieeseesieesieeeeees M300 Change completion flag eceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesieetneeeneees M301 CH1 change command pulse Signal cc
82. communicate again e A remote password processing command is not necessary when a remote password is not registered e Perform a remote password unlock processing through GX Developer O Alternatively change the communication protocol setting of the corresponding CH to the MC protocol e Clear the storage area of the accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion processing address 22FC 1 to 0 Refer to the error code list for use of the modem function and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 2 3 e Write CPU to the parameter and reboot after correcting the setting value for the switch 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal 7FFOu Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FF1x Control data error Setting valus S incorra e Setting value is out of range Communication protocol setting error 7FF24 7FF34 to 7FF4H 7FF5u eee D000 System error Processing cancelled due to mode switching transmission sequence initialization etc Simultaneous access error ss e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error DEEE e Executed dedicated instructions simultaneously e Instruction cannot be executed with the current communication protocol e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e The processing in operation was cancelled due to execution of the following lt Mode switching transmission sequence initializa
83. communication between external devices 1 When data communication is performed in order to link with an external devices to perform a 1 1 communication with the programmable controller CPU it is necessary to change the station number 80H to AOH 00H to 1FH designated in the Station number and Local station number items in the messages on the external device side It is not necessary to specify this when an A compatible 1C frame is used Alternatively it is necessary to change the message frame so that it has a data order different from that of the MC protocol Station number Designate the number of device to which data is sent e Local station number Designate the number of the device that sends data 2 Perform the data communication according to the User s Manual Application c Processing reception data on the external device side Set the external device so that it ignores the following reception messages that are unrelated to the local station e The command message and the corresponding response message that are sent from other stations when accessing the programmable controller CPU using the MC protocol e Messages when accessing between external devices 2 Data communication using 1 n connection When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the programmable controller in the QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 for binary code communication Since performances and response speeds are
84. connection 20E8H 21E8H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 11 Transmission user frame No designation system setting Purpose Register the output frame number to transmit data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Output frame system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Output frame system setting Setting screen MEE r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Input within the following value range for the non procedure protocol H0001 H03e7 Default frame HO03e8 HO4at Flash ROM registered user frame H8000 Transmit area of buffer memory H8001 H801f Buffer memory registered user frame When bit 14 is tumed ON 1 for the non procedure protocol only the output frame No designation can be transmitted without ASCII BIN conversion and addition of additional code Input by the following value range for the modem initialization HO7d0 HO 7db 0S registered initialization data H09c4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801F Buffer memory initialization data For PLC CPU monitoring input within the following value range in the non procedure protocol X r Flash ROM setting Write to module Read from Load file module
85. designated e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated e Number of access points exceeded the range A compatible 1C eA device that cannot be designated was designated frame error e Written number of monitoring points is incorrect For example 0 was designated e Monitor data was written for a CPU other than a Q QnACPU using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame e In control data of the CPRTCL instruction the specified protocol No is Correct the protocol No setting out of range e The number of protocols to be executed continuously which is specified with an Correct the value set for the number of argument in the CPRTCL instruction is protocols to be executed continuously out of range 71694 CPU error e To use a Built in Ethernet port QCPU use a Q series C24 of function version B or later and the first 5 digits of its serial No must be 10042 or greater 1 e Rewrite monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 716FH Device error e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Write the monitor data and use the A compatible 1C frame to a CPU other than a Q QnACPU Monitor data write error Protocol No setting error Continuous protocol execution count setting error Confirm Pre defined protocol ready X1D turned ON before executing the CPRTCL instr
86. device connected to two interfaces that are not interacting using functions set in the communication protocol settings MC protocol non procedure protocol 5 When communicating data using the modem function PONT When two interfaces are in linked operation the transmission time for one character becomes equal to the hardware gate off time of the Q series C24 c The data flow in linked operation is as follows AUN 1 Two interfaces operate linked together using functions defined with the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side MC protocol in the same format or a non procedure protocol within the transmission specifications set in the respective transmission settings specifications for CH1 and CH2 must be the same Q series C24 data flow in linked operation CH1 Transmits only bns to a designated gt CH side Ware CH2 gt z 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q x In linked operation all data received from one of the two interfaces is transmitted from the other interface In this case exclusive control of the received data is necessary when data is communicated using the non procedure protocol since all the connected stations receive the data When data communication is performed using the MC protocol only the Q series C24 having the station number designated in the message performs the process designated by the command Furthermore when data communica
87. different between the Q series C24 and the UC24 C24 S8 communication may not be performed normally when a programmable controller module in the A series is replaced by a Q series programmable controller When a module is changed to a Q series programmable controller module make sure to check operation App 15 App 15 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Processing Time 1 Time required to process communication using the non procedure protocol guideline The processing time for the Output and Input instructions can be estimated by the following formula Note however that the processing time may become longer depending on other communication functions e g communication using the MC protocol and special functions e g ASCll binary conversion transmission control that are used at the same time The value obtained from the following formula should be used as a guideline for the processing time when reception or transmission only is performed using only CH1 RS 232 connection a Output instruction Tp St Die Cr X 1000 0 07 X Ds T1 Tp The time from the start of execution of the Output instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Output instruction execution ms St Scan time Die Data length of 1 byte at data transmission number of bits Cr Communication rate bps Ds Number of bytes of transmission data T1 QJ71C24N R2 R4 T1 3 0 QJ71C24 R2 T1
88. digits are 1703 and the HIROSE Electric Co Ltd RDED 9SE LN 55 sixth digit is 8 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 Appendix 6 2 Connection examples when using a converter This section provides connection examples where an RS 232 to RS 422 485 converter is used in order to communicate data using data communication functions with the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol The converters covered in this Appendix are as follows Model name Manufacturer Contact Recommended product Funato cho 7 16 Nakagawa ku Nagoya 454 0805 Tel 052 361 2290 Fax 052 363 1050 EL Engineering Ltd EL LINE II System Sacom Co Ltd www sacom co jp x The recommended products have been verified and satisfy our criteria When using any of these products use it so that it conforms to the recommended product s specifications standards 1 Combination between available converters and interfaces Q series C24 side System configuration External device i Description No of es f Available converter j connection interface with external devices interface connection example EL LINE II Connection example 1 KS 1 KS 10P Connection example 2 Connection example 3 RS 422 485 Connection example 4 App 22 App 22 APPENDICES
89. e Correct the message format so the number of access points is within the allowable range e Write the device to be monitored before issuing a monitor request e If there is an error in the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data communications 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Signal Non exa rror escription orrective action Bidire H E Descripti 2 Corrective acti name MC Proce _ decimal ctional dure e Check the transmission 7164 Recuestenor e Either the request or the device message request from the external d designation method is wrong device make the necessary O corrections and send again The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Ch the setting to Enable writ e A write command was designated when a pols ese a a tee Cannot execute a F 3 during RUN and restart data Disable write during RUN was set ee command during communications RUN e Acommand that cannot be executed cn Stop the CPU and restart data during RUN was designated communications e If there is an error in the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data communications e Cannot communicate normally with the CPU 716A e The OS of the Q series C24 detected to System error eme ara 716B4 e The Q series C24 used is not compatible with the Built in Ethernet 716C System error port QCPU some error Monitor data write compatible 2C 3C 4C frame compatible 1C frame e A nonexistent device was
90. each message STX in format 3 In ASCII code communication In binary code communication i in format 2 aa Block No Station No link station for link station Block No Station No link station System data Frame ID No System data for link station Frame ID No for link Module I O No for Frame ID No for link Module station No System data m x No of data bytes I Module station No Module I O No for H T gt Header information 13 15 characters Header information 10 byte 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting The following explains the interrupt pointer setting with GX Developer in order to receive data using an interrupt program For how to receive data using an interrupt program see the User s Manual Applications Setting purpose The intelligent function module interrupt pointer sets the information to read the receive data with an interrupt program of the programmable controller CPU during communication using the non procedural bidirectional protocol By performing this setting an interrupt program starts when data is received from an external communicating device and the reading of data received by the programmable controller CPU becomes possible Startup procedure PLC parameters gt PLC sy
91. ee ch2ER Rumer e OE a Setting station Out of the setting station number range Review setting valus number g 9 see Section 4 5 2 cH1ERR ooo Romeor ooo d e Oe x1 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 4 Ending a ROM RAM switch test 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test results Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish tests Upon error occurrence When an error occurs in a switch check or linked operation setting check set the correct values and test again When an error occurs in a ROM or RAM check check the mounting status of module and test again If there is no error in the mounting status of module please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Perform the ending procedure for ROM RAM switch test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 2 to perform an individual loopback test operation 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with an external device Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPER
92. ee eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseaeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneeeeeseaeseneeaats 5 6 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device ccccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaceeseaeeceaeeteaeeeseeesiseenseeeaes 6 2 6 1 1 Receiving methods anena aA A AA aa Aa A ai 6 2 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list eeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeseeseeeaeeeas 6 6 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception ccecccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeseneeseaeeteaeeseieeensee 6 11 6 1 4 Receive data Clear iis cicin dla aided dala nada aisle diai alin d deal aieines haeai need iit 6 15 6 1 5 How to detect reception errors cccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaceesaeeceaeeeeaeeseaeeesaeeeseaeeeeeeseieees 6 19 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete code SettingS eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereseresieeeeeas 6 22 6 2 Sending Data to the External DeVICE ee eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaeetaeesaeesaeeseesaeesaeeseesieetieetietieeseees 6 24 6 2 1 Transmission Methods cc ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeececeeseaeeeeaeeeceeeeeaceeseaeeseaesecaeeseeeesieeeseaseesaeeeeneee 6 24 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data 08 6 25 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission Aata cccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseneeeeaeeeeeeesaeeeseneeesaees 6 27 6 2 4 How to detect transmission errors 00 2 eeece
93. error codes and changed setting values designate the correct setting values and switch mode DO D1 D2 D3 D4 DS FROME ROMP FRO TROP HO HO HO HO H203 H252 H262 H24F b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 K K2 K2 bel Reads error description from address 203n Reads CH1 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 2524 to 253n Reads CH2 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 2621 to 263n J Reads station No from address 24F Communication protocol CH1 side l Jora side l Station No 1 being set Error description 2 Communication rate error Setting communication protocol number 6 transmission setting description Setting communication protocol number 1 transmission setting description While the CH1 side is set to the non procedure protocol and the CH2 side is set to the MC protocol format 1 this indicates the communication rate setting error on the CH1 side 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 7 Clearing the programmable controller CPU information 11 16
94. etc The procedure for replacing a module including re registration of data is as follows lt Operation procedure when replacing the Q series C24 gt Step 1 Read all the system setting data of the Q series C24 using the Read from module function of GX Configurator SC Step 2 Save the system setting data read to the specified file using the function of GX Configurator SC gt 1 Step 3 Turn the power supply to the Q series C24 off Step 4 Dismount the cables and the module itself Step 5 Replace the module and start up the module according to 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation Step 6 Read the data saved in Step 2 back into the system and register the system setting data to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the Write to module function of GX Configurator SC lt Operation procedure when replacing the QCPU gt Step 1 Read the PLC parameters with GX Developer from the QCPU and save them Step 2 Replace the QCPU See the user s manual for QCPU Step 3 Register the PLC parameter saved by GX Developer back into the QCPU again x1 It is recommended to record and save the system setting parameters not only when replacing the module but also when changing the system setting parameters using GX Configurator SC 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q MEMO 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MEL
95. etc should be specified The buffer memory data is stored in 16 point units from the specified device number e g if M16 is set data is stored from M16 to M31 c The device can be set to auto refresh for required information only 2 Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU and saving them in a file a Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU Use online programmable controller write function of GX Configurator SC or GX Developer b Saving in a file Use the file storage function shown in the file items in the parameter module selection screen shown in Section 9 3 2 of GX Configurator SC 1 The auto refresh settings are stored in the intelligent function module parameter After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the CPU module it enables the auto refresh setting by turning the power OFF gt ON or by resetting the CPU module The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from the sequence program However it is possible to add a process similar to auto refresh by using the FROM TO command of the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Individual Station Test After installing the Q series C24 to the base unit of QCPU perform an individual station test first to check the switch setting see Section 4 5 2 and operation of the Q series C24 1 When a problem occurs during data communication with an external device perform an individual station test as des
96. external device and the receive data count in order to read the receive data for the programmable controller CPU By default the receive area is assigned to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOOH to BFFH CH2 side CH1 address Buffer memory ssSS gee The receive data count units word byte are up to the value 600x set to GX Configurator SC word byte units designation A 2 Receive data count Writes the receive data storage count when the programmable 6014 a fig t et tee tre A NA controller CPU is requested to read the receive data gt D to g Receive data Stores the arbitrary data area of the receive data 7FFH Default 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with the GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the receive data length See Section 9 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to SFFFu Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by address the length of the area 0001H to 1A00n to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address
97. following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position For designation Programmable address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side of programmable pans CPU 15An to 1BDH m Users Manual pp j pele Output count designation for condition agreement owe Application monitoring g idi i ant transmission and non procedure data transmission 8423 8679 designation i DUETA tole 0 No designation 6 ak P 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for condition agreement transmission and notification 8424 8680 0 No designation 20E8x 21E8x OBB8u to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection User s Manual Application sass 21009 Use Prohibited 8449 2101n Data No for callback designation 1 OBB8u to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data number for callback R W 8425 to 8681 to 8447 8703 20E9H 21E9H Use prohibited System area to to 20FFu 21FFH ee ee Section 9 4 4 ae Data No for callback designation 4 8453 21051 A Data No for callback designation 5 function 7 Data No for callback designation 6 Data No for callback designation 7 Data No for callback designation 8 a No for callback designation 9 a No for callback designation 10 8704 to 8960 to 8707 8963 2200H 23004 Use prohibited System area to to 22031 2303H Programmable controller CPU monitoring function operation status 0
98. following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred due to noise i A timeout for the no reception monitoring timer 0 occurred ee User s Manual Application Received data that could not be converted using the ASCII BIN conversion Received data larger than the size that could be stored in the OS area of the Q series C24 Section 6 1 2 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting the occurrence of a reception error 1 The following device and input signals turn ON INPUT instruction complete device 1 e Reception abnormal detection X4 XB ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The reception error code can be checked using the INPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data reception result address 258H 268h For details on how to check the error code contents and take corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write 1 to the Communication error clear request and to turn LED off addresses OH 1h 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side INPUT instruction Completion device 1 M 1 XOE YOE 6 DATA COMM
99. for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series programmable controller Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS taieta titel cient ied ele al ein ae alee A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUC T iior ii tinaaa aiaiai iiaia iaaii A 5 REVISIONS Piiira itise tiaaianraa aiaia taaa aaa aaa A 6 CONTENT S murni aa e a an a a aaa Raa aaea Gvencsranieadagasvunsaagiatsqasvuesscsetedtantsaivengesatints aa A 10 ABOUT MANUALS iraninaininnupnuii adnan a aaa a N A 16 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 0 eee ete teeter tee teeeetees A 16 THE MANUAL S USE AND STRUCTURE eee eet ete t etree teeter rest eee tae tae ia a A 17 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 00 cece eects teeter tee eeee testes sees tae tae teseeenaeeas A 20 DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMINOLOGY 00 oece cee eee te tee test teeter tee teee tae taeteeteaetaeas A 23 PRODUCT GONEIGURATIONowitiuniindiatiiien dine di ee ae eee tang A 25 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 to 1 15 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module
100. function reference page When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 To use the dedicated instructions change the following initial settings default values for data communications by registration operation from GX Configurator SC or by the CSET instruction for the sequence program 1 Initial settings for communication using the MC protocol e Setting the unit of data length sent by the on demand function Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136n Setting the buffer memory used by the on demand function Buffer memory head address designation addresses 160 A0H 320 140n Transmission buffer memory length designation addresses 163 A3H 323 143H 2 Initial settings for communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Setting the unit of data length to be sent and received Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136H Setting the transmission area Transmission buffer memory head address designation addresses 162 A2H 322 142n Transmission buffer memory length designation addresses 163 A3H 323 143H Setting the reception area Receive buffer memory head address designation addresses 166 A6H 326 146H Receive buffer memory length designation address
101. gomonuooweu __f_siz__ _as__ gozucpu O Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE 4096 2048 Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU CPU modules other than the above Not supported Not supported MELSECNET H remote I O station For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed to the MELSECNET H remote I O station configure the settings in GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings for all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the limit of the MELSECNET H remote I O station Calculate the total number of parameter settings separately for the initial setting and for the auto refresh setting The number of parameters that can be set for one module in GX Configurator SC is as listed below Target Module Initial setting Auto refresh setting J71C24N 0 Not used 48 Max 0 Not used 49 Max J71C24N R4 0 Not used 48 Max QJ71C24 0 Not used 48 Max QJ71C24 R2 0 Not used 49 Max 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC Example Auto refresh setting BBE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module side Module side PLC side Transfer Setting item Buffer size Transfer Pesta Device word count Flash ROM access register read delete result CH1 LED ON status communications error status CH2 LED ON status
102. i ee 34H i 47x Receive data response message 3 2 33x i 32x External device Normal completion 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 3 Sequence program for data transmission A sequence program for data transmission is explained below For details on the BIDOUT instruction for data transmission see Chapter 10 Transmission In case of the CH1 side instruction H Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO G BIDOUT Un DO D11 MO 1p Processing for normal completion M1 Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc Q series C24 ready X1E 1 Transmission instruction 2 3 BIDOUT BIDOUT instruction BIDOUT instruction complete device pissca _ ON when transmission BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 abnormal completion Normal completion abnormal completion Transmission data count address 4001 Transmission data address 4014 to Transmission data Data transmission Receiving response 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL X M50 1 Starts the local station programmable controller MELSEC Q The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 Inputs the user data transmission instruction signal 3 Executes the BIDOUT instruction after storing the transmission data and t
103. information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Setting value On demand function designation 0400 Buffer memory head address designation Data lenath designation 0000 nput following four items within the following range O Not designated H0001 H03e7 Default frame HO3e8 HO04af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame On demand user frame designation 0000 First frame No designation 1st First frame No designation 2nd 0000 Last frame No designation 1st 0000 Last frame No designation 2nd 0000 Message wait time designation 0000 0 No wait time z Details r Flash ROM setting Write to 7 mokis Save file Hexadecimal input Read fr P rodie Loadfie 0400 3FFF Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Buffer ea ee address Item Reference section Buffer memory head address designation rar Data length designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 7 Non procedure system setting Purpose For data transmission using the non procedure protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen CHO Non procedure system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Non procedure system setting Setting screen Hox r Module information Module type
104. lines to the sequence program Make communication when M19 is ON App 47 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user frames The following program example sends data by the user frames using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to the User s Manual Application for the transmission using the user frames 1 Program conditions The following program sends data using the user frames from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1026 turns ON a Devices used e Transmission command ccceeceeeteceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeseaees X1026 e Transmission command pulse signal ccceceeeeeeees M10 e Transmission user frame designation command 0 M11 e Transmission result acquisition command 0 00c M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSUUCON ee tinstieneeitriehriartenan wire wets M200 to 203 e Normal abnormal completion of transmission 06 M300 M301 e Transmission data COUN c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaees DO Transmission Cala ieiccscivisid aenacersiisaieveetcccuavevalteeiacceaesaiene D1 D2 CRYILF output designation sssrin eaa D5 Output head pointer designation ccccceeeeeeeteeetees D6 e Output count designation 0 0 ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenteeteees D7 e Output frame No designation ecceeeeeeee
105. lt Reception data Endcode When receiving variable length data c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function QCPU ASCII Q series C24 ASCII BIN conversion Binary data Binary data d It is necessary to create a sequence program for communication control that is appropriate to the external device e Communication can be performed using a user frame by registering the fixed format portion of the head and tail sections of a message as a user frame e When sending data the Q series C24 adds a user frame to any data specified by the user e When receiving data the Q series C24 transfers any data excluding the user frame to the programmable controller CPU When receiving data STX Any data format ETX ETX Any data format STX _ gt When sending data f Itis possible to clear the current reception data without interrupting the transmission processing by using the dedicated instruction CSET 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol Details are explained in Chapter 7 and the User s Manual Application a In communication between programmable controller CPUs and c
106. memory card Start ladder logic test Set TEL data Intelligent function utility EB support function Customize keys Change display color Options Create start up setting file Tools Intelligent function utility Start Select a target intelligent function When used via online operation module screen 1 Go to next page Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW sar lolx Inteligent function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target inteligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 000 Seal Cnanicaions Modde F When auto refresh is set on o a gt 2 Go to next page Flash ROM settings screen Stet VONo Module modelname Ia weting Auto reheah J oOo RIATCAANALR Unavalable Flash ROM setting Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module modelname QJ71C24 N iiidsetina __Aworehesh Dete w Setting item Setting value E User frame User frame Data for user modem initialization Data for modem irit Data for modem connection Data for modem conn H See Section 9 3 2 Modem function system setting Modem function CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control CHT MC protocol system setting CHT MC protocol When used via offline operation CHT Non procedure system setting CH1 Non procedure ly Select Tools Flash ROM setting fr
107. memory read write Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Reading writing buffer memory of an Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent function module intelligent function module The following devices of a MELSECNET H remote I O station can be accessed by the device memory read write function Note that the accessible devices and the ranges vary depending on the type of frames used for the data communication See the Reference Manual for a detailed explanation Device name Special relay Device symbol Device name Link relay Device symbol Special register Data register Input rela Output relay Link register Link special relay Internal relay Link special register It is only possible to read write from to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module for the MELSECNET 10 remote I O station compatible with the QnA A series x2 Programmable controller CPU monitoring can be registered using the MC protocol or GX Configurator SC The dedicated instruction CSET cannot be used for registration The device to be monitored can be registered within the device range of the MELECNET H remote I O station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x3 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the MELSECNET H remote I O station For the functions that use the dedicated instructions to make communication perform
108. mismatch notification accumulated count 00D H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Test Items The following accumulated count of times counter values can be cleared to 0 by the select test function Buffer renee ee address 2 Item cH Reference section Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 22FFH Callback permit accumulated count 22F0H a z User s Manual Application Callback denial accumulated count 22F1H Auto callback connection permit accumulated count 22F2H Auto callback connection denial accumulated count 22F3H Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 22F4H Operation procedure Step 1 Display the Modem function monitor test screen Step 2 Click the setting value area of the item to be cleared to 0 Step 3 Click the Execute test The counter value of the selected item becomes 0 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 3 Transmission control and others monitor test Purpose Monitor the RS 232 signal status and the various setting values for data communication Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO Transmission control monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module S
109. oa e a eee 10 28 TKO APSF BUS nan aR a te E a e EA N a A A R Hoes 10 29 10 9 ZP CSET Receive data Clear a nai R T OA A A AA R a 10 31 11 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module 00 0 0 eceeeeeeceeeeeteeeteeteeeeneetieetnneeneees 11 1 11 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial Communication module cceccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeiaeeseeeeeieees 11 1 11 1 2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module eceeeeeeeteeeteeeteetteeee 11 6 11 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control signal Status 0 c ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeenaeens 11 10 11 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence statuS eeeeeeeee 11 11 11 1 5 Reading the switch setting Status 2 0 eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeneateeas 11 12 11 1 6 Howto read the current operation Status ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeeaeeeseeeeseaeesseeseaes 11 14 11 1 7 Clearing the programmable controller CPU information cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeieetieees 11 16 112 Error Code Tapsi T a a a a a aa a a a a a o a 11 18 1121 Eropcodetable noran ann pecs ean ee ae cee e a a ee el hi toot 11 18 11 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table c cccecceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeees 11 30 11 2 3
110. of the Q series C24 prevents users at a remote location to access QCPUs illegally using the modem function of the Q series C24 The remote password is checked in the following forms of data communication e Communication using the MC protocol The remote password check is not carried out in data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Access to the programmable controller through GX Developer x The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions and used for preventing illegal access to the QCPU by other users Use GX Developer to set a remote password for the QCPU in order to activate the remote password function of the QCPU b Ifthe Q series C24 is specified in the parameters of a QCPU as being subject to the remote password check the remote password can be unlocked canceled using either one of the methods below to allow data communication from the external device It is necessary to connect a line to the modem first e When communicating using the MC protocol Use the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol to unlock the remote password from the external device When accessing the programmable controller through GX Developer Unlock the remote password using GX Developer at the start of online operation The remote password is automatically locked by disconnecting the line to the modem Set the parameters to make the Q series C24 as a subject to the remote password check Acces
111. out during reception Data received from the device could not be stored into the CPU within the set time A cancel request was accepted during protocol execution and the CPRTCL instruction failed The CPRTCL instruction failed because protocol setting data were written during CPRTCL instruction execution A packet of more than 2048 bytes was received When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a conversion variable variable number of data the number of digits corresponding to the variable is insufficient MELSEC Q Protocol MC Son dure Corrective action Bidire ctional Check if the specified protocol No is correct Check the Protocol registration area buffer memory 40914 to 40981 to see if the specified protocol No is registered Write the protocol setting data from GX Configurator SC and then execute the CPRTCL instruction Check if the transmission is interrupted due to some reason such as DTR control Check if the CS signal is ON Check the cables for disconnection Check if the reception is interrupted due to some reason such as DTR control Check the cables for disconnection Check the sending device for an error Using the circuit trace function communication data monitoring function check if 1 Transmissions from external devices are interrupted 2 Any data are missing due to a receive error 3 An error exists in the data packet
112. output designation 157H Output head pointer designation 158H 8H Output count designation 159H Timeout at No protocol 2014H 2114H User s Manual Application Receive data clear request Chapter 6 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 6 Bidirectional monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the bidirectional protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO Bidirectional monitor Monitor screen Hox r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Data transmission result Data reception result 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion 01 Transmission abnormal completion x02 Transmission processing in progress x03 Reception data read request Y00 Transmission request Y01 Reception data read completion Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid Send teceive valid designation Flash ROM setting _ r Details ae Write to Save fie Current value Monitoring module display Cannot execute test Hoey Load file Make text file Stop monitor Close Monitor items Buffer aaa address Item cH Reference section Data transmission result ENN apter Data reception result p X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal Se a X
113. program Receive area 2 4 Arbitrary data Read request When normal ENQ Data length Data area Sum check code 3 When abnormal 001 to FFn Read Ignored 2 BIDIN 24t W1 Error code NAK sien instructions Arbitrary data 4 00H to FFn ack gt Contents CH1 CH2 Control Timing X3 XA Reception data read request BIDIN instruction completion device BIDIN instruction 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 1 MELSEC Q When the control code ENQ is received the Q series C24 starts data reception processing When the data specified by the data length is received the Q series C24 ends the reception processing of that data If Sum check is set with GX Developer the Q series C24 checks whether the message is normal or abnormal using the sum check code received immediately after the message and the sum check code calculated by internal processing If No sum check is set with GX Developer messages are not checked using the sum check codes If the message has normally been received the reception data read request X3 XA turns ON If an error has been detected when receiving the message the Q series C24 sends an abnormal end response NAK message to the external device The reception data read request will not be sent to the programmable controller CPU The reception abnormal detection X4 XB does not come on Control data is stored in the device designated with the BID
114. programming by the following methods Dedicated instruction Method Explanation section FROM TO Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction Appendix 9 2 ONDEMAND Appendix 9 3 INPUT Appendix 9 4 Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and OUTPUT Appendix 9 5 I O signal BIDIN Appendix 9 4 BIDOUT Appendix 9 5 SPBUSY No method o oo O Perform programming using the receive data clear request area i CSET Receive data clear Appendix 9 6 of the buffer memory No method BUFRCVS z F Data cannot be received using an interrupt program Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and Appendix 9 7 CSET Initial setting I O signal Appendix 9 8 No method CSET Programmable controller Register delete the programmable controller CPU using the MC CPU monitoring function protocol or GX Configurator SC i Appendix 9 9 PUTE Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction and Appendix 9 11 I O signal 7 GETE Appendix 9 10 Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instructions UINI Appendix 9 12 and I O signals However the station No cannot be changed No method CPRTCL Communications using the pre defined protocol are not available k4 Available for the MELSECNET H remote I O station of function version D or later GX Developer Version 8 18U or later is required to use the function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q
115. programs for sending and receiving data for the programmable controller CPU For details on the additional functions listed below for data communication using the non procedure protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application e Sending receiving data using user frames Monitoring the programmable controller CPU automatic information function e Switching modes from the programmable controller CPU e Reading received data using interrupt programs Sending receiving data using transparent code designation e Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion e Controlling half duplex communication 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device This section explains data reception from the external device There are two methods for receiving data the reception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC 6 1 1 Receiving methods Programmable controller CPU 1 Reception data Receive data read request ge 2 3 INPUT instruction The following shows the methods for receiving data in any format using the non procedure protocol There are two methods for receiving data the re
116. pulses Sets the word byte units I designation to byte Transfers the setting value to the word byte units designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting command 2 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction J Sets 400 to the buffer memory head address for on demand transmission y Sets 0x to the buffer memory length for on demand transmission J Sets 0C00u to the transmission buffer memory head address y Sets 400 to the transmission buffer memory length Transfers the setting values to the on demand function designation and transmission area designation areas of the buffer memory J initial setting command 3 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction J Sets 600 to the receive buffer memory head address ry J Sets 200H to the receive buffer memory length Transfers the setting value to the receive area designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting completion 7 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction When changing the default values of the following buffer memory areas refer to X1027 PLS lt Setting of word byte units designation gt M10 X101E 1k wov K REMTO J1 Kl Ki HO H96 DO K M100 M101 E f WF PLS M101 H SET lt Setting of on demand function designation and transmission area designation gt M11 X101E H400 HO HOCOO H400 K4 PLS SET lt Setting of receive area designation gt M12 X1O1E 1 mov H600 Mov H200 Z RENTO J1 Kl Kl HO
117. result gt M13 X101E i KHz REMFR Ji Kl Kl HO H4 D2 KI M104 M105 SET M105 s RST RST 54 MIO M100 M11 M200 M102 M12 M201 Y1018 M13 M104 M202 M203 Y1018 M12 MELSEC Q J Changes the registration command into pulses Sets the registration instruction Sets the frame No J Sets the number of data bytes registered 1N Lt gt Sets the user frame J Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory registration instruction and frame No Registration instruction 2 nN L Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory number of registered data bytes and later Sets the registration flag a Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Lt Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal Registration result acquisition command Let Reads the registration result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 J Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM write request signal Lot Resets the registration flag App 54 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 10 When reading user frame The following program example reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals
118. result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes fe OUTPUT uo Do 1 Ho The transmission data stored in the designated piv K5 D2 Lo device is sent rl Y FSE W101 After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user A z designated transmission complete signal MO turns MI _ ON for one scan Mov D101 J Storing the transmission data and writing the trans mission data count in the buffer memory and issuing FSE W102 a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all T executed by the programmable controller CPU i FRS M101 J4 The completion flag is reset by an external 7 command RS M102 1 Q series C24 Address 257H Buffer memory Data transmission result For normal completion DO Interface number 00011 Transmission data count designation D1 Transmission result 0000x gt 4001 D2 Transmission data count 0005n __ Wii Wee crs lots een or 1 bese see easte cee eee ee ees DW A4a24AT ne ee ee as ee to 5FFu D15 For abnormal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result other than 00001 From buffer memory address 2571 D2 Transmission data count 00051 1 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10
119. screen End setup Saves writes the system setting data closes the current screen and returns to the previously displayed screen With offline operation only Save file and Load file are enabled When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the programmable controller CPU to resume data transmission If two or more intelligent function module utility packages are running perform each operation after selecting the target utility package from the task bar and making it active When the menu screen for system registration to flash ROM see Section 9 4 is closed all the system setting data will be cleared Before closing the screen write the data to the module enabled only via online operation or save it to a file Data file to be created with utility package The following data or files that are created with the utility package can be also handled in GX Developer Figure 9 1 shows respective data or files are handled in which operation lt Intelligent function module parameter gt a This represents the data created in Auto refresh setting and they are stored in an intelligent function module parameter file in a project created by GX Developer Project Program Parameter PLC Parameter Network Parameter Intelligent Function Module Parameter b Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 9 1 are performed as follows 1 From GX Deve
120. section nit tin min lt 7 a Data transmissionireceiving with userframes O O O O Programmable controller CPU monitoring function O x x x Reading received data using interrupt programs O O O O a Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCII BIN conversion O O o o c Communication using the bidirectional protocol O Available X Not available Function ysiem sopfiguration Reference section Past inet tin min Data Datatransmission receiving o Pee oe Chapter 7 Reading received data using interrupt programs EwzEZEwIEs Aiai ication Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCII BIN conversion EDERSE SES PP 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d Communication using the pre defined protocol O Available X Not available System configuration Function 3 Reference section Chapter 8 Data transmission reception OQ x x 2 f Operating x In general if data communication is performed using a system configuration of other than 1 1 connection mode the following points should be well noted e Avoid simultaneous transmission e Discard data received other than that addressed to the local station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System This section explains the use of the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system 1 When making access from the external device to the non control CPU of the
121. sequence programs and transmission debug is made easy For use of this function the non procedure protocol is used For details on the protocol FB support function see the GX Configurator SC Operating Manual Protocol FB support function 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 3 Pre defined protocol support function The Pre defined protocol support function is offered for the QU71C24N R2 R4 to use the pre defined protocol communication Protocol settings required for data communication can be configured easily by selecting any options on the protocol selection screen and writing the data to the flash ROM Furthermore the debugging for the pre defined protocol communication debug support function is also available The Pre defined protocol support function can reduce the programming man hours and the volume of the program that is to be written to a programmable controller CPU This function is used with the pre defined protocol For details of the Pre defined protocol support function refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 1 Functions Available with Utility Package The following table Be the utility package function indicates that the setting is valid with the applicable protocol Non arene Function MC procedure Bidirectional i Pxplanation Remarks protocol page protocol Auto refresh setting Refresh the Q seri
122. series C24 is set to be subject to the remote password check b Access in which the remote password is checked The remote password is checked when the following access is attempted Access attempts to all programmable controllers of the local station the local station with the Q series C24 and other stations accessed via the local station are subject to the remote password checking The remote password is checked for validity of access to a programmable controller e Data communication using the MC protocol Access to the programmable controller using GX Developer The remote password is not checked in data communication using the non procedure bi directional or pre defined protocol c Remote password to be checked The check is performed against the remote password set to the local station QCPU with the Q series C24 x Access to the specified station is allowed if the remote password specified by the user and the remote password set to the QCPU match when accessing Data communication procedure 1 Initialize the modem 2 Connect the line from the external device 3 Unlock cancel the remote password of the QCPU belonging to the station with the Q series C24 mounted from the external device via the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol 4 Initiate the data communication between the external device and programmable controller using the MC protocol 5 Disconnect the modem line from the external device
123. setting value error e Setting value fixed value of CPU Correct the setting value fixed value of abnormal monitoring is out of range he CPU abnormal monitoring Monitoring device 7E6An read point range error 7E6BH _ CPU ab I g a prne e Setting value fixed value of CPU e Correct the setting value fixed value 7E6CuH monitoring setting abnormal monitoring is out of range the CPU abnormal monitoring 7E6D value error The OS of th ies C24 detected some error E 7E6F Modem connection e Modem is connected to an incorrect e Correct the Cx to which notification is Jerror channel sent O e Read point of monitoring device is out Correct the setting value of the read of range point of the monitoring device 11 24 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code N Hexa Description Corrective action MC Pasar Bidire Pre dura ctional defined decimal NN i e If there is an error in the CPU eliminate The communication with the CPU could CPU error the error on the CPU side and not be performed normally s p communicate again 7E73x The OS of the Q series C24 detected 7ESEW _ Sysien error e of the Q series etecte TECI some error TEC24 A send request was performed while Double send f 7EC3x another send request was being request error processed T ission dat Ta ent are Data larger than the transmit buffer size count error 3 ee was transmitted 7EC4y Transmissi
124. succeeding devices the data received with the non procedure protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices 2 When the number of data actually received exceeds the allowable receive data count specified by S 3 only the receive data within the allowable receive data count is stored and the remaining receive data is discarded The dedicated instructions are completed normally In this case the allowable receive data count is stored in the receive data count S 2 3 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the INPUT instruction or executing the INPUT instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel aae e e Handling of simultaneous execution INPUT x e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of INPUT gt CSET e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the CSET instruction the right column However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of CSET INPUT e Simultaneous execution is available PUTE GETE BUFRCVS INPUT instruction an
125. the Q series C24 on a 1 n multi drop basis Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q a Transmission setting CH1 side switch 1 lower level CH2 side switch 3 lower level OFF 0 ON 1 Remarks bo Operation setting Independent Link Must be set to OFF on CH1 Data bit T Parity bit is not included b1 Parity bit no O Yes Vertical parity Even odd parity Ooo Even ai only when parity bit is set to be WriteduringRUN Prohibited Allowed All items listed in the table should be set to OFF for the interfaces for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting The Q series C24 operates with the values set in GX Developer See below Transmission setting Setting description for GX Developer Operation setting Independent Data bit Parity bit Yes Even odd parity Stop bit Sum check code Yes Write during RUN Allowed Setting modifications Allowed Prohibited 1 Operation setting e This sets whether to use each of the two Q series C24 interfaces for independent data communication or to use the two for linked data communication The setting and data flow for linked operation is explained in 2 2 Data bit setting e This sets the bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device When data communication is pe
126. the buffer memory a lag of 0 to 20 ms occurs until it is reflected in the signal 4 When a functional protocol RS DTR signal status specification protocol No 204 to 207 is executed with the CPRTCL instruction the corresponding bit in the RS DTR signal status specification address 92H 132H turns on or off For functional protocol details refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Be sure to control the RS RTS and ER DTR signals with the Q series C24 Control of the RS RTS and ER DTR signals by the user is a prime factor for data communication errors 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification Use a 15 m 49 21 ft or shorter cable conforming to the RS 232 standard as the RS 232 cable Temperature rating AWG28 to 24 Stranded Recommended cable e Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd 7 0 127 OP HRV SV O Specify the number of pairs For 13 pairs 7 0 127 13P HRV SV 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications The following shows the RS 422 485 interface specification 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specifications The following shows the specifications of the RS 422 connector and RS 422 485 terminal block that connect to an external device SDA LI Ol Direction F Abbreviation Signal name p External SDB SDA device al Oe ere ro L O C ens Transmited sao e E o E co AL EAP Oe Oro reeves M e IL Ol C so smago g
127. the expected packet The Q series C24 has cleared the data received before the protocol execution In Protocol detailed setting of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function Clear OS area receive data area before protocol execution is enabled The Q series C24 data communications monitoring time is set to Infinite wait or the monitoring time is too long Corrective action e Check the protocol No specified in the control data for the CPRTCL instruction for an error e If the CD terminal is OFF with CD terminal check enabled set messages will not be read Change the wiring so that the terminal status is always ON e Check the packet format of the external device and correct the protocol setting 1 Check for an error in the element type or element order in the packet setting 2 Check for an error in each element setting item Code type Data length Data flow Calculating range etc e Using the circuit trace the communication data monitoring function of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function check for the data being transmitted from the external device When proper data are being transmitted from the external device take action according to Section 11 3 12 or 11 3 13 If data could be received before protocol execution disable the Clear OS area receive data area before protocol execution setting in Protocol detailed setting of GX Configurator SC
128. the external device is issued by the following transmission control the RS RTS signal does not turn OFF e When DTR control is set the ER DTR signal turns OFF When DC1 DC3 control is set DC3 is sent When there is no more free space in the OS area to store receive data an SIO error occurs and the SIO information bit in the LED ON status and communication error status address 2011 2024 in the buffer memory turns ON In that case succeeding receive data is discarded until a free space becomes available in the OS area For more details on the transmission control see the User s Manual Application 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL External device 100 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program External device MELSEC Q 1 Data reception when Receive data storage area gt Receive data length The following control is performed Example When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 511 words or less is received by the CH1 side interface L Complete code INPUT Read data count 100 words 2 Data reception when the receive data storage area is smaller than the receive data length Since the following control is performed data link processing is required in the sequence program 1 Reception using the complete code Example When the receive area for the CH1 side in
129. the function used and start data communication e Set the switch settings with GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed x An example of control procedure when the TT command is used in the loopback test mentioned in Procedure 3 Station number 00 sum check code Yes TT ACPU common command Two characters hexadecimal Designate the number of characters 1 to 254 of return data to be sent immediately afterward Designate with a text string consisting of 0 to 9 and A to F capital letter Header data sent by the external device E s S Z amp Loopback data Sum check In case of format 1 Data name a S S data with the code N 2 E length given w 8 y by Character an D g length i External Q 2 Two characters hexadecimal device side Hil HiL HL sori HiL oio FiF TiT o OIS ABICIDE 7 1 8 Example i i i i LJ bot i i i o o Character A part S 2 2 B foopback data E Sum check Data name amp Os 2 Sa ee code _ ___ 2 A a length given T by Character T Programmable v n f length oO controller Becomes the x HHLHLH o X HiL CPU side same data o 4 O O F FIOI5 ABIC IDE A 3 Example ib 024 30430446446 304354 1H42H43HA4HASH 03H 41u 33H Header data to be sent b
130. the local station by sequence program including the data indicating the objective programmable controller CPU in the message must be written Sample message Example T Station Station Se o Space S No0 i Nowe GN Peat Data eR LE 02 20h 32h 32h 0Du OAn 1 See the User s Manual Application 6 32 6 32 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Retry processing for data reception errors The data when reception error occurred is discarded and only the data for the normal reception is taken into the Q series C24 For this reason the reception message may be missing data when an error occurs To assure the correct transmission and reception of data it is recommended that a normal error response message is received and a response message reception timeout check is conducted for data transmitted between the programmable controller CPU and the external equipment and that measures be taken when an error message is received or when an error timeout occurs such as retransmitting the data transmission retry 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Data communication using the bidirectional protocol is a function for sending receiving any data using the message format and transmission control procedure for the Q series C24 bidirectional protocol between external devices and programmable controller CPUs Any ex
131. to be accessed is incorrect 11 38 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 4 Transmission request does not make the SD LED blink Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure Pre defined Due to the OFF status of e While the CS CTS signal is OFF the Q series C24 the CS CTS signal the Q does not transmit data to the external device series C24 cannot transmit It must be ON when the external device is ready to Although a data to the external receive data transmission request device was made SD does Due to transmission e Wait until the external device is ready to receive data not blink control DTR or DC When the waiting time is too long check the external control the external device or cable condition device cannot receive data 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 5 Read request signal does not turn ON even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED was blinking Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area Communication protocol is set incorrect The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at communication protocol status address 250H 260h When Check CD e Since messages are skipped when the CD termina
132. to the following according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFH or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7OOOH or later Section 11 2 Program example For the program example of the CPRTCL instruction refer to Section 8 1 6 10 25 10 25 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Cancellation of protocol execution A protocol can be cancelled during its execution This function is used to end the protocol execution forcibly when a communication error occurs with the other device This function is available for the predefined protocol mode only 1 Execution method for cancellation request Execute a cancellation request from the sequence program The corresponding buffer memory areas are listed in the following table Address Decimal Hex Setting value 0 No cancellation specification 16448 16464 Protocol cancellation 1 Cancellation request Specified by User 4040H 4050H specification 2 Cancel completed set by QJ71C24N R2 R4 2 Operation after execution of cancellation request a Operation of dedicated instruction CPRTCL instruction e The operation fails and the error code is stored in the execution result S 0 e When executing multiple protocols consecutively if the cancellation is requested to the nth protocol the nth protocol is ended forcibly and the protocols after the nth protocol are not executed b
133. wire to the QJ71C24N R4 2 Connect the FG of the Q series C24 side to the FG terminal at the power supply module of the station which has the Q series C24 is installed or to the FG terminal of the control panel on which the Q series C24 programmable controller is installed 3 Connect nnA and nnB of each signal in the connection cable as a pair Q series C24 External device iL Shield Correspondence of the RS 422 485 terminal block and signal location 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q c Terminal resistor must be set or connected for the station of both ends on the circuit Match the Q series C24 to the specifications of the external device and connect a terminal resistor packed with the Q series C24 according to this section Connect or set a terminal resistor at the external device according to the instruction manual of the external device The terminal resistor to connect to the Q series C24 When communications performed using RS 422 330 Q 1 4 W resistor is connected e When communications performed using RS 485 110 Q 1 2 W resistor is connected x How to discriminate between the terminating resistors 330 Q 110 2 Orange Orange Brown Brown Brown Brown T cttt d When connecting the terminal resistor of the QJ71C24N R4 to the RS 422 485 plug in socket block insert the terminal resistor in the orientation shown below Correct inse
134. write during parameters etc was RUN switch to Enable by command transmitted or Disable write during RUN is set 11 3 9 Communication error P S Symptom Corrective action the parity bit setting data format and match the settings not match the external device is correct Recalculate e When CH1 and CH2 e When using CH1 and CH2 independently check are used in the linked that the Q series C24 is not in the linked mode Communication mode the cable is not e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode error signal P S connected to one of the also connect the cable to both of the interfaces turned on interface Ifthe cable is not connected to one of the Bidirectional procedure interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode noise may enter and the data may be destroyed and Data cannot be decoded or Communications error cause Oooo e may occur 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 10 Communication error PRO Symptom e Communications were performed with a control procedure different from the Q series C24 communication protocol setting Some of the data are different from the control procedure e Designated command does not exist The device No designation is not the character count corresponding to the command The characters in the message include a data other than the A to Z O to 9 LU and control data Communication error signa
135. x x Bidirectional protocol Communication via public lines using modem function ee ee eS et ee ee ee Communication using the programmable controller CPU monitoring x S function Auto refresh directed to the programmable controller CPU O e BERERE bose DC code control O Transmission control DTR DSR signal control i eel Half duplex communication control i et O Mode switching Modeswitchng ooo o oo T O S O fk Setting the sameprotool O o x Independent operation of two interfaces Setting different protools O O O Linked operation of two interfaces OoOo o Registering initial setting values of the buffer memory 2 ee O Flash ROM O EEPROM Registering user frame Connection forms with external devices wm amp m n I O signal transmission receive by multi drop link function Connection of GX Developer aS ae E Communication data monitoring es x xf Registering and monitoring of setting values by the utility package oo M QnACPU Programmable controller that can be mounted MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 remote I O station Remote I O station AnACPU AnACPU AnUCPU AnUCPU QnACPU QnACPU Dats transmission tate bps 230400 maximum 115200 19200 19200 19200 issi P 6 maximum maximum maximum maximum O Function exists possible A Function exists possible specification is different depends on the function version see Appendix 1 X No function impossible x1 Access is possible only w
136. 0 2 a None 0 3 None iaa 0 4 gt None e 1 Production number display Since the Q series C24 does not support the production number display is displayed The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate or on the front of the module The serial number on the rating plate or on the front of the module indicates the management information of the product e The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product will be updated when a function is added 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Checking the software version of GX Configurator SC To check the software version of GX Configurator SC select Help and then Product information from GX Developer Product information amp PLC programming software p GX Developer Version 7 018 SW7D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2001 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION List of version information on Add in software GX Configurator SC Version1 10L SWOD5C QSCU E COPYRIGHT C 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL Software version RIGHTS RESERVED Waming This product is protected by copyright law and intemational treatie
137. 01 m be lt Abnormal completion Read of data transmission result gt M11 X101E H Z REMFR J1 K1 K1 HO H257 D20 K M102 M103 H M103 p f SET RST App 45 Y1000 M200 M300 Y1000 M301 M11 M102 M201 M202 Y1000 MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Sets the transmission data count Transfers the setting value to the communication area of the buffer memory Turns ON the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Normal completion of transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of transmission Transmission result acquisition instruction Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 45 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data The following program example uses the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory Refer to Section 6 1 4 for received data clear 1 Program conditions The following program clears the received data in the OS area of the QJ71C24N when the receive clear command X1025 turns ON a Devices used e Receive clear command ccecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees X1025 e Receive clear processing execution c
138. 08 CH2 Transmission abnormal Se a X02 CH1 Transmission processing in Se Se CH2 Transmission processing in progress Chapter 7 X03 CH1 ee data read request XOA CH2 ee data read request Y00 CH1 Transmission Ea ebe Y07 CH2 Transmission Ea ebe Y01 CH1 a E e data read completion Y08 CH2 a E e data read completion Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Ba 13Ba Section 7 3 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 7 Pre defined protocol monitor test Purpose Monitor the data communication status and test the values set for the pre defined protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO Pre defined protocol monitor test Monitor Test screen CH1 Pre defined protocol monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value 1D Pre defined protocol ready Off Not cancelled Unexecuted Pre defined protocol function error code 0000 Nome oiia than 0000 Error Number of protocol executions Flash ROM setting Details Write to Current value Monitoring module Save file display Cannot execute test Read from module Load file Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test items it Buffer memory address Ref fi em eference section X1D Pre defined protocol ready a aaa Section 8 1 5 Operating Manual P
139. 0H to 3FFFH of transmission A3H 1431 0001 H to 1A00H A4H 1441 00014 to 33FEH Received data count For data Receive complete code designation Chapter 6 165 325 reception 3 Chapter 7 A51 1451 FFFF H No designation for receive complete code Section 9 4 5 OH to FFH Receive complete code Section 9 4 7 Section 9 7 166 326 Receive buffer memory head address designation A6x 146 For designation 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH of reception area A7H 147 0001H to 1A00H Receive data clear request A8H 1481 reception 0 No request 1 Requested First frame No designation 1st A9H 149H 0 No designation Other than 0 Designated 170 330 i First frame No designation 2nd Section 9 4 6 Not allowed 171 331 iol Last frame No designation 1st User s Manual ABH 14BH 0 No designation Other than 0 Designated Application 172 332 Last frame No designation 2nd ACH 14CH 0 No designation Other than 0 Designated User frame use enable disable designation 0 Do not use 1 Use 2 Data communication possible Q series C24 set First frame No designation 1st 1st to 4th Allowed 173 ADH Gaps For designation g o Of receive user Section 9 4 7 User s Manual OH No designation 1H or more Head frame No Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Protocol Ref nitia eference Decimal Hex Application Name valie Registration section MC Non Bi
140. 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the on demand function of the MC protocol of the module designated in Un QCPU Q series C24 _7 Channel to be _7 used is set by b15 to bO J the control data S2 0 1 gt Channel 1 sl j 2 mo Channel 2 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the ONDEMAND instruction or executing the ONDEMAND instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available x1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the ONDEMAND instructio
141. 11 9 4 10 to 9 4 12 Section 11 3 4 11 3 5 Sections 11 3 5 to 11 3 20 11 3 7 to 11 3 22 Apr 2011 SH NA 080006 P SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Sections 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 8 4 4 5 2 6 1 1 6 1 3 9 2 1 9 2 2 10 1 10 4 11 2 1 11 3 3 11 3 8 11 3 21 Appendices 1 1 3 6 7 1 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Sections 8 1 5 8 1 6 10 7 Section number change Section 10 8 10 9 Correction COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Sections 1 3 3 2 1 8 1 5 8 1 6 9 2 2 11 2 1 11 3 1 Appendix 3 Partial addition Appendix 6 Nov 2012 SH NA 080006 Q The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date _ Manual Number __Revision Mar 2015 SH NA 080006 R ABOUT MANUALS ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMINOLOGY Sections 1 2 2 1 2 8 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 8 3 9 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 5 2 4 7 4 7 1 6 1 4 Chapters 8 Sections 8 1 6 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 3 10 7 11 2 1 11 3 14 Appendices 1 1 2 3 1 5 6 1 6 2 9 1 9 8 Deletion Section 2 7 Section number change Section 2 8 2 7 Japanese Manual Version SH 080001 AB This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible
142. 24 es speed registered data count ETE EE 19200 bps outeur 234 267 __ Datasize 8 40 bytes o i Stop bit 1 40 bytes ial re a Execute instruction INPUT 40 bytes after 40 bytes have been received ioout__ 26 azro 35 ara 326e 496 fobyes Bon 2 4 21 26 29 28s sz fois pure so s19 essa ssaa eria so95 fobs eee 1 1 f as 1s s 32 ayes sesusy_ o1 o1 o2 o2 o3 oos _ Transmission receipt PoI eee e fe buffer pe Burrevs os o3 os 19200 bps 40 bytes eee See ee 7 CPRTCL Instruction processing time varies by external device and or protocol b For Universal model QCPU Processing time unit ms Instruction execution condition Instruction T er T ission 3 name Other than QO2UCPU Q02UCPU E nmueerunetiae Others speed registered data count ONDEMAND 19200 bps nooo S al Data size 8 Stop bit 1 b Parity none A x 5 frames Execute instruction INPUT 40 bytes after 40 bytes have been received pour a J s homs Bon er bytes E pue tg o o ayes d E ae eH o o au o e a Ss CSET buffer BUFRCVS 04 19200bps 40bytes UINI 415 2 416 8 e CPRTCL Instruction processing time varies by external device and or protocol App 18 App 18 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 4 ASCll Code Table The ASCll codes are listed in the table below
143. 2531 263H 11 14 b15 memory areas 1 Station No instruction setting address 24Fn to bO Buffer memory address 24Fu 0 to 31 Station No b15 2 Communication protocol status address 252H 262n to 0to9 bO Information on the CH1 side 0 to 7 9 Information on the CH2 side b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 _b1 0 Mode number currently operating 3 Transmission status address 253H 263H O 0 O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 bO 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 0 O 0 O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Communication rate setting Operation setting Data bit setting Parity bit setting Even odd parity setting Stop bit setting Sum check code setting Write during RUN setting Setting modification allow prohibit 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the current setting status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads from the switch setting status for current operation of the Q series C24 For details regarding ERR occurrence XE XF used in the program see Section 11 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction 11 15 After checking
144. 3 3 2 3 4 Table 3 9 Section 4 3 4 5 2 Section 5 1 5 3 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 8 2 8 3 2 POINT 8 4 2 8 4 9 Table 8 6 3 Table 8 6 7 Table Section 10 1 2 b 10 3 Table Appendix 1 1 2 1 6 7 9 Addition Section 2 6 Section 8 4 4 8 6 2 Table Section 10 2 1 716FH 7FEFx 10 2 3 7FE9u 10 3 14 Appendix 3 Feb 2002 SH NA 080006 D Addition About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 7 Section 4 5 2 Section 8 2 1 8 2 2 Section 10 2 1 Appendix 1 1 6 Oct 2002 SH NA 080006 E Addition The Manual s Use and Structure About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 4 Section 2 1 2 4 Section 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 9 8 Appendix 7 Jan 2003 SH NA 080006 F Addition model QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ gt Manual Number J J an 2003 SH NA 080006 F SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 3 Section 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 7 Section 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 6 3 8 3 9 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 1 Section 6 1 1 6 1 2 Section 7 1 7 2 2 Chapter 8 all Section 9 1 9 6 Section 10 1 2 b 10 1 3 1 10 2 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 5 Appendix 9 un 2004 SH NA 080006 G Correction About The Generic Terms and Abbrevi
145. 3FFFH Version 1 40S or later App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 1 2 Precautions when updating the module from function version A to B This section explains how to utilize programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A for the Q series C24 of function version B and how to incorporate function version B into the existing system 1 Program utilization Programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A can be used as they are for the Q series C24 of function version B 2 Incorporation into the existing system The wiring used for function version A can be used as is for the Q series C24 of function version B Appendix 1 3 Precautions when replacing the QJ71C24 R2 with the QJ71C24N R2 R4 Although the QJ71C24N R2 R4 can use existing programs created for the QJ71024 R2 without any changes take into account the following Wiring for the QJ71C24 R2 can be also used as it is 1 Increased internal processing speed Since the internal processing speed has been increased the time taken for the QJ71C24N R2 R4 to access a programmable controller CPU and to process message transmission to another device is shorter than that of the QU71C24 R2 The usage of functions has not been changed however the performance and response time is different When utilizing any existing program be sure to check the operation in advance and if necessary adjust the communication timing The following are examples o
146. 4 86 x1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Output Start of the End processing of instruction execution y Tp the scan at the completion of 4 gt the Output instruction execution Step 0 END i Sequence program Transmission command Output instruction One scan i l Output instruction complete device Q series C24 side Transmission data External device side Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Output instruction when transmitting 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N Unit ms e Scan time 10 ms e Data length 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bit Communication rate 19200 bps 10 10 19200 X 1000 0 07 X 100 3 0 72 08 ms App 16 App 16 APPENDICES Sequence program Reception data read request X3 Input instruction Input instruction complete device Q series C24 side Step 0 END MELSEC Q Input instruction Tp Sr 0 09 Xx Dr T2 Tp 1 Time from the start of execution of the Input instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution ms Sr Scan time Dr Number of bytes of reception data T2 QJ71C24N R2 R4 T2 7 0 QJ71C24 R2 T2 14 91 x1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Input Start of the End processing of
147. 400 bps Supported module Supported protocol QU71024N QU71024 R2 R4 R2 Non procedure Bi directional Reference Pre defined section Section 1 2 Section 3 2 1 REMARKS Data transmission reception at low speed This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 50 bps Chapter 4 Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction This function allows clearing reception data using the CSET instruction during data communication using the non procedure protocol It is possible to clear the data even when data is being transmitted Chapter 6 Section 10 9 Programmable controller CPU information clear This function clears the programmable controller CPU information of the Q series C24 The programmable controller CPU information is information about the access target CPU type used in MC protocol communications Section 11 1 7 Transmission of the programmable controller CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function When the programmable controller CPU monitoring function is active this function sends the monitoring information of the programmable controller CPU to the external device through the modem User s Manual Application Automatic initialization for modem Callback Initializes the modem automatically when Q series C24 starts up After line connection from the GX Develop
148. 4N serial communication module or QJ71C24 serial communication module QJ71C24N or QJ71C24 ar Terminal resistor 3300 W for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 1100 W _ for RS 485 communication QJ71C24N R2 serial communication module or QJ71C24 R2 serial communication module QJ71C24N R4 serial communication module RS 422 485 plug in connector socket block Terminal resistor 3300 W for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 11002 W_ for RS 485 communication Plate terminal for connecting a braided shield cable GX Configurator SC Version 2 1 license product CD ROM SW2D5C QSCU EA GX Configurator SC Version 2 Multiple license product CD ROM MEMO 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the specifications for the QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QU71024 QU71C24 R2 serial communication module hereinafter referred to as Q series C24 as well as the procedures prior to starting the operation maintenance inspection data communication methods for use with external devices and troubleshooting When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module The Q series C24 is a module that connects the Q series programmable controller CPU and an external device using an RS 232 or RS 422 485 line f
149. 5 amp s a Message wait N I sum check sum check o rT i it 1 1 0 0 0 CID i N e 1 H 30H 58H 30H 30H3OH3OHI34H3OH 30H 32H Command message for A compatible 1C frame Response for A compatible 1C frame 8 2 g 1 H 30H 30H 30H 3181H 32H 33H 34H 41H 42H43H 44H 03H g 8 The following manual is available for performing data communication using the MC protocol MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual sold separately 5 1 3 Programmable controller CPU setting for performing data communication Data communication using the MC protocol is achieved by performing the GX Developer settings indicated below on a personal computer performing the system settings by GX Configurator SC and registering the settings to the programmable controller 1 Settings using GX Developer required Perform the I O assignments and switch settings indicated in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU where the Q series C24 is installed 5 2 5 2 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 System settings using GX Configurator SC When it is necessary to change the default values registered in the Q series C24 perform the settings as indicated in Chapter 9 and register these to the flash ROM in the Q series C24 e MC protocol system setting e Transmission control and others system setting To write from the external devic
150. 51 D100 L registered data bytes is odd PLS M14 User frame acquisition command M105 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Ks E M202 Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal u RST Y1017 rst M11 Sets the read flag lt Read of user frame gt N14 X101E Reads the user frame from the t k H REWFR Jl K1 K1 Ho H D4 D100 M106 flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D4 and higher M106 M107 m E a ar A tt M203 Normal completion of REMFR instruction M107 H SET M204 Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction RST M11 Sets the read flag App 56 App 56 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 11 When deleting user frame The following program example deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when deleting a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the delete command X1030 turns ON a Devices used e Delete command ceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeteaeeetineeteneensaees X1030 e Delete command pulse Signal cceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeneeenteees M10 e B 8 0 Sere M11 e Delete result acquisition ComMaANG 1 c ccceeeeeeet
151. 6 AGA sROMIRAMISwitehitests 8 c4 Gitte i ea Get tea ee ta dd 4 26 4 7 2 Individual station loopback test ecccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseneeseaeeccaeeeeaeeecaeeeeaaeeseaeeeseesenetsieeeetaas 4 29 4 8 Loopback TeSti i1 0 c ack naive ite ede dal iin de ee ead a in eld ein eed lees 4 31 4 9 Maintenance and INSPECTION ccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeceneeeaeeeeaeescaceeseaesseaeescaeeeceeeseaeesseeeaeeeeenseetaes 4 33 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection cccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeecaeeeeaceeseaeeseaeeseaeeesaeessaaeeseaeeseeesenaeeess 4 33 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the module 0 0 ec eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeseeeseneseeeseeeseneseneeeneeeneeeas 4 34 5 1 Data Communication FUNCTIONS cccccceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeceaeeecaeeecaeeeseaeesaesecaeeecaeeesneeeeaeetseeteieeees 5 1 5 1 1 Accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol cceeeeeeeeeeeeeenrens 5 1 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data COMMUNICATION ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeees 5 2 5 1 3 Programmable controller CPU setting for performing data communication ceeeee eee 5 2 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeteaees 5 3 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password function ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeeteaees 5 4 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component 0 00
152. 6 Remote password check 0008 1 11 5 4 Index 2 S T U 1 Serial communication module 005 1 1 Setting for GX Developer eeeeeees 4 13 Settings and procedures prior to operation tuliingad E E E 4 2 Simultaneous transmissions 0c 7 24 SIO weet denennchiadadtetaetiana oaadaehiinaees 11 45 SPBUS To e a ae 10 29 Starting the utility ee eeeeeeeereeeeees 9 13 Station number setting eects 4 18 Sum check code 4 16 Switch Setting saimes 4 14 System configuration ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 4 System registration to flash ROM 9 19 Transmission area bidirectional 7 16 Transmission area non procedure 6 25 Transmission data bidirectional 7 18 Transmission data non procedure 6 27 Transmission methods bidirectional 7 15 Transmission methods non procedure 6 24 Transmission Setting cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 Transmission specification 000 3 1 Troubleshooting 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeee 11 1 Uninstalling utility package eee 9 4 Utility package ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeeaeeees 9 1 Utility package operation 0 0 eee 9 9 1 1 system configuration eeeeeeeees 2 4 Ve E EE EEE E E E EREE E E 2 5 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Grati
153. 8337 8346 8355 2051Hto 205Anto 2063Hto 206CHto 2075Hto 207EHto 2087Hto 2090Hto 2099Hto 20A2H to 20521 205Bx 2064n 206Dx 20761 207Fn 2088H 20914 209Ax 20A3H Head device No designation 8275 8284 8293 8302 8311 8320 8329 8338 8347 8356 Designation of number of points read 2053H 205Cx 20651 206EH 2077H 20801 2089H 2092H 209BH 20A4H 9S 90anOn OF number OF poinls rea 8376 8385 8294 8303 8312 8321 8330 8339 8348 8357 Monitoring condition designation Judgment 2054H 205DH 2066H 206FH 2078H 2081H 208AH 2093H 209CH 20A5H condition designation 8277 8286 8304 8313 8322 8331 8349 8358 20551 205Ex 20704 20794 2082H 208Bx 209D1 Boseay MOnitoring condition value designation 8278 8287 8305 8314 8323 8332 8350 8359 Transmission pointer designation for 2056H 205FH 2071H 207AH 2083H 208CH 209E 20A7H conditional transmission data transmission 8279 8288 8306 8315 8324 8333 8351 8360 Designation of number of outputs for 2057H 20601 2072H 207BH 2084H 208DH 209FH 20A8H conditional transmission data transmission 8280 8289 8307 8316 8325 8334 8352 8361 Designation of data No for connection 2058H 2061H 2073H 207CH 2085H 208EH 20A0H 20A9H for conditional transmission and notification
154. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Led cries Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C024 QJ71C24 R2 GX Configurator SC SW2D5C QSCU E e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels WARNING and N CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l resulting in death or severe injury l l l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l J N CAUTION e e e e l l l o e e o e e o o u o u U u u u u u u u u u u u o a u resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the m
155. ATION MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Individual station loopback test The individual station loopback test checks the operation of the communication function of the Q series C24 Follow the procedure below to perform an individual station loopback test Procedure 1 Connecting cable 1 Connect cables to two interfaces as follows e Connect cables to the RS 232 interface within the connector and install it to the interface e Connect cables to the RS 422 485 interface on a terminal block RS 232 interface D Sub 9P RS 422 485 interface Pe Cable connection eer Cable connection Signal name Pin No Signal name CD DCD 1 RD RXD 2 k SDA SD TXD 3 SDB ER DTR 4 RDA lt lt SG 5 RDB DR DSR 6 Wk RS RTS 7 CS CTS 8 he FG CI RI 9 FG Procedure 2 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting see Section 4 5 2 1 Set the communication protocol setting to FH individual station loopback test for both interfaces 2 Set transmission setting of the two interfaces according to the transmission specification for data communication with an external device Procedure 3 Performing the individual station loopback test 1 Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status 2 Restart the programmable controller CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 perform the fo
156. ATIONS MELSEC Q 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists dedicated instructions that can be used in the Q series C24 Available X Not available Classification Instruction Description nSSIeNGe Iti uct l mc Non Bi Pa section ONDEMAND Sends data with the on demand function rotx x x O x x OUTPUT Sends designated number of data x INPUT Receives data reads received data xX O xX X BIDOUT Sends data Lx x ol x BIDIN Receives data reads received data Ix x fol x Chapter 10 Reads the status of data sent received with each SPBUSY i dedicated instruction For data Allows clearing data received up to the present err without interrupting the data transmission x x Xx communication processing Receives data with an interrupt program reads BUFRCVS x x User s received data Sends data with fi ing t issi poled ends data with user frames using transmission g x O X X Application schedule table Executes the protocol setting data written to the CPRTCL flash ROM by Pre defined protocol support x X xX Chapter 10 function Stores user frames in flash ROM of the Q series Setting value PUTE i C24 writing registration Reads user frames stored in flash ROM of the Q reading GETE series C24 Performs programmable controller For Programmable ee CPU monitoring registration programmable User s controller CPU Soe controller CPU x Manual monitoring Canc
157. C frame only This function allows access to extended data register D65536 or higher and extended link register W10000 or higher Reference Manual Support for multiple CPU system Data communication using the pre defined protocol function This function allows access to the control non control CPUs specified by the user when performing the following forms of data communication with a multiple CPU system Communication using the MC protocol QCPU access from GX Developer Data can be transferred with the protocol appropriate to the communication target device Reference Manual Chapter 8 Operating Manual Predefined protocol support function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS This Chapter explains the system configuration and available functions 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules a When mounted with a CPU module For the CPU modules the number of modules and base units applicable to the C24 refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used Note the following when the C24 is used with a CPU module e Use the QU71C24N R2 R4 with a serial number first five digits of 10042 and the function version B or later when the QJ71C24N R2 R4 is used with the Universal model QCPU e Depending on the combina
158. C protocol format 3 4 MC protocol format 4 592 608 250H 2601 3 609 2511 2614 Operation setting Data bit Parity bit Odd even parity Stop bit Sum check code Write during RUN Setting modification b7 For confirmation of transmission control status For system b12 to b15 0 GX Developer connection 1 MC protocol format 1 2 MC protocol format 2 3 MC protocol format 3 4 MC protocol format 4 Transmission status current Operation setting b0 Data bit b1 Parity bit b2 Odd even parity b3 Stop bit b4 Sum check code b5 Write during RUN b6 Setting modification b7 Communication rate b8 to For system b12 to b15 RS 232 control signal status 0 OFF status RS RTS b0 DR DSR b1 Not used b6 to b15 All 0 59 594 610 2521 262H 595 611 2531 2631 59 ER 6 612 Control signal 254H 264n status Communication rate b8 to b11 CD DCD b3 5 MC protocol format 5 6 Non procedure protocol 7 Bidirectional protocol 8 For linked operation 9 Pre defined protocol Transmission setting status switch setting Link 8 bit Yes Even 2 bit Yes Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed 50 bps to 230400 bps All O 0 Independent 0 7 bit 0 No 0 Odd 0 1 bit 0 No 0 0 Communication protocol status current 5 MC protocol format 5 6 Non procedure protocol 7 Bidirectional protocol 8
159. C24 and the switch settings set with GX Developer Perform a ROM RAM switch test with the procedure described below Procedure 1 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting see Section 4 5 2 1 Set the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side to EH ROM RAM switch test Set the communication protocol setting on the CH1 side to the number 1 to 9 used for data communication with an external device following the test 2 Set the transmission settings for the two interfaces to match the specifications used when communicating data with an external device Procedure 2 Performing ROM RAM switch tests 1 Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Restart the programmable controller CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 the following tests should be performed once 1 ROM check Read the ROM data and verify the sum check 2 RAM check Write data to RAM and read and check it 3 Switch check Check whether or not each switch is set within the tolerance range and the operation setting in the transmission settings is set to off 4 Linked operation setting check perform this test with the operation setting in the transmission settings of CH2 set to on Check to see that the communication protocol setting on CH1 is set to 8H and whether the communication rate setting of each chan
160. C24N R2 R4 can be monitored 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Monitoring the programmable controller CPU Details are explained in the User s Manual Application a The self station s programmable controller CPU can be monitored at time intervals set by the user without using a sequence program 1 The following monitoring information can be sent notified as the result of monitoring the programmable controller CPU e Transmission of information on devices and the programmable controller CPU status to be monitored It is also possible to send the monitoring information through combined use of the modem function e Notification of a notification message string data registered as the connection data of the modem function through combined use of the modem function 2 The user can select either one of the following timing choices at which to send the programmable controller CPU monitoring result to the external device e Send notify every time the programmable controller CPU is monitored periodic transmission Send notify when the information read from the programmable controller CPU matches the conditions set by the user conditional transmission b The programmable controller CPU monitoring function can be used in communication using the MC or non procedure protocol m l l Data Modem oa _ Notification Pa
161. Channel 2 CH2 side BIN16 bit Number of consecutive protocol executions 1 to 8 User Device name Start number of the device in which control data are stored ee Bit device number to be turned ON at completion of execution EPR The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the setting data 10 21 10 21 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control data x1 e The execution result of the G P CPRTCL instruction is stored When executing multiple protocols the execution result of the S 0 Execution result protocol executed at last is stored oe System 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code i je e The number of executions is stored jm i Protocols with errors are included in the count S 1 Number of executions x System When settings of the setting data and control data contain an error 0 is stored Set the first orotocol number or functional protocol number to be executed ai Execution protocol number 1 to 128 ieee designation 201 to 207 Set the 8th protocol number or functional protocol number to be executed 3 stored When the functional protocol is executed 0 is stored ae e When the communication type of the first protocol executed is Receive only or Send amp receive the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send only 0 is stored If the error occurs to the first protocol executed 0 is stored When the f
162. D SET X21 a TO RST M50 MO M101 D101 M102 M101 M102 Lo Lo Transmission command is converted to pulse Transmission data is stored Designate the number of the interface CHO that will send the data Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent After the BIDOUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to Q series C24 are all executed by the programmable controller CPU The completion flag is reset by the external command 10 17 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 6 G P BIDIN Data can be received using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device Set Internal device ees Intelligent function Index register data EARS user File register A module device Constant Others Bt woa uoco wora Instruction Executing code condition Gomman G BIDIN G BIDIN Command GP BIDIN ate H GP BIDIN Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module F o ta User BIN16 bit ee to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digi
163. DCD 1 RD RXD 2 SD TXD 3 ER DTR 4 SG 5 h se DR DSR 6 DR DSR RS RTS 7 CS CTS 8 eee CI RI 9 x When wiring shown above DC code control may be performed If the programmable controller CPU and an external device cannot be communicated try to perform data communication as a connection test using the wiring connection as shown in Connection example 2 If data can be communicated using the wiring connection shown in Connection example 2 rewire after checking the interface specifications on the external device side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface 1 Connection precautions a When connecting the Q series C24 SG and FG signals to the external device connect them according to the specifications of the external device b Connect the shield of the connection cable to the FG terminal on either of the connected devices If normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise even if wiring is made as shown above perform wiring as follows 1 Connect between the FG of both stations with the shield of the connection cable On the external device side however follow the instruction manual of the external device Be sure to use the plate terminals included with the product when connecting the braided shield
164. DIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 7 1 5 Receive data clear 1 2 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 6 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code e GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 6 GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268n Handling of receive data when a reception error occurs 1 All of the receive data for which an error was detected is ignored and a response message indicating an abnormal completion NAK message is sent to the external device x When an error is detected during message reception the Q series C24 does not issue a reception data read request to the programmable controller CPU The receive area in the buffer memory will contain the data received normally just prior to the error occurrence Data will not be rewritten Data communications using the bidirectional protocol must be performed after a response message is received in reply to the preceding data transmission If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it sends an
165. Data 4 Digits Data N Receive packet Read Data D201 Inverter Station Number D202 ERR NAK Response ooo Receive packet Error Code D203 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 3 Communication settings a Settings on GX Developer This section explains the settings required for executing the predefined protocol communication on GX Developer For details refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual e I O assignment For the I O assignment setting the types and the I O signal range of each module mounted on a base unit are set 1 On the project window on GX Developer double click PLC Parameter 2 Click the I O assignment tab 3 Set the following items on the slot where the QJ71C24N has been mounted PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS 1 PLC RAS 2 Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment Buit in Ethemet port 1 0 Assignment PLC Intelli Switch setting Detailed setting LECECECKECEKEEEE didiaialaialaia Assigning the 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base settingl Base mode Base model name Power model name Extension cable ite C Detail 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default t Peoro A as sananen Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY
166. E 1 Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction OUTPUT OUTPUT instruction complete device r 1 ON when transmission OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 abnormal completion normal completion abnormal completion T scan Transmission data count 0 n designation address 4004 Transmission data Transmission data designation address 4014 to 7 Transmitting data 1 Starts the local station programmable controller CPU The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 Inputs the user data transmission command signal 3 Executes the OUTPUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the OUTPUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the OUTPUT instruction is executed 4 When the Q series C24 transmission processing completes the completion device for the OUTPUT instruction turns ON When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F X20 PLS M50 The transmission command is converted into pulse m0v ABCDEFG D11 Transmission data is stored piv HOAOD D15 Designate the number of the interface CH that k L i a will send the data HOV KO 01 Clear the transmission
167. E Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Number of the channel that demands to clear receiving data User BIN16 bit S1 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Head number of the device that stores the control data User System a ama eT Device name Head number of the bit device at the self station that turns on for one scan D2 at the completion of the instruction System Bit D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal completion Each of file registers for local device and program cannot be used as the setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by S2 0 Execution type Select 0 1 o u User The execution result at the completion of the instruction is stored Complete status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code Specify the request S2 2 R tt U 4 Receive data clear request ga S2 3 to For system Use prohibited including for other purposes such as programming System S2 111 1 See the Error explanation on the following page for details on errors caused by wrong data specifications by the user 2 The setting sides are partitioned as follows e User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the dedicated instruction 10 31 10 31 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 32 MELSEC Q 1 This function clears reception data in the OS area It d
168. E n Initial setting Explanation of items 1 Activation of other screens MELSEC Q The following screens can be displayed from the intelligent function module utility screen a Flash ROM setting screen Tools Flash ROM setting Module type Module model Name gt Select b Auto refresh setting screen Start O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh c Select monitor test module screen Online Monitor Test x1 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 2 Intelligent function module utility C MEL Intelligent Function module parameter Online To Ctrl O Open parameters Close parameters Save parameters Delete parameters Ctri 5 Open FB support parameters lity C MELSEC GPPW Online Tools Help Monitor Test Read from PLC 1 Write to PLC lied a jae _ t function Module utility C Tools Help Flash ROM setting attir pesi a a S ion Module utility C MELS Help Code table Product information Command buttons nitial setting Cannot be selected Auto refresh 7 Menu bar a File menu MELSEC Q Starts the auto refresh setting screen Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting of the selected module Close this screen Intelligent function module parameters of the project opene
169. EC Q b Setting on GX Configurator SC pre defined protocol support function Set the protocol explained in Section 13 5 2 1 From the menu bar select File gt New Ctrl P 2 The Add protocol screen is displayed Select the following protocol and click the button Add protocol Select from pre defined protocol library Add editable protocol Protocol No Manufacturer Model Protocol name MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREQROL Series te AD Operation 3 The Protocol setting screen is displayed Click the cell under Packet setting displayed in red of Packet Name H7B RD Operation Mode MELSOFT series GX Configurator SC lt Pre defined protocol support function gt Protocol setting DER File Edit Module read write Tool Debugging support function Window Help AEE Protocol name Communication gt Sil Packet name Packet setting o type lt Receive t f T MITSUBISHI I FREGROL Series H7B RD Operation Mode Sendireceive gt H7B RD Operation Mode Variable unset lt 1 _ NOR RD Data 4 Digits Data Variable unset lt 2 ERR NAK Response poe 4 The Packet setting screen is displayed Click the cell under Element setting displayed in red on the Element No 2 Packet setting Protocol No 1 Protocol name H7B RD Operation Mode Packet type Send packet Packet name H7B RD Operation Mode Element list Element gy El El i No lement type
170. ET M301 Abnormal completion of transmission PLS M12 Transmission result acquisition instruction lt Abnormal completion Read of data transmission result gt M12 X101E ee H Z RENFR JI Ki Ki HO H257 D20 Kt M104 Y Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 M104 M105 4 SET M202 Normal completion of REMFR instruction M105 HK SET M203 Le Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal RST Y1000 be App 50 App 50 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 8 When performing initial setting The following program example performs initial setting using the REMTO instruction Execute this program when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory Refer to Chapter 8 when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory using GX Configurator SC 1 Program conditions The following program performs initial setting on the CH1 side when the initial setting command X1027 turns ON Devices used a 160 AOH 161 Initial Setting command ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateeteeateeaeeas X1027 Initial setting command pulse signal M10 Initial setting command 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeas M11 Initial setting command 3 eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeaeeeas M12 Completion device for REMTO instruction ccccceeee M100 to 105 Normal abnormal completion fla
171. Error code list while modem function is used 0 0 0 eeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas 11 32 11 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom ceceeceeececeeeseeeeneeeeeeseesaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeeseesaeeneeeaeeeas 11 34 11 3 1 The RUN LED is turned OFF eio a a R E E 11 36 11 3 2 The RD LED does not blink even after message transmission from the external device 11 37 11 3 3 No response message is returned even though the external device transmitted a message andthe RD LED blinked careieni a ies di eaesae E A Guang eeetgiiees 11 38 11 3 4 Transmission request does not make the SD LED DIINK ceecceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeteneees 11 39 A 13 A 13 11 3 5 Read request signal does not turn ON even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED was blinking c eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeeteesieesanetieetaeess 11 40 11 3 6 The CPRTCL instruction execution is not completed although the RD LED blinked 11 41 11 3 7 Communication error NAK c cccceecceeeceeeeceeeceeeeaeeecaeeeeaeeeceaeeseaeeseaeeecaeeesceeseaeesseetsaeeseneees 11 42 11 3 8 Communication error C N ccccccceescceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeseneecaeescaeeecaceesaeeseaeeseaeeesesesseaeeneessaees 11 42 11 3 9 Communication error P S ccccecceeecceeeceeeeeeeeceeeececeeseaeeceaeescaeeccanesseaeeseaeeeeaeeesaeeessaeeeaeessaees 11 43 11 3 10 Communicat
172. FFH Additional code a Ce 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex Application CH1 CH2 8256 8512 2040n 21401 8257 8513 20411 21414 8258 8514 2042n 21421 8259 8515 20434 21431 For designation of programmable controller CPU 8260 8516 monitoring 20444 21444 function 8261 8517 20454 21451 8518 2146n 8263 to 8519 to 8268 8524 204714 21471 Use prohibited to to 204CH 2149H 8269 8225 204Dx 214Dx 8270 8226 204E 214Ex 8271 8527 204F 214FH 8272 8528 2050 2150 8273 to 8529 to 8274 8530 20511 21511 to to 20521 8275 20531 8276 8532 For designation 2054n 2154 of programmable controller CPU ae monitoring 8277 8533 function 20554 21554 8278 8534 20564 21561 8279 8535 20574 21571 8280 8536 20584 2158 value Cycle time units designation 0 100 ms ts Cycle time designation OH No designation 1H to FFFFH Programmable controller CPU monitoring cycle time Programmable controller CPU monitoring function designation 0 Do not use the function 1 Fixed cycle transmission 2 Condition agreement transmission Programmable controller CPU monitoring transmission measure designation 0 Data transmission device data and CPU status data 1 Notification Transmission pointer designation For fixed cycle transmission and non procedure data tr
173. For linked operation 9 Pre defined protocol link 8 bit Yes Even 2 bit Yes Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed 50 bps to 230400 bps All O Independent 7 bit No Odd 1 bit No b11 1 ON status DTR b2 CS CTS b4 CI RI b5 Depends on Depends on parameter setting Depends on module status signal status Section 4 5 2 Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 5 Section 4 5 2 Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 6 Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 3 Not allowed 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex Application 2 2551 2561 599 615 2571 2671 ki 601 2591 602 618 25An 26AH 603 619 25BH 26BH 1536 600H COOH to 1AFFH 6912 1004 6953 1B29H io 6911 2651 2661 616 2681 617 2691 2560 A001 o 6952 o 1281 o 6993 o 1B51H o 7034 o 1B7Ax o 7075 1B7Bu to 1BA3H 7076 o 7116 1BA4H to 1BCCx 7117 1BCDu 7158 1BF6H o 7157 io 1BF5H io 7198 o 1C1Ex o 7239 o 1C47H o 7280 o 1C70x o 7321 o 1C99x o 7362 o 7403 1CC3H to 1CEBu 7404 1CECu 7445 o 7444 io 1D14H o 7485 1D15x to 1D3Dx o 1CC2H For confirmation of communication result Use prohibited Transmission receive area For user For user registration Initial Name value Transmission sequence status For confirmation of MC protocol communication statu
174. HOAG D5 K2 M104 M105 f WF SET M105 I SET REMARKS above 2 Program example to perform programming e DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation e DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation e DC2 DC4 code designation e CD terminal check designation for RS 232 Communication system designation for RS 232 Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation e Retransmission time transmission method designation Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation e No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation App 52 App 52 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame The following program example registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to the User s Manual Application for the registration of the user frame It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when registering a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the registration command X1028 turns ON a Devices used Registration COMMAMNG cceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeteeas X1028 e Registration command pulse Signal cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee M10 e Registration command 2 sssesssssessssrseresnssnesnarnasnaennenannannaen M11 e Registration flag eececsecseeeeneeneeeneseneeeeeeeneeeeeeteenreeteas M12
175. IN instruction and then the BIDIN instruction is executed Receive data is read from the receive area of the buffer memory When the BIDIN instruction has been executed the Q series C24 sends a normal end response ACK message to the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data This section shows the arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the bidirectional protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory that stores the received data length receive data count and data area received from an external device The receive area is allocated to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOOH to BFFH CH2 side at initial setting CH1 DREES The units of data length word byte is in accordance address puffer memory with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 6004 fo i Data length Receive dat t g 2 heer OSEN a ata The contents of data length of the received 6014 g message are stored to 3 Receive data Data area Y The contents of the data area of the received 7FFH message are stored in ascending address order Default 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of t
176. IRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 2 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a reception error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 6 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code e GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 6 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267H 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications This section explains the processing when simultaneous transmissions occur in full duplex communication 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions occur This section explains the processing performed by the Q series C24 when the external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time during data communications using the bidirectional protocol Because the external device and the Q series C24 do not transmit at the same time during half duplex communications see the User s Manual Application this section does not have to be read When an external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same
177. L If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the BIDIN instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs 10 19 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Error 1 Program example MELSEC Q Whether a BIDIN instruction was completed normally can be checked by the completion device D2 or status display device at completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDIN instruction is completed normally and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Does not change when left off Operation during execution of a BIDIN instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program i l Execution of BIDIN instruction Completion of reception by i J SDR instruction i I BIDIN i instruction 1 i ON Completion device OFF Status display device OFF at completion One scan In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection The following example shows a program that receives any data using the bidirectional protocol and stores that data in D10 or later When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to
178. LED is turned on an error code is stored in the following buffer memory to the error contents Name z Modern function error code Programmable controller CPU monitoring function execution result Pre defined protocol function A 40424 40524 Pre defined protocol function error code error See Section 11 2 for a detailed description of the error codes Error code storage buffer memory Switch setting error Monitoring device error 22054 23054 When the pre The communication Set the communication protocol mode to defined protocol is executed the ERR LED turns on protocol mode is set to other than Pre defined protocol mode Pre defined protocol mode No protocol setting data Write the protocol setting data from GX have been written to the Q Configurator SC Pre defined protocol series C24 support function and then execute the CPRTCL instruction 11 46 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Corrective action e The protocol By GX Configurator SC Pre defined MELSEC Q Bidirectional procedure Pre defined corresponding to the protocol support function read the protocol protocol No specified in setting from the Q series C24 the control data for the On the protocol selection screen check the CPRTCL instruction is not registered protocol and protocol No for an registered error To the same channel multiple CPRTCL instructions were e Correct the sequence pro
179. LESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 23 The ERR LED is lit Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol A communication error has occurred Check the error and remove the cause according to Section 11 1 1 ee ee a AE S incorrect series C24 ERR LED is lit The communication protocol mode is set For communication in the pre defined to Pre defined protocol mode and protocol mode change the setting to linked operation is set for two interfaces separate operations pra a data are written to the flash ROM 11 57 11 57 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 The Q series C24 of function version B has several functions that have been added or changed from the conventional product function version A This chapter explains a comparison of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC accompanied by the change addition of functions and explains how to utilize programs created for function version A as well as how to incorporate function version B modules into the existing system Appendix 1 1 Comparison of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC GX Works2 1 Comparison of the functions of Q series C24 The following table lists the functions of Q series C24 function version Function QJ71C24N QJ71C24 Bb BL A Communication using the MC protocol Communication with Communication with QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C f
180. N setting e This sets according to the system specifications whether or not data transmitted using the MC protocol is written to the programmable controller CPU from an external device while the programmable controller CPU is running e When write during RUN is prohibited disabled the data is not written and an NAK message is returned if the external device requests the programmable controller CPU to write data while it is running e Foran explanation of the functions available in this setting check in the write allowed setting and write prohibited setting columns in the command list of the Reference Manual 8 Setting modifications setting This sets whether or not the following actions are allowed after starting up the Q series C24 Changing data communication functions and transmission Specifications and the switching mode of each interface e Writing data to the flash ROM writing the system setting values and user frame 1 A setting change in the connected interface side should be set to Allowed in order to register a user frame to the flash ROM from an external device using the MC protocol 2 Setting changes in interfaces on the CH1 and CH2 sides should both be set to Allowed in order to register the system setting values and user frames to the flash ROM from the programmable controller CPU 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Communication rate setting CH1 side switch 1 upper level
181. NAK message response message to the external device after the data reception completion and ignores the data being received when the error was detected Therefore the receive data does not have to be cleared 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device 7 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows the method of sending data to the external device through data communication using the bidirectional protocol Programmable controller CPU Q series C24 Sequence Buffer memory External program device Transmission area Any data 3 a a S 1 2 Write TIE Data Mi Eo 7 sim rere vaia porion ata erain ena E gt instruction 00H to FFn oe fe hr a ee 00H to FF 2 When normal ACK 5 p e 4 lt Transmission IR When abnormal completed PEY nak lenor exe eem Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Send instruction completion device BIDOUT instruction BIDOUT BIDOUT instruction Data such as control data and transmission data are stored in the device designated with the BIDOUT instruction and then the BIDOUT instruction is executed The transmission data count and transmission data are written into the transmission area of the buffer memory The Q serie
182. No 1 IE Controller Network fa Q series C24 controlled by CPU No 1 2 Module used for routing controlled by CPU No 2 The modules used for the routing are CC Link IE Controller Network modules 1 1 2 3 4 2 Station to be accessed 1 2 3 4 2 x1 When accessing other stations a module used for routing can access the following modules e CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network modules Q series C24 e Ethernet interface modules 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 4 Use with Basic Model QCPU This section describes the use of the Q series C24 with a Basic model QCPU 1 Available functions The following table lists the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted with a Basic model QCPU Function Availability Communications using the MC protocol 1 o O Communications using non procedure protocol Data reception by interrupt program Communications using the bidirectional protocol o o o Data reception by interrupt program Communications using the pre defined protocol Communications using dedicated instructions e Communications via public line etc modem function Remote password check Transmission DC code control including Xon Xoff control ao Conteh oTROSReono o aam DTR DSR control Communications pro
183. OMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Communication data In the program example the predefined protocol communication described below is performed between QJ71C24N and the target device a Target device and protocols Connect the QJ71C24N and the inverter and read out the operation mode values of the inverter Set the inverter station number to CPU device D300 and send it and store the operation mode value in CPU device D201 QJ71024N Ex ad D FREQROL A700 Set the inverter station CPU Device number in the CPU device D300 inverter station No D300 D300 Inverter station No Check code Terminator Header Store the operation mode value in the CPU device D201 D201 Operating mode value D201 Header Operating Check Terminator mode value code Manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric FR A700 Protocol name JH7B RD Operation Mode b Storage devices for send receive data buffer memory assignment Specify the device memory of a CPU module and buffer memory as the data storage areas as listed in the table below and send receive data Data storage area Packet name Element name Packet type 3 specification H7B RD Operation Mode Inverter Station Number Send packet D300 o Inverter Station Number D200 NOR RD
184. ONDEMAND T GP ONDEMAND Un S1 S2 D Set data Setdata data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module User BIN16 bit aE to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit rst Head number of the devices in which control data is stored ist ae arcs rame Device name S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored ser D Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution System Bit The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _ Set by e Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Result read by an ONDEMAND instruction is stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code S1 2 Transmission data count e Set the transmission data count x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the ONDEMAND instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the ONDEMAND instructions 10 3 10 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function
185. PECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Protocol Ref nitia eference Decimal Hex Application Name wale Registration ection mc Non ei For Pa 128 programmable Programmable controller CPU information clear request 80H controller CPU 0000 No request RW Not allowed Section 11 1 7 information 4C43nH Requested clear 1 129 to 143 81H o 8FH ae peers O O Switching mode no designation 0001H to 0007H 0009H OOFFH 00001 No designation 00061 Non procedure protocol 0001H MC protocol format 1 00074 Bidirectional protocol 90H 1304 00024 MC protocol format 2 0009H Pre defined protocol 0003H MC protocol format 3 OOFFH GX Developer 00044 MC protocol format 4 connection 0005xH MC protocol format 5 304 Transmission specifications after switching designation Designates transmission specifications below after switching when b15 of this area is 1 ON For Operation setting b0 Independent 1 Link SONES A si or Data bit b1 7 bit 1 8 bit Not allowed Manual switching Parity bit b2 No 1 Yes Application Odd even parity b3 Odd 1 Even 305 Stop bit b4 1 bit 1 2 bit 91H 131H Sum check code b5 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 Prohibited 1 Allowed Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps For system b12 to b14 All O Transmission specifications after switching 615 designation 0 Match settings in GX Deve
186. PERATION MELSEC Q 1 LED display list QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 RUNO CIERR RUNO CERR RUNO CERR NEU C INEU NEU INEU NEU ONEU cH SD oso cH2 cHi soo gso ch2 cHi SDO gso cn2 C RDO ORD C RO orp C RDO ORD Compatible protocol Display contents On flashing Non PRESE Pre Bidirectional i procedural defined Normal operation display Normal Faulty or reset Error display 1 Error has occurred Normal Neutral status on the CH1 Waiting for MC command MC command message side display 2 message to be received __ being received Valid Invalid Off Transmission status display Reception status display Data being received Data not received Neutral status on the CH2 Waiting for MC command MC command message side display 2 message to be received being received Transmission status MC command message Data being transmitted j display not transmitted MC command message not received Data being transmitted Data not transmitted Invalid Off Reception status display Data being received x 1 This LED comes on when an error occurs at Q series C24 hardware or during data communication 2 This LED displays the data communication status via MC protocol See chapter 11 On Waiting for the command message to be received from the e
187. PU Device numbers starting with Y indicate output signals from the programmable controller CPU to the Q series C24 The following table lists the input output signals for the programmable controller CPU Device Signal descripti xo 4 CH1 Transmission normal completion ON Normal completion x1 1 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion ON Abnormal completion X2 k1 CH1 Transmission processirig ON Transmission in progress i CH1 Reception data read request X3 2 ON Requesting read CH1 Reception abnormal detection X4 2 ON Abnormal detection X5 For system CH1 Mode switching x6 3 ON Switching ON Normal Completion CH2 Transmission abnormal completion ON Transmission in progress CH2 Reception data read request ON Requesting read ON Abnormal detection xc Forsystem O ON Switching ON Error occurring x7 41 X8 1 xo 1 XA 2 xI s wo x d ON Initialization completed ON Dial in progress ON Connection in progress Initialization connection abnormal completion A XC XE XF 6 6 x1 X13 6 ON Initialization connection abnormally completed ON Disconnection completed Notification normal completion ON Abnormal completion Flash ROM system setting write completion ON Completed x14 N e gt x x D a X17 X18 6 6 6 1 1 X19 Reference section Section 9 6 4 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Secti
188. Pa Last frame No designation 1st to 4th OH No designation 1H or more Last frame No 0 No transmission designation 338 to For designation B2H to 152H to of receive user B5H 155H frame Allowed 1 or more Output frame No User frame User frame being transmitted 192 bei Not allowed B6x ae eng 0 Oreo l ot allowed Section 9 4 7 transmitted 1 to 100 User frame being transmitted nth CRILF output designation Chapters 9 B7H 157H 0 Do not send 1 Send and 11 of Output head pointer designation 0 No designation 1 to 100 Send from nth 184 344 B8x 1581 For user frame User s Manual Application 185 345 being Output count designation 0 RW Allowed BQH 159x transmitted 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output n 186 to 346 to designation 285 nine Output frame No designation A maximum of 100 can be specified BAH to to OH No transmission 1H to CO1FH Designated 11DH 1BD 286 446 For designation Message wait time designation f t issi Section 9 4 6 44EH 1BE1 a 0 No wait time 1H to Ft Wait time unit 10 ms sci Transmission transparent code designation 1st 0000H No designation Other than 0000n Designated below Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Additional code b8 to b15 Section 9 4 5 01H to FFH Additional code 287 447 11FH 1BFH For designation ea Receive trans
189. RA CS CTS CD No 23 DIRA CR 9 9 pR 7 ON se Z RTSA 8 ON RTSB CTSA L Merss SG x e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control App 23 App 23 APPENDICES Connection example 3 MELSEC Q KS 485 I Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS485 signal External device side cD DCD 1 FG sw1 se E FG 2 RD RXD 2 2 RD 1 ON TRD 7 SDA 3 3 TRD SDB a SD EON FG B E RDA rF ER DTR 4 5 cs E R 5 6 3 ON RDB SG ER 6 7 4 OFF SG DR DSR SG 5 OFF RS RTS S 20 DR 6 OFF cs cts 24 Tc cR 25 enr Z ON 8 ON Connection example 4 KS 485 I External device side RS232 signal RS485 signal Q series C24 side FG 1 FG sw1 se U FG SD TXD 2 RD 1 oN TRD 2 SDA 3 RD RXD 3 SD a ON TRD i SDB gt 5 FG 9 RDA Ma When connecting RS RTS cs 3 ON ROE R with other stations CS CTS 6f ER H 7 4 OFF SG h s DR DSR SG m 5 OFF
190. RUN LED turned off installed module If the current capacity is insufficient check power module selection Power module 5 V current capacity is Whether or not the current capacity is insufficient insufficient can be checked by disconnecting the expansion base and installing only the Q series C24 to the basic base Extraneous noise e Check if the shield wire is 2 point ground caused the Q series e When ground is used with other devices C24 to abnormal ground the Q series C24 independently operation 11 36 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 The RD LED does not blink even after message transmission from the external device Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Check if the Q series C24 and external RD RXD and SD TXD signal lines are e Signal lines are not cross connected connected correctly Use the external device OPEN statement to check if the opened port and the cable connection port are matched Connect the wiring so that the DR DSR CS CTS and other transmission control External device signals are ready RD does not blink transmission control evenithrough an signals are not turned Since the control signal specifications exter device IS ON depend on the device connect the wiring transmitting a by seeing the instruction manual of the message device used If the message passes through an RS 232 lt RS 422 e Check the specification
191. Refer to the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when reading a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the read command X1029 turns ON a Devices used Read COMMANG asiassaan X1029 e Read command pulse Signal ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeees M10 Read TAG iiceciecechewlateiainla ddan aaa M11 e Registration result acquisition CommMaNG cceeeeeeeeee M12 Number of data byte registered acquisition command M13 e User frame acquisition command cccccceeeceeeteeeeees M14 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO IS UUCUON cesids cadens ecccesa ceaadendas a a a M200 to 204 Read instruction isiin aaan DO Frame NO ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceesceeseneeseaeescaeeseaeessaseesseessaees D1 Read result ishstecdetwdivenchasi ainsi D2 e Number of data bytes registered ee eeeeeeeeeeneeenteetteees D3 USer WaMe sana us dandnantcancsauccaanunamnaanusanae D4 or later Number of registered data cccccceecceeseeeeeeeeseeeteteeesaees D50 D100 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings are used to read the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9
192. Ret CString szMessage Disconnection Ret m_actEasylf Close if IRet 0 X MessageBox The disconnection was successful else szMessage Format Disconnection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 34 MELSEC Q App 34 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data When performing data communications with non procedure protocol use the receive data clear request shown in 6 1 4 and display the sequence program example if clearing the receive data from external device If the Q series C24 input output signal is X Y000 to X YO1F The following I O signals X and internal relays M are used in the program MIE X1F PAA rr C24 ready WOT error C24 normal X23 A ee M15 Receive data Receive data clear request clear request pulse MiS SET WIG Receive data Receive data clear request clear pulse acknowledgement Executes the receive data clear request gt M16 M200 M11 M12 M17 x3 X4 f 4 44 JE 4E 4 TOP HO HOAS K1 K1 Receive data Reception Receive Receive Reception clear processing data data abnormal acknowledge in progress clear read detection ment in progress request C24 normal Transmission processing SFT MIT my eure2 gt Receive data clear in progress lt Reads the status of receive data clear request gt MI M200 K _ FROM HO HOAB D100 Ki Receive data clear in progress C24 normal KO D100 RST W16 Receive data cl
193. SEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL This chapter explains an overview of the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter abbreviated as the MC protocol See the following manual for a detailed explanation of the data communication functions that are available when using the MC protocol MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual SH 080008 5 1 Data Communication Functions The MELSEC protocol MC protocol is a communication system for the Q series programmable controllers Using this protocol the external devices can read or write device data and programs for the programmable controller CPUs via the Q series C24 or Q series Ethernet interface module Any external devices on which application programs can be installed and which can transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC programmable controller protocol can communicate with the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol 5 1 1 Accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol This section describes the main functions for accessing the programmable controller CPUs using the MC protocol An overview of the data communication functions using the MC protocol is provided in Section 3 4 With the exception of the on demand function described below the Q series C24 sends and receives data based on commands from the external devices Thus the programmable controller CPU side does not require sequence programs for data communication 1 Data
194. SEC Q GX Developer Intelligent function module switch setting setting values recording check sheet 1 Transmission setting Enter 0 or 1 in the bit position field b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Always set to OFF on Operation setting Independent Linked CH1 side Data bit 8 Do not include parity bit Parity bit Yes Vertical parity i Valid only when parity b3 Odd even parity Even o bit is set to Yes Stop bit Sum check code Yes b6 Write during RUN Prohibit b7 Setting modification _ Prohibit 2 Communication rate setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields Communication speed unit bps FH 50 a a 300 a a a A a S 200 pi o o C ee P8600 pa goo pa t9200 pa 80 a Ce 7 Ce a pO 52 0 C 3 Communication protocol setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields pf e o ooo 6 Developer connection _ MC protocol oS pec pO iirectional protocol O Po Fr linked operation setting pO to Setting prohibited i O pO ROW RASWitch test Pr incivicual station recoverytest_ App 63 App 63 INDEX A B C D E Applicable modules ccceseeeeeees 2 1 ASCll code table ceeceeeeeee App 19 Auto refresh osiers 4 23 BIDING 2 ccteiehinncitiuhkn acini nak 10 18 Bidirectional protocol ccceeeeeeeeees 7 1 BIDOU T ninni a dee 10 15 CIN ma tea a aaa 11 42 CH1 ERR CH2 ERR cccce
195. Section 10 2 1 10 3 19 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 5 Appendix 7 4 Section 2 5 Appendix 1 3 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date _ Manual Number ss CSC C RViSion lt O Z O O O May 2008 SH NA 080006 N SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 3 Section 2 1 to 2 3 2 8 Section 4 1 4 5 2 Section 5 1 1 Section 8 2 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Section 9 8 Section 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 3 10 3 6 Appendices 1 1 2 1 3 Addition Section 2 7 June 2009 SH NA 080006 O0 Correction About Manuals Manual s Use and Structure About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology Sections 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 4 to 2 6 2 8 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 3 4 to 3 6 3 8 3 9 4 1 to 4 3 4 4 2 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 6 4 7 4 7 1 5 1 4 5 1 5 6 1 2 6 1 4 6 2 2 7 1 2 and 7 2 2 Chapter 9 Sections 9 1 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 1 9 4 9 4 5 9 6 1 9 6 3 10 2 to 10 8 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 2 1 11 3 11 3 1 to 11 3 3 and 11 3 5 to 11 3 22 Appendices 1 1 2 1 3 9 6 and 10 Partial addition Section 3 3 4 Chapter 8 Sections 9 4 9 9 6 7 11 3 4 and 11 3 6 Section number change Chapters 8 to 10 9 to 11 Sections 9 6 7 to 9 6 10 9 6 8 to 9 6 11 Sections 9 4 9 to 9 4
196. Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Received data count designation O1FF Receive complete code designation ODo4 Hffff Not designated receive complete code HOd0a CR LF HO000 HOOFf Receive complete code Receive user frame designation Do not use User frame use enable disable designation MM Input following eight items within the following range O Not designated H0001 H03e7 Default frame H03e8 HO04af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame Receive user frame designation 0000 First frame No designation 1st r Flash ROM setting Write to module Readfrom oad file module Details Save file Hexadecimal input 0001 33FE Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Buffer memory address Item Reference section Received data count designation z z Chapter 6 Receive complete code designation User frame use enable disable designation First frame No designation 1st to 4th AEH to B1H_ 14EH to 151H Last frame No designation 1st to 4th B2H to B5H 152H to 155H Receive user frame 20204 to 2120H to designation User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th 2023H 2123H User s Manual Application 2024H to 2124H to Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th 2027H 2127H a CRILF output designation Transmission user g Out
197. T User s Manual Connection By connecting a GOT graphic operation terminal to the interface for the Q series C24 operations such as monitoring the programmable controller CPU can be performed 1 VERVIEW L MELSEC Q c Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT e Itis possible to connect a personal computer with GX Developer and the GOT to two interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time It is thus possible for more than one user to perform programming monitoring etc simultaneously GX Developer cannot be connected to CH1 on the QJ71C24N CH2 on the QJ71C24 and the QU71C24N R4 e When the GOT and the personal computer with GX Developer are connected at the same time the two interfaces of the Q series C24 cannot perform an interlock operation QI71C24 R2 a cH1 E Jone RS 232 cable CH2 KIKA When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to the Q series C24 on a 1 1 one to one basis The switch setting for the interface connected to GX Developer or a GOT is not required for accessing or monitoring a QCPU If the switch setting is not performed the GX Developer connection mode will be active When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to the Q series C24 on a 1 n multi drop basis Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Functions supporting multiple CPU systems Details are explained in the Reference Manual a When accessi
198. UBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control signal status This section explains how to read the control signal status stored in the buffer memory during communication using RS 232 interface When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 9 6 3 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to check the signal on off status of the RS 232 interface 1 RS 232 control signal status address 254H 264n The status of the RS 232 signals is stored as follows b15 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on CH1 side Buffer memory address 254H 264H 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on CH2 side RS RTS DR DSR ER DTR CD DCD CS CTS CRI System area for QJ71C24 R2 1 For more details on signals for RS 232 see Section 3 2 1 2 Signals output from the Q series C24 side RS RTS and ER DTR are controlled by the operating system OS of the Q series C24 They cannot be directly controlled by the sequence program 3 There is a maximum delay of 100 ms in signal status stored in the buffer memory above 2 Example of a program that reads from RS 232 control signal status address 2544 2641 The following shows an example of a program that reads the RS 232 control signal status input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24
199. UNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 2 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 5 The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 10 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code e GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 5 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268n Receive data when a reception error occurs a Storing receive data The receive data for which an error was detected is discarded and only the normally received data is stored in the Q series C24 Thus there may be missing data among the data that has been read to the programmable controller CPU when a reception error occurs Reading receive data When receive data is read to the programmable controller CPU by turning the reception abnormal detection X4 XB ON the data that was normally received prior to the error detection is read Read and discard receive data as needed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Programmable Q series C24 controller CPU Receive area F HA o Reception buffer me
200. X Developer modem used or the line is short side Line callback cancel wait time but callback from the Q callback delay time series C24 cannot be ariowmed There is a problem with the modem Check the modem s specifications and 5 s specifications or settings settings It is possible to connect 11 53 11 53 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 17 Communication is not available with the ISDN sub address Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action MC procedure panies S protocol defined A e Sub address is incorrect e Review the sub address a a a communicated with ISDN address address A reer eee e using the TA manual 11 3 18 Periodic transmission is not performed normally Non Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol e Does not operate inthe The setting value of the constant cycle Review the constant cycle transmission cycle time designated in transmission is incorrect setting the constant cycle The cycle time is affected by some Remove the causes or designate the transmission setting causes cycle time anticipating the causes 11 3 19 Condition agreement transmission is not performed normally N i i H Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined Does not operate in the The setting value of the condition e Review the condition agreement cycle time designated in agreement transmissio
201. X3 turns ON After the control data for the BIDIN instruction is stored in the device the sequence program executes the BIDIN instruction and reads the receive data When the reading of receive data is completed a response message ACK message when the operation was completed normally is sent and the device that has completed the BIDIN instruction turns ON 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F MO DO D1 D2 D3 D10 to Dm Kove HOVP wove MI 6 BIDIN UO DO For normal completion Receive data Receive data Interface number 1 Reception result 0 Receive data count n Allowable receive data count 10 H i ars 4 BMOV DIO Ki KO K10 D10 D2 D110 DO D2 D3 MO z0 K0ZO Address 258H MELSEC Q Designate the receive channel Clear the receive data count storage device J to 0 J Designate the allowable receive data count With the normal completion the receive data within the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive j data storage area in the buffer memory After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO comes on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the programmable controller CPU Q series C24
202. a is completed 2 For the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station of the MELSECNET H and details of the REMFR REMTO instruction refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network App 38 App 38 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using sequence program In the following program example data are read from or written to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction Use GX Configurator SC to change the default value of the buffer memory Using GX Configurator SC save the new setting value to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program reads data from or writes data to the QJ71C24N buffer memory CH1 side word byte units designation area when the read write command X1020 X1021 turns ON a Devices used Read write command cccessceceeeeeeesessceeeeeeesesseseeeeeeeess X1020 X1021 Read write command pulse Signal ccesceeeeeereeeees M10 M11 Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INStPUCTION ccccccccsececessseeecesseeeeccaeeceessaeeeseaeeeeseaeeeesstaeeeesea M200 to 203 Read from word byte units designation area c cere DO Write to word byte units designation area cece D1 2 Program examples
203. address setting error 7EO7H Currently 7EO8H inexecutable error 7EO9u 7EOAn 7E40x Data length error 11 22 Description e When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a conversion variable variable number of data and variable number of digits the corresponding data is 0 bytes 0 digits or exceeds the maximum number of digits e In the data received from the external device the Length value does not match the data length of the conversion variable s e When the protocol used for data reception includes a packet that contains a conversion variable a value of the data for the conversion variable exceeds the range allowed for the Q series C24N The value set in the data length storage area or the data quantity storage area is out of range An out of range value is set for the decimal point position when the number of decimals is set to Variable The number of decimals is larger than the number of digits for each data The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Transmit receive buffer memory addresses are in the special applications area systemeror e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error e The UINI instruction was executed during programmable controller CPU information clear System enor e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error e Anonexistent command or subcommand was designated e A data length exceedin
204. al No are 06062 O O O Specification of station No 65 to 120 by MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS Additional function Access to link direct device LW10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only Function version of the Q series C24 QJ71C24N R2 R4 Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09043 QJ71C24 R2 Version of related product MELSEC Q CPU module Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 GX Developer GX Configurator SC GX Works2 Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register W10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C 2C frame only Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09043 Universal model QCPU of function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 09042 Setting to buffer memories Can be set in buffer memory Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 10122 or greater The QJ71C24N R4 only System registration to the flash ROM System registration to flash ROM available Function version B or later first 5 dig
205. al device side using the CD DCD signal of the RS 232 interface This is affected by the CD terminal check designation in CHn transmission control and others system setting screen on GX Configurator SC e Performing half duplex communication using specifications on the external device side an example of such a connection is shown in this section Using modem functions b The connection cable FG signal and shield are connected as follows _ Connestion on the Q series C24 side Connect to the Q series C24 connector Do not short the communication cable FG Connection cable FG signal housing signal and the SG signal When the FG signal and the SG signal are Connect to the external device FG terminal connected inside the external device do not Connection cable shield or the Q series C24 connector housing connect the FG signal to the Q series C24 c When normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise perform the wiring as follows 1 Connect the FG terminals on the external device and the Q series C24 using the shield of the connection cable 2 Signals other than SG should be connected with SG signals in the twisted pair Q series C24 Shield External device To Connector ar pee Pe a gag se eee ee en on gt EG housing roa E SD TXD ae BEDS inane i ote Se SESS k i RD RXD RD RXD Eo aes ae ONE ae eG ane SD TXD DR DSR ee ER DTR ER DTR oi T es Se o
206. al detection X4 XB When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 1 Reception data read request X3 XA 1 Timer 0 External device set time Q series C24 Reception abnormal detection X4 XB Format is 0 Reception data read request X3 XA Format is 1 x1 In non procedure protocol a message is received by the increase in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and the received data count are not decided For the non procedure protocol at the non reception monitoring time format see the User s Manual Application 2 CR is included as 1 byte of data included in the message 2 When the receive complete code is changed and an arbitrary code is designated OOLIUd designated User defined receive complete code data is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data changed by the user it stores the receive data up to the receive complete code to the buffer memory receive area and turned on the reception data read request X3 X4 to the programmable controller CPU Receive complete code data External device Q series C24 Reception data request X3 XA 3 When receive complete code not designated FFFFH designated Reading by received data count is enabled See 2 for a description of reading by received data count 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q
207. al device and Q series C24 with 1 n system configuration RS 232 RS 485 4 we d External device and Q series C24 with m n system configuration
208. ame data transmission reception as used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the programmable controller CPU side in Chapter 7 Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions 3 The external device can transmit or receive data in the same way as the UC24 C24 S8 5 Others 1 2 App 14 The Q series C24 has other functions that are equivalent to those of UC24 C24 S8 which are not mentioned above Check functions and specifications in this manual and the manuals listed below and use the applicable functions e User s Manual Application e Reference Manual App 14 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing systems This section shows the notes when installing the Q series C24 into an existing system that uses UC24 C24 S8 1 Data communication using m n connection When the Q series C24 is installed into an existing system that has an m n system structure between the programmable controller CPU and external devices and data communication is performed using the MC protocol the following notes should be considered a Accessing the programmable controller using a frame for form 5 When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the programmable controller in the QnA compatible 4C frame form 5 for binary code communication b Data
209. an be used when connecting with GX Developer This function is available in GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer can only be connected to the CH1 side in case of the Q series C24 of function version A It is not possible to connect both GX Developer and the GOT to the two interfaces at the same time App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 List of added setting items for GX Configurator SC The following table lists the setting items added to GX Configurator SC due to a software version upgrade Software version Screen Additional setting item QSCULE P eerenee 40E section 20W 11M 06G 00A 10L 30D ba 20C Eueerrsirenes ole fotofo fof completion E completion Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnect monitortest Callback permitaccumulatedcont O Callback denial accumulated count O O O a a OTOP OTOL SY aed count of callback receive procedure Ea cancel Section Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use o olo xX 9 6 2 egerem TTPO foto fof designation eee Toreroteret pe Modem function count designation system setting Auto modem initialization designation jj xX Callback function designation function Callback function designation Callback denial notification accumulated count designation Data No for callback designation1to10 No for callback Data No for callback designation1to10 1to10 Transm
210. ancel completed set by Q series C24N i support function Section 5 1 5 8955 22FBr Section 9 6 2 Not allowed User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Protocol Ref nitia eference Decimal Hex Application Name value Registration Section Mc Non Bi Pa Execution status 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending Section 8 1 4 i 3 Waiting for data reception Checking pre 4 Receiving defined protocol 5 Completed Not allowed function Pre defined protocol function error code 16450 16466 execution status 40421 0 Normal Section 11 2 40521 Other than 0 Error error code Number of protocol executions ee ee 0 No log Section 8 1 3 H a 1 to 65535 Number of executions 16452 to 16468 to 16463 16479 16449 16465 40414 40511 Use prohibited System area 4044n to pa to 40601 to 40851 Protocol No 16518 40861 1 to 128 Protocol No 65535 Unidentified Setting type 16519 4087 0 Packet setting or element setting 1 Protocol detailed setting g 65535 Not specified Protocol setting P data error Packet No Not allowed ee information aii packet 16520 40881 1 to 16 Receive packet 65535 Unidentified Valid when the Setting type value is 0 Element No 46521 4089x 1 to 32 Element No 65535 Unidentified Valid when the Setting type value is 0 16522 to 16527 T 408A n to 408FH Use prohibite
211. anging the communication protocol and transmission setting App 59 Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet cc cccecceesecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeseaeeseaeeesaeessneeseeeesseeeeaes App 62 INDEX Index 1tolndex 2 ABOUT MANUALS The following table lists the manuals relating to this product Please order the desired manual s as needed Related manuals Model Code MELSEC Q L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application This manual explains the special functions specifications usage and settings of the serial SH 080007 communication module and data communication method with external devices 13JL87 sold separately MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This manual explains how the external devices read and write programmable controller CPU data SH 080008 through communication with the MC protocol using the serial communication module Ethernet module 13JF89 sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function This manual explains the function and usage of the protocol FB support function that supports the SH 080393E creation of the data communication program of the serial communication module and set up of each 13JU46 parameter sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function This manual explains the pre defined protocol support function and usage and the proto
212. ansmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Gutput head point send from the nth Allowed Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position addresses CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDu Output count designation for fixed cycle transmission and non procedure data transmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for fixed cycle transmission and notification 0 No designation OBB8H to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection System area Number of registered word blocks designation 0 No designation It is possible to 1 to 10 Number of blocks of word devices designate a Number of registered bit blocks designation maximum of 10 0 No designation blocks in total 1 to 10 Number of blocks of bit devices Programmable controller CPU abnormal monitoring designation 0 Do not monitor 1 Monitor Monitoring device designation 0 No designation 90H to CCH Device code Head device No designation 0 or more Head device No Read point designation 0 No designation 1 or more Number to read points Monitoring condition designation judgment condition designation 0 No designation 1 or more Monitoring condition Monitoring condition value designation At bit device 0 OFF 1 ON At word device 0 to FFFFH Monitoring condition value Transmission pointer desi
213. anter 991 1391 communications 0 Priority s oe aa 5 control 1 to 255 Non priority transmission wait time unit 100 ms AEON SA Section 9 4 8 designation RS Retransmission time transmission method designation Allowed 232 0 Do not resend 1 Resend User s Manual Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Application 155 315 For designation e Receive data valid invalid b0 98x 13BH of communication 0 Valid 1 Invalid control Transmission data valid invalid b8 0 Valid 1 Invalid 156 316 No reception monitoring tme timer 0 designation 9Cx 13CH OH Wait infinitely R 28H to FAOH Monitoring time unit byte For designation EEEE m 7 Section 9 4 5 Response monitoring time timer 1 designation 157 317 Jof data e E 9D1 13DxH communication os Wait infinitely RW Allowed User s Manual 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms time monitoring ee Tee RW Application 158 318 Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation H 9EH 13EH OH Wait infinitely 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms 159 319 Pn 9Fx 13FH Use prohibited System area 160 320 For desianati Buffer memory head address designation Section 9 4 6 Aon 140p Or S amp S 9NAHON 400 to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH of on demand Reference 161 321 function Manual A1H 1444 For designation Transmission buffer memory head address designation A2x 142 a 400H to 1AFFH 260
214. anual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions A WARNING e For the operation status of each station at communication error in each station refer to the respective manual for each station The communication error may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction e When using the notification function the pager receiver may not be contacted due to the frequency transmission status from the system setup environment and error on the receiver side To ensure the safety of the programmable controller system install a call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer sound e When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external d
215. are set using the GX Developer Parameter setting item Parameter description Set data Performs I O assignment Type for the Q series C24 and Model name O assignment setting Section 4 5 1 enables the switch settings Points listed below Start X Y CH1 Transmission setting Switch 1 7 CH1 Communication rate setting Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting Switch setting CH2 Transmission setting Section 4 5 2 Switch 3 TE 7 CH2 Communication rate setting Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Interrupt pointer Start No Performs setting for reading CPU side i i j San Interrupt pointer No of units Interrupt pointer setting reception date with interrupt Section 4 5 3 Intelligent Sneha 1 0 No module side rograms aie IStartSINo o SI No Sets the remote password Password settings Remote password User s Manual and the Q series C24 that hie m settings Application performs the check odule settings IstatxXY sd XY 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU This section describes the input output signals of the Q series C24 The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the Q series C24 is 0000 installed to slot O of the main base unit Device numbers starting with X indicate input signals from the Q series C24 to the programmable controller C
216. area varies by protocol 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 Function of the Pre Defined Protocol The function of the pre defined protocol is listed below Operating Manual Data communication with Data can be sent and received using the protocol of the A Pre defined protocol external device external device 8 1 1 Data communication procedure By the following procedure taken in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol function data can be exchanged with an external device Step 1 Register the protocol of the external device Add protocol Add editable protocol In the Add protocol dialog box select Protocol Manufacturer Model Protocol name Select from pre defined protocol library j or Add editable protocol and set MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREQROL Series necessary data OK Cancel Step 2 Specify the send or receive data storage area d Specify the send or receive data storage area Specify the send or receive data storage area Device or buffer memory data can be taken into communication packets and thereby this protocol communication is suitable for data that may change every transmission siting project1 pcf Ee x Selected from pre defined protocol library Editable protocol E Protocol ine To the next page 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL From the prev
217. art monitor Stop monitor Close Monitor Test items The following selection menus for monitor test operation will be displayed Function ERR occurrence ERR clear request Communication error information error code information Modem function monitor test ransmission control and others monitor test MC protocol monitor Reference section containing explanation Section 9 6 11 Section 9 6 1 Section 9 6 2 Section 9 6 3 Section 9 6 4 Sls Fle lo 3 Q 2 e T a jon procedure monitor test Bidirectional monitor re defined protocol monitor test LC CPU monitoring monitor ransmission user frame No designation monitor Monitor test others Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Section 9 6 7 Section 9 6 8 Section 9 6 9 Section 9 6 10 ystem setting default system setting write Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Section 9 4 12 Section 9 4 13 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 6 1 X Y monitor test Purpose MELSEC Q Perform the monitoring of I O signals and testing of output signals Operating procedure Monitor screen gt X Y monitor test Monitor Test screen o x r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QU71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value lt 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion x01 Transmission abnormal completion fF o x02 Transmission process
218. as an example 1 2 Private Sub Buttonl_Click ByVal sender As System Obj Dim rtn As Integer 3 Dim iData ds Integer rtn AxactEasyIF1 Open rtn AxdctEasyIF1 GetDevice DO Labell Text iData iData End Sub Form1 DER Completed App 28 Perform the communication settings from a IBM PC AT compatible personal computer to the programmable controller by following the wizard Some types of controls are set only by programs without using the wizard The wizard allows the user to perform the settings required for the communication such as logical station number connected module type and programmable controller to be connected Paste the ACT control icon onto the form and assign the logical station number set in step 1 to the property of the pasted control Use the functions provided by the software to write a program that reads the device data App 28 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Sample program The following sample program reads DO to D4 five points of the target programmable controller using the logical station number a When Visual Basic is used 1 Screen example Form1 Text1 Enter the logical station number Logical station No Connection M F Command or Button rittesereiies Connect to the communication line Command2 or Button2 Read the device data Disconnection A Command3 or Button3 1 Cut the communication line ACT control
219. ash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Execute test System setting write System setting default Default request Default request Re Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Allow E System setting write Write request Write request X 9 4 13 Flash ROM write allow prohibit setting This section explains the settings to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Startup procedure Online Monitor Test Select monitor Test module Monitor Test Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Flash ROM write allow prohibit and set Allowed or Prohibited Procedure 2 Click on Execute test Flash ROM write allow prohibit will be set to Allowed or Prohibited accordingly 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 5 Auto Refresh Setting The auto refresh settings are used to automatically store information stored in the Q series C24 s buffer memory into a specified device of the programmable controller CPU By setting the auto refresh the read and write processing of the Q series C24 s buffer memories on the program are not necessary For details see Section 4 6 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 6 Monitor Test Purpose MELSEC Q The displayed menu screen is used to perform various operations including the monitoring of the Q series C24 s operating status and setting
220. at the next END processing Operation during execution of an OUTPUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t ie i 5 A Comp letion of transmission by tire E cution OR OUTE UT oe the OUTPUT instruction instruction OUTPUT instruction ON Completion device OFF Abnormal i Status display device OFF at completion Normal One scan 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 10 9 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the non procedure protocol When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F X20 JH PLS M50 The transmission command is converted into pulse M50 2 M0V ABCDEFG Di J Transmission data is stored MoV HOAOD DIS 7 Fov KI D0 Designate the number of the interface CH pJ that will F send the data HOV Ko D1
221. ata communications using ASCII lt BIN conversion When data are converted between ASCII and binary always transmit data in units of even bytes Confirm the message sent from the external device correct it and restart the communication If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for Conversion Sign character Number of decimals Delimiter or number of digits of the conversion variable If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for Code type or Data length of the check code When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains a ASCII BIN conversion variable the data conversion error corresponding to the conversion variable cannot be converted to binary numbers When data are received by the protocol including a packet that contains an error check code ASCII hexadecimal or ASCII decimal the data corresponding to the error check code cannot be converted to binary numbers Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 7F21 u Receive header frame part area error e An ASCII code that cannot be e Anonexistent command or device was Command error designated e The remote password length is wrong 11 25 11 25 C
222. ate control data from DO Abnormal eo _ detection G INPUT Un DO D10 MO m MO M1 Processing for normal completion receive data is stored M1 Processing for abnormal completion Reading and discarding received data zl resent request etc 1 When the completion device is off execute the INPUT instruction If the INPUT instruction is executed when the completion device is on data may not be received properly 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q CH1 side Q series C24 ready X1E 1 Reception data read request X3 ON during abnormal reception detection ON during abnormal reception detection Reception abnormal detection X4 INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete MO device mo INPUT instruction complete M1 device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion Received data count address 600 m Received data address 6014 to Receive data 1 Receive data 2 Data reception T A Data reception 1 Data reception 2 1 Start the self station programmable controller CPU The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 When the amount of data specified by the received data count or data containing the receive complete code is received from the external device the reception data read request X3 turns ON 3 After the control data for the INPUT instruction is stored in the device the sequence pr
223. ation 200AH 00001 to FFFFH Wait time s 8201 nan Use prohibited temas area 20091 Remote password mismatch notification count designation Ou No designation Section 5 1 5 For remote 1H to FFFFH Notification times Section 9 4 4 password Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count RW Allowed function designati User s Manual eigna Ion f 1 Application OH No designation 1H to FFFFH Cumulative times of notification towed 8204 200CH 8205 200Dx 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Decimal Hex Application Name iit Protocol Registration ene eee Mc Non Bi Pa 8206 For designation Circuit disconnect wait time programmable controller CPU watch Section 9 4 4 200En of modem use RW Allowed User s Manual function 3 00004 to FFFFH Wait time unit s Application Use prohibited System area 8208 8464 Tea Receive interrupt issued designation User s Manual i RW Allowed ere 2010n 2110 designation 0 Do not issue interrupt 1 Issue interrupt Application 8209 8465 sis 8210 8466 Transmission control start free area designation 64 2012H 21124 64 to 4 095 transmission control start free area User s Manual 8211 8467 For t Ee Transmission control end free area designation 263 Application 2013H 21134 or transmission 263 to 4096 transmission control end free area Allowed control Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation 8468
224. ation using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as when communicating using the protocol for the A series computer link modules Device memory read write operations for the QCPU are allowed within the device range of the AnACPU For details see the Reference Manual Bidirectional protocol A communication procedure for the serial communication modules and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the programmable controller CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 7 Independent operation A mode of interface operation to communicate data with external devices using a function specified in each communication protocol setting Two interfaces of serial communication modules do not interact Linked operation MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol The operation mode of each of the two interfaces for a serial communication module that are connected to external devices and linked to one another in order to send receive data to from the external devices The two interfaces communicate data using the identical data communication function MC protocol identical format or non procedure protocol and the identical transmission specifications Linked operation using the bidirectional or pre defined protocol is not allowed A communication procedure for the Q series serial communication modules or the Ethernet interface modules and a name of comm
225. ation error information from address 2011 Reads switch setting error description from address 203n Reads data transmission reception results from address 256 to 258n Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 2 When data is communicated using the non procedure or bidirectional H FROMP HO H201 D0 KI FROMP HO H203 1 K1 O OMP H H256 02 K3 Turn off clear PR command rop HO HO HOFF K1 YOE protocol XOE d H rR o H201 po KI FROMP H0 H203 D1 Kt FROM 25 D2 K2 Turn off clear t i Bo Hasr command a top HO HO HOFF KI YOE Reads LED and communication error information from address 201 Reads switch setting error description from address 203n Reads data transmission reception results from address 2571 to 258n Writes initialization request such as for displayed LED to address Ou Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 3 When data is communicated using the pre defined protocol XOE It FROHP HO 201 0 KI FROHP 0 203 1 K1 FROMP 0 257 2 K2 Turn of
226. ations Product Configuration Chapter 2 all Section 3 8 Section 4 2 2 1 Section 5 1 3 POINT Section 5 1 4 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 10 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 Addition Appendix 9 Sep 2004 SH NA 080006 H Correction Section 1 3 Section 2 5 2 6 Section 3 5 3 6 3 9 Section 4 1 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 9 8 6 10 Section 10 1 10 2 Appendix 1 1 Addition Aug 2005 SH NA 080006 J Correction CAUTIONS Section 3 3 1 3 3 3 Section 8 2 2 i f ppendix 5 Appendix 7 1 7 2 Feb 2006 SH NA 080006 K l Correction ll Section 2 6 Section 3 9 Section 8 2 1 8 3 3 Section 9 1 Appendix 5 Mar 2006 SH NA 080006 L Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 3 Section 2 6 Section 3 2 1 3 8 3 9 Section 8 6 9 Section 10 2 1 10 3 11 Appendix 1 Addition Section 10 1 7 Jan 2008 SH NA 080006 M Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Correction About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 3 Section 2 1 2 5 2 7 Section 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 9 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 2 4 6 4 9 2 Section 5 1 4 5 2 Section 6 1 6 Chapter 8 Section 9 2 to 9 8 Section 10 1 1 10 1 6 10 2 1 10 2 3 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 8 10 3 11 Appendix 9 12 Feb 2005 SH NA 080006 I l Correction Section 2 1 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 5 2 1 Chapter 9 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions
227. ayed when writing the protocol setting data to the module is completed Pre defined protocol support function x e JI Writing to module completed 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q d Executing the protocols program example Create a program with the dedicated instruction CPRTCL instruction using GX Developer Switch the CPU module to RUN and execute the registered protocol by the dedicated instruction CPRTCL instruction The following table shows the devices to be used e 1 0 signal of QU71C24N Predefined protocol ready X1D e Devices used in program example Device Purpose Device Purpose A Status display device at X20 CPRTCL instruction execution command M1 completion D300 Inverter Station Number designation device M101 Normal completion flag Execution result storing device for the i D10 M102 Error completion flag CPRTCL instruction Execution protocol number designation i D12 D100 Error code storing device device MO Completion device X20 X1D m eme MOV KO D300 Stores set values in the CPRTCL Predefined Send data storage area execution protocol command ready mov K1 D12 Protocol No 1 is specified uo K2 Kl D10 HO Protocol is executed Communicated at CH2 MO M1 h SET M101 Normal completion flag ON SET M102 Error completion flag ON A D10 D100 Error code is stored Receive data are stored to the rec
228. b Private Sub Command3_Click tkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Disconnection tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Disconnection rtn ActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 32 App 32 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 4 When Visual C 6 0 is used kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Il Connection PPR void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage II Reflects the logical station No set in the text box to variables UpdateData Get LogicalstationNumber m_actEasylf SetActLogicalStationNumber m_ LogicalStationNumber Connection Ret m_actEasylf Open if IRet 0 X MessageBox The connection was successful yelse szMessage Format Connection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk II Read PPR e void CVCDIg OnRead long IRet short sData 5 CString szMessage DO D4 are read IRet m_actEasylf ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if IRet 0 X szMessage Format D0 D5 d d d d d sData 0 sData 1 sData 2 sData 3 sData 4 MessageBox szMessage else szMessage Format Read Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 33 App 33 APPENDICES kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk II Disconnection kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void CVCDIg OnClose long I
229. b CH2 side buffer memory address decimal hexadecimal N th block monitoring device 5 6 8528 8537 8546 8555 8564 8573 8582 8591 8600 8609 2150H 2159H 2162H 216BH 2174H 217DH 2186H 218FH 2198H 21A1H Monitoring device designation 8529to 8538to 8547to 8556to 8565to 8574to 8583to 8592to 8601to 8610to 8530 8539 8548 8557 8566 8575 8584 8593 8602 8611 BEREE 2151uto 215Anto 2163Hto 216CHto 21754to 217Ento 2187Hto 2190Hto 2199uto 2142n to Head device No designation 21524 215By 21644 216Da 2476m 217FH 21881 2191n 219An 21A31 8531 8540 8549 8558 8567 8576 8585 8594 8603 8612 2153H 215CH 2165H 216EH 2177H 2180H 2189H 2192H 219BH 21A4H 8532 8541 8568 8577 8586 8604 8613 Monitoring condition designation Judgment 2154H 215Dy 2178H 2181H 218A 219CH 21A5H condition designation Designation of number of points read 8533 8542 8569 8578 8587 8605 8614 2155H 215En 2179H 2182H 218BH 219DH 21A6H 8534 8543 8561 8570 8579 8606 Transmission pointer designation for 2156H 215FH 2171H 217AH 2183H 219EH conditional transmission data transmission Monitoring condition value designation 8535 8544 8562 8571 8580 8607 Designation of number of outputs for 2157H 21601 2172H 217BH 2184H 219FH conditional transmission
230. be turned on at completion of execution System The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Transmission result by a BIDOUT instruction are Se stored Transmission result o Nedaal System Other than 0 Error code 1 S1 2 Transmission data count Set the transmission data count 2 x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated 3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDOUT instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the BIDOUT instructions 10 15 10 15 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function 1 The function sends data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the BIDOUT instruction or executing the BIDOUT instruction during execution of anoth
231. block Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 3P Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less Insulation resistance 10000 M Q km or more Dielectric strength 500 V DC 1 minute Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60nF km or less on average Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 109 Recommended conductor size 0 2 mm to 0 75 mm Diameter 22 to 16 AWG Type Stranded wire Copper wire Temperature rating 60 C or more Recommended cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P ue MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P have the same electrical characteristics but different external diameter and internal wire colors 2 Make the total distance within 1200 m 3937 ft when two or more devices are connected in a 1 n or m n configuration 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 circuit The following precautions must be observed when transferring data with an external device through the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface Take the following into account when the transferring data with the external device 1 Error receive data countermeasures at external device during RS 422 485 connection If the external device may receive erroneous data install a pull up or pull down resistor to the external device as follows Installing a pull up or pull down resistor resistance value criter
232. cations ie Full duplex half duplex communications communication system 1 Bidirectional protocol Full duplex half duplex communications communication Pre defined protocol communication 6 Start stop synchronization method QJ71C24N R2 R4 so 300 600 1200 2400 4800 soo bps e Transmission speed 230400 bps is available for only CH1 Not available for CH2 e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230400 bps Transmission speed e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps when the communication data monitoring function is used QJ71C24 R2 so so eoo 1200 2400 4800 osoo 14400 19200 28800 ss4o0 szeoo 115200 bps e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps 1 Data format 718 1 vertical parity or none Processes one request during installed programmable controller CPU END processing MC protocol communication Number of scans that must be processed number of link scans depends on the contents of the request See Reference Manual Full duplex half duplex communications Non procedure protocol Access cycle communication Bidirectional protocol communication Pre defined protocol Sends each time a send request is issued Can receive at any time Sends or receives data when requested with the dedicated instruction CPRTCL communication 6 Parity check Selected
233. ccumulated count Not allowed function 0 or more Accumulated count pres han Auto callback connection denial accumulated count Application 8947 2 0 or more Accumulated count Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 8948 2 0 or more Accumulated count 8949 to 8954 ia 22F5x to 22FAn Use prohibited System area Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion For the remote 0 or more Accumulated count of normal completion password Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 8956 22FCx function processing 0 or more Accumulated count of abnormal completion es to eee ae Section 5 1 5 For the remote Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection Section 9 6 2 8959 22FFH password 0 or more Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit Not allowed function disconnection User s Manual a es 9216 2400 Use prohibited For flash ROM 9217 24014 aE m Rash ROMWmercount Not allowed 0 to 1000 Write count housing 9218 t pail Sodio ieaS User free area 2 6656 words ae 3FFFH For user Transmission receiving data monitoring function default buffer RW Not allowed Usage is determined by the user Use prohibited System area Section 8 1 3 A Operating Pre defined Protocol cancel Manual 16464 protocol function 0 No cancel instruction RW Not allowed Pre defined 4050 control data 1 Cancel request set by user al specification 2 C
234. ccurs and keeps its on status even after the communication returns to normal The programmable controller CPU can check the aforementioned LED ON status and communications error status and initialize any error information using read write to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 and input output signals Initialize the error information according to Section 11 1 2 NAK to NEU No 6 to 8 turn on off depending on the status SD WAIT turns on when data cannot be sent to the external device by the transmission control of the Q series C24 waiting for data transmission e When transmission cannot be started e When a transmission pause request is received during data transmission DR DSR signal is off reception by DC3 SD WAIT turns off when transmission becomes possible and data transmission is started resumed 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 1 2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module This section explains the ERR LED ON factors and the error code initialization clear for the Q series C24 1 ERR LED ON factors When any of the following errors occurs its error code is stored in the buffer memory corresponding to the interface CH where the error occurred and the ERR LED turns on Applicable protocol procedure protocol defined SS Mode Mode switching error error error status oe a Sestak a eet eth IMC protocol transmission error_ 25An 26An MC protocol transmission err
235. ce the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory This section describes the buffer memory 1 Configuration of the buffer memory A buffer memory consists of a user area and a system area as described below a User area 1 This is the area where users write read data 2 The user area consists of areas for storing setting values for data communication for actual data communication and for storing communication status and communication error information 3 Data read write to the user area should be performed following the instructions in the corresponding detailed reference page b System area This area is used by the Q series C24 system 2 List of buffer memory assignments A buffer memory is configured with 16 bits per address The name default value etc of each address of the buffer memory is listed in the table on the following pages 1 Abbreviations in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol 2 Meaning of symbols shown in the Protocol column The following symbols are assigned to protocols related to the setting values of a corresponding area and to areas used for controlled with user settings and indicate what kind of access is allowed to the area in question
236. ception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC Q series C24 Receiving area buffer memory Receive data External device Description CH1 CH2 Control timing Reception data read request X3 XA INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete device When data is received from the external device using either reception via receive complete code or reception via received data count method the reception data read request X3 XA turns ON Control data is stored in the device designated with the INPUT instruction When the INPUT instruction is executed receive data is read from the reception data storage area of the buffer memory 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Data reception by receive complete code for variable length reception a d This method is used to send data by adding the receive complete code set in the Q series C24 at the complete of the message to be sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a receive data read request to the sequence program The read request from the
237. cessing OFF MELSEC Q END END processing processing OFF ON When failed 1 When completed One scan CH1 or CH2 is in predefined protocol mode QJ71C24N R2 R4 4 Setting processing Communication not possible i 4 i i i i i i i i i i i i i gt Mode switching f signal X6 XD Communication protocol before change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program 7 a Execution of UINI UINI instruction ON Completion Okk i L device i i ON When failed I ae ost ets 4 Completion i status l When completed indication One scan device i i e Predefined protocol ready X1D QJ71C24N R2 R4 CH1 or CH2 is in predefined protocol mode Setting processing Communication not possible CH1 or CH2 is in predefined protocol mode i i i i i i gt 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Communication protocol before change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 and CH2 are other than the predefined protocol mode END END END END Sequence proc
238. cessing b Status display device at completion Turns ON and off depending on the completion status of the CPRTCL instruction e Normal completion OFF with no change e Error completion Turns ON at the END processing of the scan where the CPRTCL instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END processing Operation during execution of the CPRTCL instruction END END END END i i 1 Execution of aa of CPRTCL instruction CPRTCL instruction CPRTCL instruction i i ON Completion device Oe OO i f I 1 i f i i Error f i f f i f i i i Sequence program at completion Status display device OFF Normal 1 completion One scan e y The following describes how to check the execution status of protocols 1 Checking with the buffer memory Use the protocol execution status address 4041H 4051H For details refer to Section 3 9 2 Checking with state monitor Open the Predefined Protocol Function tab in the State Monitor screen For details refer to Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 10 24 10 24 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Error 1 When a dedicated instruction is failed the status display device at completion D 1 turns ON and the error code is stored in the execution result S 0 In case of operation errors Error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Refer
239. channel designation incorrect 11 32 error Connection to the modem TA was unsuccessful or the modem TA is not connected Ea p 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code Signal Hexa Error Contents BAN Corrective action Reference section decimal Recheck the user frame number Designate the registered user frame Section 3 4 3 number Section 3 4 4 Register the designated data for Section 3 4 5 initialization Designate the output head pointer in the range of 1 to 100 Designate the position n th position There is an error in the designation of the output head where the data for initialization number pointer is designated Designate the data for initialization Section 3 4 5 number at the designated position n th position Designate a registered data for Modem There is an error in the designation of the output frame CHn initialization number within the range of function number ERR the designated number of outputs from rel the location of the output head pointer There is an error in the designation of the user frame number e Designate the data for initialization in There is an error in the designation of the number of the range of 1 to 78 Section 3 4 3 registered data bytes e Designate 80 for the data for Section 3 4 4 connection 5 F e Recheck the message length of the There is an error in the data for connection Section 3 4 4 message for notification There is an error i
240. cified device or buffer memory into the appropriate position of the send packet before sending the packet For receiving The QJ71C24N R2 R4 automatically stores only the necessary data such as readout values in the user specified device or buffer memory The following is an example System example The QJ71C24N R2 R4 is connected to an inverter and reads the operating mode value from the inverter A packet with the inverter station No set in device DO is sent and an operating mode value is stored in device D100 CPU Device QU71C24N FREQROL A700 G J Do Inverter station No DO Inverter station No Pea al o eroen Forint is set in device DO Operating mode value is stored in device D100 2100 D100 4 perating 2 mode value Header ICPU Device Terminator Operating mode value e With the debugging support function of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function programs for communications between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and external device can be debugged In the Protocol execution log window the protocol name start and end dates and times and result of each execution can be monitored The circuit trace function allows tracing of send receive packet data and the signal line status By the State monitor the error status and signal lines of the QJ71
241. col setting SH 080850ENG method 13JU66 sold separately COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with EMC and Low Voltage Directives THE MANUAL S USE AND STRUCTURE How to use this manual In this manual details of the serial communication modules QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QU71C24 and QJ71C24 R2 are organized as shown below according to their applications Please use this manual using the contents below as a reference To learn about features functions and component parts a To learn about features and functions e Chapter 1 describes the features of the serial communication modules e Chapter 3 describes the common specifications and functions of the serial communication modules b To learn about the packed items and system configured items The section prior to Chapter 1 Product Configura
242. communications error status Switch setting error mode switching error status Number of registered user frame Flash ROM system parameters write result Modem function error code Modem function sequence status Make text file End setup Cancel MELSEC Q Counting the number of parameter settings in Auto refresh setting This one row is counted as one setting Blank rows are not counted Count up all the setting items on this screen and add the total to the number of settings for other intelligent function modules to get a grand total 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Operating environment This section describes the operating environment of the personal computer that runs GX Configurator SC Personal computer Refer to the next page Operating system and performance required for a personal computer 65MB or more Resolution 800 X 600 pixels or higher Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version
243. completion of REMFR r H instruction SET Y1001 iTurns ON the receive read i L ____________ lcompletion signal X1003 l X1004 tt RST 1001 I Turns OFF the receive read aa I completion signal When data reception is executed by the bidirectional protocol the area enclosed by the dotted line shown above must be removed Set the intelligent function module switches as indicated below Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Setting value Switch 1 07COH Switch 2 0007H App 43 App 43 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol The following program example sends data under the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol and to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol 1 Program conditions The following program sends data from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1024 turns ON a Devices used e Transmission COMMANGA cccccceessecesssseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesaes X1024 e Transmission command pulse signal eeeeeeeeeeeeee M10 e Transmission result acquisition command ssssseseseseeeee M11 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INStHUCHON niena E on eae M200 to 202 e Normal abnormal com
244. connection 1CH 2CH Make text file Execute test Close Setting items It Buffer memory address Ref i em eference section Number of connection retries designation i 7 User s Manual Application Data No for callback designation 1 to 10 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 5 Transmission control and others system setting Purpose For data communication with external devices register system setting values for the transmission control method monitoring time and buffer memory assignment Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen CHU Transmission control system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Transmission control system setting Setting screen Baxi r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Setting value OTR DSRI ER DR DC control designation DTR DSR control a DC1 DC3Kon Xoff code desi 1311 b0 b7 DC1 code value HO0 Hff b8 bf DC3 code value HO0 Hff DC2 DC4 code designation b0 b7 DC2 code value HO0 Hff b8 bf DC4 code value HO0 Hff Communication system designation Full duplex fa CD terminal check designation No check X Half duplex communications control designation 0 Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation 0 Priority Others Non priority transmission wait time units 100ms 1412
245. cribed in this section to check whether or not there is any problem in the operation of the Q series C24 In order to avoid problems set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status during the individual station test Test both interfaces of the Q series C24 simultaneously in an individual station loopback test Alternatively either one of the interfaces can be tested in an individual station loopback test In that case ignore the test results on the interface side for which the test is not performed Cable removal and reconnection before and after the individual station loopback test should be performed with the power to the Q series C24 mounting station turned off To restart data communication with an external device after an individual station test check the specifications of the devices used before defining various settings and reconnecting cables For the interface that is not used for communication no cable connection define the switch settings in GX Developer as follows for the setting method see Section 4 5 2 e Communication protocol setting any of OH to 7H or 9H e Transmission settings and communication rate settings all set to OFF If an error occurs even though the correct settings have been made for the Q series C24 through an individual station test please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 4 7 1 ROM RAM switch tests A ROM RAM switch test checks the contents of the memory of the Q series
246. ction mode also connect the cable to both of the interfaces e If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode noise may enter and destroy the data and Data cannot be decoded or Communication error cause may occur 11 51 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 15 Whether the communication error is caused on the Q series C24 or external device is unclear Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined Test the Q series C24 as described below to check where the cause is 1 Check the hardware The Q series C24 must be installed firmly The pins of the Q series C24 must not be bent or otherwise abnormal 2 Test the Q series C24 alone See Section 4 7 e ROM RAM switch test must not generate any errors Self loopback test must not generate any errors 3 Check the state of the programmable controller CPU There must not be any errors that stop programmable controller CPU Whether the operation communications error Note cause is in the Q The following methods are available for series C24 or an testing if normal communications are external device is possible with the Q series C24 alone unclear 1 With one the Q series C24 set CH1 and CH2 to the non procedure protocol and connect the wiring the same as for the self loopback test and transmit data from one channel and receive the transmitted data at the other cha
247. ction 6 1 2 3 When receive data clear processing is completed receive data clear request address A8H becomes 0 The following page shows an example of a program to clear receive data with the FROM TO instruction Create a program that contains the contacts user flags etc indicating the following statuses in the TO instruction e Contacts indicating that the reception data read request X3 XA and reception abnormal detection X4 XB are OFF e Contact indicating that no dedicated instruction OUTPUT PRR INPUT is currently being executed e Contact indicating that reception data clear processing is not currently being performed x1 When the function version A Q series C24 is used resume data communications a further 100 ms after the receive data clear request address A8H 148H changes from a 1 to a 0 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL rt Send request execution disabled Diaa E 2 Dedicated instruction Receive for sending execution data clear processing Q series C24 disabled too Receive data clear request address A81 MELSEC Q 1 Programmable TO instruction controller Write 1 to address A8H CPU Program 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Example The following is an example program for clearing received data with the FROM TO instructions while se
248. ctive action 40004 e If this error occurs during CPRTCL to Error detected by the CPU instruction execution identify the CPU 4FFFu error and correct the CPU device No that is specified in the Non conversion or Conversion variable data storage area 71014 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected C 7o02 foe error 1 7102 some error e Make the watchdog timer timer 1 time Programmable x 7103 eentiollar access e Cannot communicate with the Q series longer O Error C24 CPU e Perform a self loopback test and check if the CPU can communicate 71044 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected A to System error 1 71164 some error e Number of request points exceeds the e Check and correct the external device range for the command transmit message and restart data e A word device was designated in a bit communications 71404 Request data error units command e If no error is found in the device range e The last device No exceeds the range clear the programmable controller CPU os device last No Designated head information and retry Refer to device No pesignaled number of points Section 11 1 7 some error e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e f no error is found in the device name clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 e A device that cannot be designated by x 7142n Device name eror the given co
249. d System area jesas Number of registered protocols 4090m 0 No registration Chapter 8 1 to 128 Number of registrations Protocol registration 0 Not registered 1 Registered The bit corresponding to each protocol No turns on or off Checking protocol setting 16529 to 16536 data 40911 to 4098x Each bit indicates the corresponding protocol No b15 b14 b13 b2 b1 bO Not allowed a 6537 to 16607 to 16624 to Use prohibited System area desio 6606 Protocol Execution log options 40E2H 40F2H execution log 0 Error logs of failed protocol executions are stored RW Allowed Section 8 1 4 specification 1 Execution states and logs of all protocols are stored 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Decimal soe Initial Protocol e i i Reference Hex Application value Registration ection Mc Non Bi Pa 16611 to 16627 to Use prohibited System area 40E3H i 40F3H i Number of stored protocol execution logs 16640 18432 0 No I 41001 48001 N0109 1 to 32 Number of stored logs 7 7 7 Not allowed Section 8 1 4 Protocol execution log write pointer 16641 18433 4101H 4801H OF No log j 1 to 32 Latest protocol execution log No 16642 18434 System area use prohibited Checking eee protocol Protocol No 16643 18435 execution logs 0 No log Section 8 1 4 4103 H 48031 1 to 128 Protocol No Operating Execution
250. d BUFRCVS instruction cannot be used at the same time However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same SPBUSY E a UINI x e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available x1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the INPUT instruction they are not used in the same channel ONDEMAND BIDOUT BIDIN CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the INPUT instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs 10 12 10 12 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error 10 13 MELSEC Q 4 Whether an INPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D2 or status display device at completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the INPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an INPUT instruction END END END Sequence processin
251. d by GX Developer are handled Reads a parameter file Closes the parameter file If any data are modified Open parameters Close parameters Save parameters Delete parameters Exit Online menu Monitor Test Read from PLC Write to PLC c Tool items Flash ROM setting Help items Code table Product information a dialog asking for file saving will appear Saves the parameter file Deletes the parameter file Close this screen Activates the Select monitor test module screen Reads intelligent function module parameters from the CPU module Writes intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module Starts the flash ROM setting screen Displays the ASCII code list Use this list as reference when setting data Displays the version information of the intelligent function module utility 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 Saving intelligent function module parameters in a file Since files cannot be saved using the GX Developer project saving operation save the files using the Select a target intelligent function module screen shown above Reading writing intelligent function module parameters from to a programmable controller using GX Developer a Intelligent function module parameters can be read from and written into a programmable controller after having been saved in a file Set a target programmable controller CPU in GX Develope
252. d execution rest ooo d o o i App 40 App 40 APPENDICES 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E L MOV H1234 vov H5678 n A REMTO J1 Ki K1 HO HOCOO 0 K2 M100 M101 f 4 PLS M101 SET lt Setting of buffer memory head address and data length gt M11 X101E MOV HOCOO NOV K2 Z RENTO JI Ki D2 K2 M102 M103 z f SE M103 z SE lt On demand transmission gt M12 X101E X1000 X1001 1000 E f AF f aa SE RS lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 B SE RS lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 _ se PLS lt Abnormal completion Read of on demand execution result gt M13 X101E z REMFR J1 KI Kl HO H256 D8 Kl M104 M105 7 WF PLS M105 _ H SET lt Abnormal completion Read of LED ON status gt M14 X101E t RH s A REMFR J1 Ki K1 HO H201 Dg K1 M106 M107 f App 41 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 D2 D3 M102 M12 M201 Y1000 M12 M300 Y1000 M301 M13 M104 M14 M202 M106 M203 M204 Y1000 MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Transfers the transmission data to the transmission area address of the buffer memory On demand function designation command Abnormal completion of
253. d protocol execution logs are stored Alllogs The execution status and log of all protocols are stored Setting procedure 1 Select Error logs or All logs for Execution log options 2 Click Close POINT For information on the stored logs refer to Section 8 1 4 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 3 Pre defined protocol monitoring test In the Pre defined protocol monitor test window of GX Configurator SC Intelligent function module utility the pre defined protocol execution status and an error code can be confirmed Confirmation procedure 1 Display the Pre defined protocol monitor test window For information on how to display this window refer to Section 9 6 7 2 The current value of each item can be confirmed Monitor test window CH1 Pre defined protocol monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value X1D Pre defined protocol ready Off Protocol cancellation Not cancelled Execution status Unexecuted Pre defined protocol function error code 0000 Normal Other than 0000 Error Execution log options Error logs Eror logs Number of protocol executions Flash ROM setting Details Write to s fil Current value Monitoring module iddia display Cannot execute test Read from module Load fil
254. data received The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 More than one INPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next INPUT instruction only after the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed When the communication data count is set in word units and if the received data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of received data to the programmable controller CPU the receive data count is processed as follows Receive data count Receive data byte count 2 Fractions following the decimal point are rounded up Also OOH is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive area where receive data is stored 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 6 1 4 Receive data clear MELSEC Q For the data reception by a non procedure protocol if the transmission of data from a transmitting device is interrupted due to trouble occurring it may be necessary for the data received up to the present time are cleared in the receiving device and for the data to be received again from the start The methods for clearing reception data in the Q series C24 are listed below Either method may be used to clear received data as necessary 1 Clear the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET 2 Write to read from the reception data clear request address A8H 148u FROM TO instructi
255. data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed by the programmable controller CPU The completion flag is reset by the external command 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Q series C24 Address Buffer memory 257 Data transmission result For normal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result 00007 Transmission data count designation D2 Transmission data count 0005n 0A0Dn For abnormal completion Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result other than 0000 From buffer memory address 2571 D2 Transmission data count 0005n D117 424 1H to Transmission data to D15 0A0D n 1 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 10 2 More than one BIDOUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDOUT instruction only after the execution of the first BIDOUT instruction is completed 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 4 How to detect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Cause of transmi
256. data clear processing is executed at the OS area of the Q series C24 see Section 6 1 2 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL To MELSEC Q The following is a program example of clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET MovP KO DO Set the execution type MOVP K4 D2 Set the request type Reception data clear ZP CSET UO K1 DO D200 MO Execute the reception data clear nN E M100 Normal completion SET M101 Abnormal completion mov D1 D300 RST M100 Reset the complete flag by external command RST M101 3 Receive data clear procedure using the FROM TO instruction Write and read the receive data clear request address A8 H 148H using the procedure described below When resuming data communications with an external device resume it after completing the reception data clear processing with the Q series C24 Depending on the data communications system it may be necessary to restart data communications with the external device after notifying the external device from the programmable controller CPU that resumption of communications is possible Clear Procedure When the CH1 side interface is used 1 While none of receiving sending and receive data clearing is being performed with the TO instruction 1 is written to Receive data clear request address A8n 2 Receive data clear processing is performed for the Q series C24 s OS area See Se
257. data transmission 8536 8545 8563 8572 8581 8608 Designation of data No for connection 2158H 2161H 2173H 217CH 2185H 21A0nH for conditional transmission and notification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedures required before starting a system that uses the Q series C24 1 When using the Q series C24 please read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual 2 The installation and setup methods of the Q series C24 are the same as those for CPU modules 3 For module installation and setup see the user s manual for the programmable controller CPU used 4 1 Handling Precautions 4 The following explains the precautions for handling the Q series C24 1 Do not drop the module or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Tightening torque range RS 422 485 terminal block terminal screw 0 42 to 0 58 N m M3 screw RS 422 485 plug in connector socket terminal screw for QJ71C24N R4 M2 0 20 to 0 25 N m screw Screw hole depth L 3 2mm or less RS 232 cable connector screw M2 6 screw 0 20 to 0 39 N m Internal length from Module fixing screw normally not required 0 36 to 0 48 N m M3 screw 1
258. designated by the start I O signal and stores it in the device designated by D or later 2 The execution status is stored in D in the form of 1 at the corresponding bit when the processing of each instruction is started and 0 when the processing is completed The processing of each instruction is completed when the completion flag of each instruction is turned from on to off b15 to b6b5b4 b3b2b1 bO D 0 Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of GETE and PUTE instructions Stores the CPRTCL instruction execution status of channel 1 Stores the CPRTCL instruction execution status of channel 2 Osi C 0 vay toes 0 3 The SPBUSY instruction is executed for every scan while the read command is ON if the system is executing during ON And the instruction will be executed for a single scan when the read command rises from OFF to ON if the system is starting up 4 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions It is possible to execute another instruction during execution of the SPBUSY instruction and to execute the SPBUSY instruction during execution of another instruction
259. designation User s Manual ela 0 Format O 1 Format 1 VApplication Communication data monitoring designation 0000H No monitor stopped monitor designation 8216 8472 0001H Monitor start designation 20181 21181 00024 Monitoring Q series C24 is a set 10021 Monitoring stopped Q series C24 is set 100FH Monitor setting error Q series C24 is a set Data optional designation 0 Off 1 On Full stop designation b0 User s Manual Timer 0 errors at occurrence stop designation b2 Allowed Application 8212 2014n 8217 8473 Communication 2019 2119 data monitoring function For system b1 b3 to b15 8218 8474 Monitor buffer head address designation 201An 211An 400H to 1AFDH 2600H to 3FFDH 8219 8475 Monitor buffer size designation onoo 201Bx 211Bx 0003H to 1A00n H User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th i 0 Format 0 1 Format 1 Section 9 4 7 For designation of user frame Allowed a User s Manual receiving method Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th Application 0 or more Exclusive format 1 received data count Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th 0000H No designation Section 9 4 5 For designation Other than 0000 Designated below fis of transparent e Transparent code b0 to b7 RW Allowed i code 00H to FFH Transparent code rake Manual Additional code b8 to b15 Application 01H to
260. e NOR RD Data 4 Digits Data and ERR NAK Response MELSOFT series GX Configurator SC lt Pre defined protocol support function gt Protocol setting 77 BAE File Edit Module read write Tool Debugging support function Window Help o x Deh se 484 Communication gt Send type lt Receive MITSUBISHI FREQROL Series H B RD Operation Mode Sendireceive ree Manufacturer Protocol name Packet name Packet setting gt H7B RD Operation Mode lt 1 NORAD Data 4 Digits Data Variable unset lt 2 ERR NAK Response Variable unset In Data storage area enter the following values Packet name Element No Element name Bate orage Hg specification Inverter Station Number Enter D200 Read Data Enter D201 Inverter Station Number Enter D202 Error Code Enter D203 NOR RD Data 4 Digits Data ERR NAK Response 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q c Writing data to module 1 Select Module read write Write to module Select the following module and click the button Module write Module selection 1 0 address Type 0000 QJ71C24N lt A Close Please save in the protocol setting file pcf because the data to be written to module does not include the following information Non written data manufacturer packet name protocol detailed setting type version explanation packet setting element name 2 The following confirmation message is displ
261. e e With the pre defined protocol function data can be transferred between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and external devices x The details are described in the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function To learn how to check for error occurrences and take corrective actions Chapter 11 describes troubleshooting how to check for errors and detailed explanations of error codes To learn about functions that have been added or changed in function version B e Section 1 3 lists the functions that have been added or changed as well as manuals that provide detailed explanations hereof e Appendix 1 1 provides a breakdown of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC by function version software version The structure of this manual The module s buffer memory stores default values that are used as initial settings to execute the data send receive functions in order to communicate with the external devices Data can be sent to or received from the external devices using these default values However it may be necessary to change the default values depending on system specifications This manual explains how to perform the initial settings in order to use each function of the utility package available for this module GX Configurator SC When changing a default value for sending and receiving data to from an opposite device first see the section describing the applicable function to verify the initial setting item and setti
262. e or malfunction e Attach connectors to the module securely e Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact e Before connecting the cables check the type o f interface to be connected Connecting or erroneous wiring to the wrong interface may cause failure to the module and external devices e Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction e A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Startup Maintenance Precautions A CAUTION e Do not disass
263. e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available x1 The same channel cannot be used for the CPRTCL and CSET instructions because different communication protocols are used for them Using these instructions on the same channel will cause a communication protocol setting error 7FF2n 10 32 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 The status of the CSET instruction whether it is being executed or completed normally abnormally can be checked by the complete device D2 specified by the setting data a Complete device D2 0 This device turns on at the End processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next End processing b Complete device D2 1 It turns on off by the status at which the CSET instruction is completed At normal completion It is kept turned off and does not change e At abnormal completion It turns on at the END processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation at execution of CSET instruction End End End Sequence program Scan processing Scan processing Scan processing CSET instruction Complete device Complete device 1 peceleoie eased Q series C24 i 1 I Error 1 If the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is s
264. e Make text file Stop monitor Pre defined protocol monitor test items X1D Pre defined protocol ready The ON OFF status of X1D can be confirmed Section 8 1 5 Operating Manual The cancel status of the pre defined protocol can be confirmed Protocol cancellation Pre defined protocol support function Execution status The protocol execution status can be confirmed Section 8 1 4 Pre defined protocol function error An error code for the pre defined protocol function can be Senior ties ection 11 2 code confirmed Condition for registering protocol execution logs can be confirmed and specified i Section 8 1 4 Execution log options Operating Manual The specification will take effect when the dedicated ee es instruction CPRTCL is executed verepdenned proiet support function Failed protocol execution logs are stored All logs All protocol execution logs are stored Number of protocol executions The number of protocol executions can be confirmed Section 3 9 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Protocol execution log storage function The protocol execution log storage function allows you to confirm the detailed pre defined protocol execution status and results for each channel Up to 32 protocol execution logs can be checked If the number of the stored logs exceeds 32 the oldest log will be overwritten 1 Checking methods The following two checkin
265. e No designation monitor for Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted O Section 9 6 9 transmission MSRiOHoSC Ones ag he data reception result error occurrence status Eee med Section 9 6 10 etc ERR LED off Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module Section 9 6 11 N d tocol i el i akin at cd Clear the currently received data Section 9 7 data clear 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package For how to install or uninstall the utility package refer to Method of installing the MELSOFT Series included in the utility package 9 2 1 Handling precautions The following explains the precautions on using the utility package 1 For safety Since the utility package is add in software for GX Developer read Safety Precautions and the basic operating procedures in the GX Developer Operating Manual About installation The GX Configurator SC utility package is an add in package for GX Developer Version 4 or later Therefore GX Configurator SC must be installed on the personal computer that has already GX Developer Version 4 or later installed Screen error of Intelligent function module utility Insufficient system resource may cause the screen to be displayed inappropriately while using the Intelligent function module utility If this occurs close the Intelligent function module utility GX Developer program com
266. e Reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection X4 XB ON e Reception data read completion X1 Y8 OFF 2 Change procedure When data reception from an external device causes the reception data read request X3 XA reception abnormal detection X4 XB to turn ON turn ON the reception data read completion Y1 Y8 after performing the following e Read the receive data e Change the setting values for the receive complete code and the received data count Example When reading data received in the CH1 side interface device side ae Programmable Data read request using on Data read request using controller setting value A 1 gt s _ setting value B 2 CPU side Reception data read 1 request X3 X 2 Reads Y receive data Reads i y ive data Reception data read renee Ea 5 completion Y1 Wo addres Adi Sakina value DXF Setting vaes address A4 Setting value A lt f Setting value B Receive complete code designation Ve address A5x Setting value 1 Setting value 2 Program example I O signals for the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F Read request 1 x3 f Reads receive data count Reads the data that is equal to the receive bo 20 1 1 J M Kozo data count H14 KI Change the setting value for the received data count as needed H3 KI Change the setting value for the receive 5 complete code as needed Turns ON the rece
267. e accessed 1 2 Communication using the MC protocol CPU No 1 2 CPU No 2 3 CPU No 3 4 CPU No 4 1 Module used for routing controlled by CPU No 1 1 Q series C24 controlled by CPU No 1 2 Module used for routing controlled 3 4 2 by CPU No 2 The modules used for the routing are CC Link IE Controller Network modules Cc Link IE Controller Network x The QnA compatible 4C frame should be performed for access to non control CPUs when communicating using the MC protocol However the available functions differ depending on the QCPU to be accessed whether it is a control CPU or a non control CPU See the Reference Manual for the available functions and accessible range x A module used for routing can access the following modules when accessing other stations e CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network module Qseries C24 Ethernet interface module If there is a module of function version A among the modules for routing it is possible to access the control CPU of that particular module only In addition it is possible to access other stations via a module controlled by the same control CPU 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 10 Remote password check function Details are explained in the User s Manual Application and the Reference Manual a The remote password check function
268. e allow prohibit setting Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 3 Section 9 4 4 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 6 Section 9 4 7 Section 9 4 8 Section 9 4 9 Section 9 4 10 Section 9 4 11 Section 9 4 12 Section 9 4 13 Section Remarks Can be used via online operation Can be used via offline operation Can be used only via online operation 1 The ASCII codes are listed in Appendix 4 and GX Configurator SC s Help function Use the list as a reference The values set in the respective setting screens explained in Section 9 4 can be written to the Q series C24 module via online operation only or saved to a file Perform the following operations in advance to enable the registration of setting values in the flash ROM a Switch setting using the GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 Set Setting change under Transmission settings to Enable for both the CH1 and CH2 sides b Setting using GX Configurator SC see Section 9 4 13 Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit setting to Allowed When a multiple CPU system is employed GX Configurator SC should be connected to the control CPU of the Q series C24 and the system setting data register in the flash ROM It is not possible to set target PLC to multiple CPU setting of Transfer setup of GX Developer and register the system setting data in the flash ROM 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 1 User frame registration Purpose
269. e clear processing execution gt M10 X101E wov Ki Z RENTO JI K1 K1 HO HOAS D1 K1 SET M100 M101 iF SET s L ES M101 1 f SET lt Read of receive clear status gt M20 M21 X101E H H Z RENFR J1 KI KI HO HOAS DO K1 M102 M103 1H PLS M103 7 SET M22 DO MELSEC Q M15 Changes the receive clear command into pulses M16 Sets the receive clear acceptance flag M10 Receive clear processing execution command D1 Sets the clear request Transfers the setting value to the W100 receive data clear request area of the buffer memory MIT Sets the receive clearing flag N20 Sets the completion check flag W21 Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command 4200 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Reads data of the receive data clear M102 request area of the buffer memory to DO M22 Receive clear processing execution status judgment command W201 Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction W6 Resets the receive clear acceptance flag Resets the receive clearing flag Resets the completion check flag Sets the communication disable flag Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command Timer start Resets the communication disable flag App 47 M16 M7 Wie i i A 1 Outputs the communication enable flag 1 When using the Q series C24 of function version A add the areas enclosed by the dotted
270. e data count is an odd byte OOH is stored in the upper byte of the final data storage position When the unit for the received data count is designated in bytes When data reception is performed using the receive complete code Example When receive arbitrary data area ABCDEFG123 was stored The receive area is the default value Q series C24 CH1 address 6001 Buffer memory Receive data count storage area 6011 6024 OS area 6034 Receive data storage area E ena ete Sta eee sa The receive data is stored in low address L gt H DAG cane See aoe next address L H order in the order in which 57 YT it is received 604H 6051 6064 x1 The OS area of the Q series C24 shown in the above diagram is the memory 8448 bytes that temporarily stores the data to be received while a request for the reading of the receive data is being made to the programmable controller CPU The user cannot read the receive data in the OS area When the sequence program finishes reading the receive data in the buffer memory in response to the read request the receive data in the OS area and any succeeding receive data is stored successively in the receive area of the buffer memory when the next read request is issued Also when the OS area s free space which stores the receive data is reduced to 64 bytes default value or less a request to discontinue data reception from
271. e external device side and the QnACPU self station side 3 The notes during data communication by RS 422 485 interface also apply to the Q series C24 Take measures against data error reception on the external device side see Section 3 3 3 e Operation of RS 422 485 interface on the programmable controller side App 10 App 10 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing systems The following explains the Installation of the Q series C24 on an existing system 1 Installing on a multidrop connection system The Q series C24 can be installed on an existing system to which the programmable controller CPU and external devices are connected as 1 n or m n multidrop connection gt 1 1 This is when a QC24 N or a computer link module such as AJ71UC24 is used as the programmable controller CPU module of the multidrop connection However there are frame restrictions when data communication is performed See the Reference Manual 2 Replacing the QnACPU module with a QCPU The wiring used by the QC24 N can be used as is The functional use is the same except for the functions added by the Q series C24 to the conventional module However with the introduction of high speed QCPUs there may be cases in which communication cannot be performed normally when a programmable controller module in the QnA series is replaced by a Q series programmable controller When a module is changed to a Q series programmab
272. e functional protocol can be executed when Predefined protocol ready X1D is off Refer to Section 10 7 1 This signal turns on only when the communication protocol setting is set to predefined protocol 1 ON OFF timing of Predefined protocol ready X1D After the protocol setting data is written to a flash ROM X1D turns off while checking the written data X1D turns on when the written data are normal Performed by the user Writing protocol setting p Performed by the data to the flash ROM QJ71C24N R2 R4 X Turns ON if the protocol setting data are normal Predefined protocol ready X1D Power ON Check time OFF during check of protocol setting data CH1 or CH2 ERR XE XF OFF 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Timing for executing the UINI instruction or mode switching request signal Y2 Y9 a Timing for executing mode switching request signal Y2 Y9 Communication protocol before change CH1 and CH2 are other than the predefined protocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Mode switching request gt Y2 Y9 Mode switching X6 XD ON Predefined OFF protocol ready X1D CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode CH1 and CH2 are other than predefined protocol mode Communication protocol before change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined p
273. e link status of the remote master station host station and remote I O station other station The following example shows an interlock in the communication program that uses the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station Station No 1 SB47 H KO t TO gt SB47 Baton pass status of host SB49 H KO H qmi Y SB49 Data link status of host Sw70 0 H KO T2 XSW70 Baton pass status of other station SW74 0 H kK 13 3SW74 Data link status of other station SW78 0 H KO t T4 X SW78 Parameter communication status of other station B20 T0 Tl T2 13 T4 7 t Jt p pE 14 wc NO cal SB20 Network module status NO M1 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status More than Sequence scan time x 3 T1 T3 T4 Reason Not to stop the control even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a faulty cable condition or noise interference Also the multipliers of 4 and 3 should only be considered as a guideline 3 REMFR REMTO instruction Perform programming so that the next instruction is executed after the REMFR REMTO instruction is executed and then completed The completion of the REMFR REMTO instruction can be confirmed by the completion device POINT 1 After the execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required before the read write of the actual dat
274. e network parameter other than a station No and restart data communications Communication error set with the network Bidirectional procedure signal C N turned parameters between CPU with the Q up to the communications destination CPU series C24 loaded and communications destination CPU are not set on e Routing parameters e Check the routing parameters and set them e 11 42 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure An error was generated on the Check the error contents from the state CC Link IE Controller Network of SB and SW related to the CC Link IE CC Link IE Field Network Controller Network CC Link IE Field MELSECNETI H Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 with the GX Developer The local station CPU on the monitor etc and perform the checks CC Link IE Controller Network and take the corrective action described CC Link IE Field Network in the CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNETIH CC Link IE Field Network Communication MELSECNET 10 generated an MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 error signal C N error reference manual turned on Module installation address e Change the transmit message designation during designation data communications with intelligent function module is incorrect A command that cannot be Stop the CPU and restart data transmitted during RUN communications Sequence program e Set the Enable disable
275. e operation Monitor screen CHO Pre defined protocol system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Pre defined protocol system setting Setting screen CH1 Pre defined protocol system setting Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Execution log options Error logs Flash ROM setting Details ole Save file module Select input Read from 3 module Load fie Setting range Error logs ll logs Make text file Execute test Setting item it Buffer memory address Ref i em eference section Execution log options 40E2H 40F2H Section 8 1 2 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 10 Programmable controller CPU monitoring system setting Purpose Register system setting values to use the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen CHO Monitoring system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Monitoring system setting Setting screen aici r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Input data No for connection within the following value range HObb8 HObd5 Flash ROM connection data H8001 H801f Buffer memory connection data Th
276. e range of the input for the transmission pointer designation is 1 100 Cycle time units designation min E Cycle time designation 5 PLC CPU monitoring function designation Do not use function X PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation Data ba Constant cycle transmission 0 Transmission pointer designation Dutput count designation it Data No for connection designation 0000 Number of registered word blocks designation 0 erste ae aes er Nl r Flash ROM setting Write to module Read from a ie Load file Details Save file Cannot execute test Make text file 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items Buffer ree eel address i Setting item cm Reference section Cycle time units designation 2040H 2140H Cycle time designation PLC CPU monitoring function designation ete transmission i 2051Hto 2151H to Head device No designation 2052H 2152H Read point designation 2053H 2153H User s Manual Application No 1 block Monitoring condition designation 2054H 2154H Monitoring condition value 2055H 2155H designation Transmission pointer designation 2056H 2156H transmission Output count designation 2057H 2157H Data No for connection 2058H 2158H designation wot P 2059 to 2159 to No 2 to 10 block monitoring device 20A9H 21A9H Transmission pointer designation 20E6H 21E6H Output count designation 20E7H 21E7H Data No for
277. e set for the decimal point position Check the number of digits setting and set the decimal point position so that the number of decimals is less than the number of digits e Change the buffer memory addresses so that they are outside the special applications area e Execute the UINI instruction while the programmable controller CPU information clear is not executed e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Signal Hexa Error Description g name decimal e Number of requested points exceeds Error count error the range for the command e Protocol setting data were written to the Q series C24 that does not support the pre defined protocol communication Protocol setting data write error e A nonexistent device was designated e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated e The head device No is out of range Device error e Aresponse message was not returned within the response monitoring time timer 1 monitoring time Timer 1 time out error 7E46x e The next request was received before a response message was returned for the preceding request Continuous request error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Error during data transmission systemero
278. e set in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function The details are described in Chapter 8 and the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Pre defined protocol support function A function available in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function which includes e Registration of the protocol appropriate to each external device e Writing protocol setting data to or reading them from the flash ROM of the QU71C24N R2 R4 e Debug support function The details are described in Chapter 8 and the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Terms Description One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data QnA compatible 2C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Formats 1 to 4 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA simplified frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in the Reference Manual One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data QnA compatible 3C frame Lens PpS This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 3C frame Fo
279. e that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies VS VIEW Copyright c 2001 ComponentOne LLC VS FlexGrid Pro Copyright
280. e the wiring so that the CD DCD signal is set the CD DCD signal is remains ON all the time or change the setting to Do turned on off repeatedly not check CD terminal When half duplex communications is selected the ON OFF timing of each e Communications are signal is not matched Control the external device so that the ON OFF timing of each signal is matched See User s Manual Application intermittently Requested processing of the established and lost next transmission before the 1 processing of the current transmission is completed Make sure to obtain handshake in the sequence Requested processing of the program next reception before the processing of the current reception is completed Communication via modem Since communication via modem may be disrupted is disrupted due to low line quality or instantaneous interruption create a sequence program for reconnecting the line in case of unexpected line disruption If this symptom occurs frequently reduce the communication speed of the modem and retry the communication The data sent from the Q series C24 are received Disable the echo back in the Echo back back on the RS 422 485 enable disable setting before communication interface CH2 side x1 The following explains how to take corrective actions when a normal exit response message cannot be received upon sending of a command message a When a response message of abnormal end is received 1
281. e to the intelligent function module installed in the MELSECNET H remote I O station during communication using the MC protocol check Enable Write at RUN time on GX Developer 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system When the external device accesses a QCPU in a multiple CPU system or redundant system it is possible to selectively access either a control or non control CPU in the multiple CPU system or a control or standby system CPU or System A or System B CPU in the redundant system by specifying the target QCPU in Requested module I O No of the QnA compatible 4C frame for the MC protocol Refer to the Reference Manual for details Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for the system configuration Example When multiple CPU No 1 is specified T T 2 o Frame ID No Station No Network No Self station No Comman Sub command Device code Head device 4 Sum check code station No Number of device Points BE ee E FRO BO T H LJH LJH L H L H L H L o ojo 4 0 1 0 0o o 1 x 0 0 0 o 4 ojo 0 0 5 3 6 05u 46n 38s 30s 35 30s 37 30n 33 30r 334 45 1 30s 30s 30 30s 30r 30n 34n 30n 31 30H 30 BOs 31 58x 2An BOny 30r BOn 30H 34n y 30r BO 3O 4 3O 35n 33x 36n I Requested module 8 Command massage of the QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 e When using the Q s
282. e transmitted to the external device side which can handle 00H to FFH code data 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 If the receive data portion is normal the Q series C24 takes the codes as is and stores them in the receive data storage area in sequence beginning with the youngest address The storage size is in accordance with the data length in the message See item b above and the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The transmission data portion is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends the transmission data using the existing codes until the transmission data count is reached in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC to the transmission data designation area 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL External device side Q series C24 Example The following shows the sum check code when ABCDEFGHIJ and the numeric value 100 are sent as data when the unit is in bytes Contents of 03274 memory 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 41 1 MELSEC Q d Sum check code The sum check code expresses the numeric value for the lower two bytes 16 bits of the results sum from the addition of the data length and the data portion in the message as binary code data Whe
283. eaceesaeeseaeeseaeeeceeeseeeeeaeeseneeeeeeees 3 3 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications eeeeceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecseeeseneeseaeeseaeeecaeesseaeeeeaeeesueeeseeeeeaes 3 3 3 2 2 RS 232 able specifi ati N neee eea a a a e a nein eaaa eaa Ean 3 6 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications e r reae e e eaa aa e aa Eaa aeaa r aa aaa eaaa aa iea aaea 3 7 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specifiCations ccceccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeteaeeesieeesnneeeaes 3 7 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable Specifications ccsccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaceeseneeseaeeecaeeeeeesseneeteaeeesaeeeenseesans 3 8 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 Circuit eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeees 3 9 3 3 4 Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface 0 eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeetneeteees 3 12 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List 0 0 eeeceeceseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseesieesieesieesieesieesieens 3 14 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List cecccceccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesceeeeneesneeseaeecsaceesaceeseneeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeeneeseaeeseeeess 3 16 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List 0 cc ceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeesieesieesieesieesieeeaees 3 17 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules cccceeeeeeeteeeteeeneeeees 3 19 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU
284. eaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeas 9 25 9 4 6 MC protocol System Setting ecceeeeeeeeneeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeiteaeeeaeesas 9 27 9 4 7 Non procedure system Setting ee eececeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaneeaeeaeeeas 9 28 9 4 8 Bidirectional system Setting eee cee eee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaecaeeeaeeeaeseaeecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseeseeesaeesas 9 29 9 4 9 Pre defined protocol system Setting ceeeceeceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeeseeeaeeeaeeeas 9 30 9 4 10 Programmable controller CPU monitoring system Setting c ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeeeees 9 31 9 4 11 Transmission user frame No designation system Setting ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 9 33 A 12 A 12 9 4 12 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values eeeee 9 34 9 4 13 Flash ROM write allow prohibit Setting 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeas 9 34 9 5 Auto Refresh Setting nieis i eira ea RENAE aR Eaa aE a EEREN Enae Rana iE AREER 9 35 9 6 MONON TES haaa a e e a 9 36 9 671 O SA MONIONIOSE ciate niente A EEE 9 37 9 6 2 Modem function Monitor test cccccececcceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeseneeecaeeesaceesaeeseaeesceeesiseeseaeeesaees 9 38 9 6 3 Transmission control and others MONItOr teSt eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesa
285. ear acknowledgement RST W17 Receive data clear in progress X20 PLS N20 Transmission Transmission request request pulse H20 SET W21 Transmission Transmission request request pulse App 35 App 35 APPENDICES MELSEC Q M21 M16 Hl PJ je fp roy ABCDEFG D1 Transmission Reception request data clear in progress Receive data clear acknowledgement HOAOD D15 OV K1 bo fr KO Di E KB be lt Executes the transmission procession gt G OUTPUT uO bo D11 MO Transmission completion status device be Ks m2 Transmission processing in progress MO M1 aan SET MIOI Transm Transmission Transmission ssion completion completion 44 normal completion Mi Mov DI Dial Transmi ssion completion 1 M102 Transmission abnormal completion M12 Transmission processing in progress M21 Transmission request X21 RST M101 External Transmission command normal completion RST M102 Transmission abnormal completion When a function version A for the Q series C24 is used add the partial circuit with a mark of 1 shown in the program example in Section 6 1 4 3 Communications are possible when M19 is ON App 36 App 36 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 System configuration The system configurati
286. eceeeeeereeees M10 CH1 change command ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeneetneetneeeeees M11 CH1 mode switching completion cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees M12 CH1 receive processing ecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeetneeteeesneeeeees M13 CH1 send processing ssesssesessserssrserernenarneenarnennarneenaeneenaes M14 CH2 change command pulse Signal ccecseeeeeneeees M20 CH2 change command ssessessssresrssrseresnarneenarnennanneenarnnenans M21 CH2 mode switching Completion ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees M22 CH2 receive processing cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeneetneetneeteees M23 CH2 send PrOCeESSiN cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeetieesieetneeeneees M24 REMFR REMTO instruction completion device M100 to 107 REMFR REMTO instruction abnormal completion flag M200 to 205 Switching mode No designation eeeeeeeeeeeeeereereereerens DO D10 Transmission specifications after switching designation D1 D11 Switch setting error and mode switching error status D2 D12 7 Buffer memory settings used in this example Description Set value valle 114 90H 304 130H Switching mode No designation T 0001H 145 91H 305 1311 515 203 LARA Switch setting error and mode switching error status App 59 Operation Evenodd pary Odd Sophi m to b11 Moods Yes aoa Write during specifications eae Prohibit
287. eceived Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined With a multidrop link e Connect the external devices and the Q series two or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test same time Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal data communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously e Data does not match Match the Q series C24 and external device the parity bit setting parity bit settings If the setting of one side is data bit length 7 bits and with parity and the setting of the ezpata doesnot match other side is data length 8 bits and without the parity bit setting parity the number of transmission receive bits will be the same and the data will sent Data that cannot be h and receive without generating an error decoded was recived settings do not match transmission rates e With a multidrop link e Check if the terminal resistor 110 Q or the terminal resistor is 330 Q in case of the Q series C24 is not connected connected to the stations at both ends of the correctly link e When CH1 and CH2 e When using CH1 and CH2 independently are used to the linked check that the Q series C24 is not in the mode there is an linked mode interface without cable e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked conne
288. eceived normally 06H Acknowledge Response code to the opposite side when data could not be received normally Error code is sent immediately after the response code Negative Acknowledge 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 the Q series C24 checks and processes the control code received It cannot be read from the sequence program 2 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The control code to be transmitted is added by the Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Data length This indicates the number of bytes or words for the data portion of the message The unit of data length words bytes is in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks the length of the data received When the reception is normal the Q series C24 stores the receive data in the receive data storage area of the Q series C24 buffer memory assigning the first byte as the lower byte L For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The length of the transmission data is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends this value as is from the lower byte L Data portion This consists of an array of original one byte data to b
289. ecessary sequence programs with initial setting monitoring and testing and data communication processing of the Q series C24 GX Configurator SC is composed of the following utilities e Intelligent function module utility e Protocol FB support function e Pre defined protocol support function 1 Intelligent function utility utility package see this chapter The utility package facilitates the initial settings and monitoring of the Q series C24 by using dedicated screens without having to consider the I O signals or buffer memory The utility package can also be used together with GX Simulator SWnD5L LLT E Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW 5 x Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh A OD0 7IC24 N N Ra Unavailable MYR pee Auto refresh Delete Exit 2 Protocol FB support function The protocol FB support function automatically generates the FB function block for communication that supports data communication processing and traces the network that monitors the data transmitted received on the communication network By using the protocol FB support function producing
290. ect take measures according to Sections 11 3 11 and 11 3 12 e A communication error Confirm the error by the system monitor occurs and remove the cause of the error 11 47 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q When the ERR LED is turned on an error code is stored in the following buffer memory Switch setting error or Mode Switch setting error and mode switching error area address 203h switching error On demand execution error On demand execution result area address 256H 266H Data transmission result area address 257H 267H Data reception error Data reception result area address 258H 268nH Modem function error Modem function error code area address 221 error address 2205H 2305n function error 11 48 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 13 Communication is intermittent Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined With a multidrop link two or Connect the external devices and the Q series C24 in more devices transmitted a 1 1 configuration and perform a communications data at the same time test Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously The signal cable wiring connection is faulty Replace the cable or make the connections firm When Check CD terminal Chang
291. ed after switching Sing S5B0H designation ae Allowed Communication rate setting 9600bps E3 to 14 OFF __Forsystem Transmission specifications poo after switching designation Make setting as set in this area App 59 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Program examples lt Change command gt X1031 M300 _ 1 tt aya SET M300 Jj Sets the changing flag PLS MIO Starts the change processing of CH1 lt Change processing of CH1 gt M10 rere j vov KI DO Sets the switching mode No designation rcv H8580 D1 4 Sets the transmission specifications after switching designation Lr pero a1 KI KI HO Hg0 bo K2 moo J Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area M100 M101 _ J SET Md Sets the CH1 change command M101 E SET M200 J REMTO instruction abnormally completed M11 M13 M14 X1003 X1004 A 3 r g F r g fF 4 SET Y1002 J Sets the CH1 mode switching request RST M11 X10068 i RST Y1002 J Resets the CH1 mode switching request X1O0E d PLS M2 J CH1 mode switching completed M12 d Z REMFR JI KI KI HO H203 D2 KI M102 J Transfers the mode switching error status M102 M103 r H E D2 KO FPLS M20 Starts the change processing of CH2 D2 KO RST we00 O SET M201 J Reexamines the modifications M103 7 d 1
292. ed designation 0 No designation Other than 0 Number of data bytes registered maximum 80 bytes User frame 0 No designation Other than 0 Registered data maximum 80 bytes Modem connection channel designation 0 Non 1 CH1 2 CH2 Notification execution designation Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 12 Section 9 4 13 Not allowed 0 Do not execute 1 Execute Number of connection retries designation 1 to 5 Number of retries j ey Connection retry interval designation 90 to 300 Connection retry interval unit s 3 180 Initialization connection timeout designation 1 to 60 Timeout unit s Number of initialization retries designation 1 to 5 Number of retries For Data No for initialization designation designation O4 Send initialization data designated by the of modem designated area of the user frame for function 1 transmission 7DOH to 801FH Data No for initialization Data No for connection designation OH No designation BB8 to 801FH Data No for connection GX Developer connection designation 0 Do not connect 1 Connect No communication interval time designation 0 Wait infinitely 1 to 120 No communication interval Waiting time for line disconnection unit min RS CS control yes no designation 0 No control 1 Controlled Section 9 4 2 Section 9 4 3 Allowed Section 9 4 4 User s Manual Application 1 57 to 127 Use Syslemaiea 39H to 7FH prohibited 3 S
293. ed protocol support function GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Opposite devices external devices A generic term for computers indicators measuring instruments ID modules bar code readers regulators other serial communication modules UC24 etc that are connected to this serial communication module for data communication The abbreviation for G OUTPUT or GP OUTPUT The abbreviation for G PRR or GP PRR The abbreviation for G PUTE or GP PUTE Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual RS 232 interface The abbreviation for interface conforming to RS 232 RS 422 485 interface The abbreviation for interface conforming to RS 422 and RS 485 SPBUSY Special function modules The abbreviation for G SPBUSY or GP SPBUSY A generic term for the A QnA series programmable controller modules that are operated by commands from the programmable controller CPU equivalent to the Q series programmable controller intelligent function modules Examples e CC Link interface module A D and D A conversion modules e High speed counter module e Ethernet interface module Computer link module and serial communication module A generic term for intelligent function module switch setting The abbreviation for ZP UINI User s Manual A
294. ed using the FROM instruction in the main program The following describes the I O signals A program example is shown on the following page x1 For details on the data reception using interrupt programs see the User s Manual Application DS eee 1 0 signal a that turns ON OFF z ignali name imin CH1 side CH2 side J cpu Q series C24 g Reception data read request Reception data read request 0 __d Only when normal Reception ENEN Reception abnormal detection A Ey Only when abnormal When the reception abnormal detection X4 XB turns ON read the error code from the buffer memory below and then check the type of error and take corrective action based on the information found in Chapter 11 e Data reception result addresses 258H 268h 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Setting values that can be changed Of the initial settings from GX Configurator SC stored in the buffer memory only the following setting values can be changed after data communication has started e Received data count designation addresses A4H 144n e Receive complete code designation addresses A5H 145H 3 Timing and procedure for changing the setting values 1 Timing of change To change the receive complete code and received data count after data communication has started change the setting when the status of the I O signals relating to the reading of receive data is as follows
295. eeeeeeaeesas 7 22 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications 7 24 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUL cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeaeenas 7 24 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUP s sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 25 7 4 Data Communications Precautions ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesieeseeeseesieeseeseeseeseeseesieesieesieeteesiress 7 27 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL 8 1 to 8 21 81 Function of the Pre Defined Protocol cecceecceeceseeeeeeeseeeseeesneesieeseesieesieesaeesieeseesieesieesieesiesieeseess 8 3 8 1 1 Data communication procedure era enaa a A a a a a ea a aa aada 8 3 8 1 2 Pre defined protocol system Setting eeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseeeaeeereeinenaeeeas 8 5 8 1 3 Pre defined protocol MoOnitor test cccccceeecesececeeceeeeeeceeceneeceaeeseaeeeseceesaeeseaeesceeeeaeeeseaeessaees 8 6 8 1 4 Protocol execution log storage function ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeetaeeeaeeseesaeeseeeeeaeeas 8 7 8 1 5 Executing Condition of Predefined Protocol Communication c cecceceeeeeeeeeeetteetieetteeeinees 8 8 86 Programming Exam plevasciticih iki hati dh a neh eel deed cee eee 8 13 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 1 to 9 56 9 1 Functions Available with Utility Package oo ee eeeceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee
296. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeseeeteeteeaeesas 6 30 6 3 Data Communications Precautions piceo e nie EE REE EARE E AERE R 6 32 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7 1 to 7 28 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device cccccceeecceeeceeeeceeeeneeeceeeeeaeeeeaceesaeeseaeessaeeesaeeeeineeneeetans 7 2 7 1 1 Receiving Methods oo cecceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesneeseeeeecsecensecuseeusecnaeeuaseseenaeeeeeneeeeeeeaeenteseeeeseeteeeees 7 2 7 1 2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeteeeee T 4 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeneeeeaeeeseeeseaeeseaeessaeetsieeeeeee 7 10 7 1 4 How to detect reception errors ccccccceccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseaeeseaeeecaeeesaceeseaeeseaeessaeessaneeseaeeseaees 7 13 FRO REcove data Goa iee E E E EER tes ueeendee 7 14 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device 0 2 ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeseesieesieetieesesieesieess 7 15 7 2 1 Transmission MetNodS oansnien erani i re ai 7 15 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data 0 068 7 16 7 2 3 Sequence program for data tranSMISSION cccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneeeeaeeecaeeeeaeeeseaeessaees 7 19 7 2 4 How to detect transmission errors ccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeee
297. eeeeeeeeenreeeteees D8 to D12 e Data transmission reSult ccccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeseaees D20 b Intelligent function module switch oe Refer to Section 4 5 2 it Setting Switch No o Position Designated value value Operation setting reen _ bits eo a w o 07C24 ISumcheckcode No it ung RUN Erama b8 to b15 19200bps App 48 App 48 APPENDICES MELSEC Q c Buffer memory settings used in this example ee ee a Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation Byte units units 162 A2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 04001 Transmission buffer memory length designation 183 B7H 184 B8H Output head pointer designation 185 186 B9H Output count designation 187 BBH Second output frame No designation 188 BCH Third output frame No designation Fourth output frame No designation Fifth output f frame No designation euo For egsaton eston data prie cuntdesgnaten 2 6930B0 No 80014 o First output frame No designation 03F3H App 49 App 49 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Program example The user frames No 3F2H 3F3H 41BH and 8001H are assumed to have been registered in advance lt Transmission command gt A1026 X1000 AIDO Y1000 ai H It PLS M10 Changes the transmission command into pulses lt Setting of transmission data gt Mio XIOIE Sets the transmission data coun
298. eeeeees 11 46 Checking the function version 008 2 16 Checking the LED ON status communications error status 0 06 11 1 Checking the software version GX Configurator SC eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 20 Communication protocol setting 4 17 Communication rate cccceeeeeeeeees 4 17 Communication support tool App 25 Communication SySteM ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Computer link module 06 App 12 Connecting the RS 232 interface 4 6 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface 4 8 Comparison of the function App 1 CPRICK igen aia e onal aie 10 21 CSET Receive data clear 6 15 10 31 Data Bite tee eel aE eel tied 4 15 Data communication functions 2 6 Data format cc ceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeneeees 3 1 Data reception by receive complete code 6 3 Dedicated instruction list 0ceee 10 1 Dedicated instructions eeeee 10 1 Echo b ck ics aea retata 3 12 ERR LED usanii a EA 11 6 Error code table cccccceseeeeeeeeees 11 18 External dimensions c0e App 20 Index 1 F Full duplex communications 00 7 24 Functions available with utility package 9 3 G GX Configurator SC 0 A 21 2 3 9 1 GX Configurator SC function list 3 17 GX Developer cccccccccscceessseeeessees A
299. eeeeees M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSTRUCTION arnasia ana a a a a A Ra sees A A M200 to 202 e Delete instruction c cccccccccssecccssseeeeessseeeeesseeeeessseeeeessaes DO s Frame Noy jaciahndsaicacina nai anlnddnieihl anaa D1 Delete result cc i cccccccccsseccsessseeessseeeesssseeeessseeeessseeesessaes D2 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings assume that the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9 is deleted Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value Register read delete instructions 2 2H For flash ROM 3 3H ae Frame No direction 03E8H access 4 4H Registration read delete result storage Ee App 57 App 57 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Program examples lt Delete command gt X1030 PLS M10 F Changes the delete command into pulses lt Setting of delete instruction gt M10 M11 X101E HOV K3 DO Sets the delete instruction HOV H3E8 DI Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the IZ RENTO JI KI KI HO H2 DO K2 M100 flash ROM access area of the buffer memory M100 M101 SET M11 Sets the delete flag M101 S E M200 J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction lt Flash ROM write request gt M11 X1018 SET y1018 Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal X1018 P_ i s M2 bot Delete result acquisition
300. eens 9 41 9 64 MC protocol MOntOr nads e a e a a a ee 9 43 9 6 5 Non procedure MONOT OS a a a a 9 45 9 6 6 Bidirectional MONItOr 22 25 2k ee tial a ween lide ni waite tas athe A 9 47 9 6 7 Pre defined protocol Monitor test ccccccecceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeecaeeeeeceeseaeeecaeeseeeeeanetseaeessaees 9 48 9 6 8 PLC CPU monitoring MOnitor ee ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeseesaeeseesieesieesieesieesieesieesieeneeeteess 9 49 9 6 9 Transmission user frame No designation MONItOL ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseesieeseetieetieeteess 9 51 9 6 10 Monitor test others sisii aan iaaa aaae aaea Paaran oai aaaea aandaa 9 52 9 6 11 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization 2 02 9 54 9 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear eececccecceeceeeeeeneeeeeeseeesieeseeesieeseesieesieesieetieesieesieeneess 9 56 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices ccccccceecceeeceeeeceeteeeeteaeeeeaeeesneeteaeeeseeseaes 10 1 102 7G P ONDEMAND teea ee E E 10 3 10 3 G P QUT PUT a rennan eee We i ee el ee ee Oe ee eed de ieee aat 10 7 10 4 GINPUT inden wade eee ee el a i el ti 10 11 10 5 G P BIDOUT sa vaste craton datecreden dete ea end date nade denen ed ate a deterred 10 15 10 6 G P BIDIN sce eed ivi eae dete eee det eee eal 10 18 10 lt sG P GPRU CE riaan TEATAR ETE ERTIES 10 21 10 7 1Functional protocol ssa aaa a a a a
301. eive data storage area D200 to D203 that is set to the receive packet 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e Checking protocol execution result 1 Select Debugging support function Protocol execution log On the Protocol execution log screen the execution result of the protocol can be checked Protocol execution log Object module 140 Address 00 Type QJ71C24N Channel CH2 Execution Error Protocol No Starttime and date End time and date Model No Protocolname Type resuit code EE 2009 06 05 10 224 FREOROL Serie 1 H7B RD Opera Send rece Save CSV file The registration conditions of the logs can be specified in Protocol execution log specification buffer memory address 40E2nH 40F2n and can be set on the intelligent function module utility The following are registration conditions O bit is off 0 Error logs of failed protocol executions are stored 0 bit is on 1 Execution states and logs of all protocols are stored In the default setting only error logs of failed protocol executions are displayed To display all the protocol logs the setting is required on the intelligent function module utility before executing RUN in the step 3 d in this section For details refer to Section 8 1 2 8 1 4 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC GX Configurator SC is a tool that supports the production of n
302. elete result Station No Switch setting Station No Instruction setting 201H C N status NAK status ACK status NEU LED status 2024 Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off Ooo NEU LED status ERR LED status Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off CH1 Communication protocol setting No error CH1 Transmission speed setting error 203H CH1 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time CH2 Communication protocol setting No error CH2 Transmission speed setting error 203H CH2 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time Set station No out of range error 2024 Chapter 11 NEU LED status ooo ERR LED status ooo O 203H Linked operation setting error 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 11 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization This section explains how to turn off the display LEDs of the Q series C24 and initialize its communication error information and error codes 1 CHO ERR clear request on Monitor Test screen This is used to turn off the CHO ERR LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the error codes stored in the CHO side buffer memory Refer to Section 11 1 2 1 for the buffer memory where the error codes are stored Operation procedure iix Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module m
303. els programmable controller Pore nates i CSET ae monitoring X Application instructions CPU monitoring h function Sets the unit for the number of communication data setting instruction words bytes and the data communication area e e e aE instruction and host station No of the Q series C24 x Abbreviations used in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List Auto refresh setting User frame The following table lists the utility package function for the Q series C24 O Protocol for which ee is valid Refresh the Q series C24 s error codes and set devices on the programmable controller CPU side Register the user frame in the flash ROM Section 9 4 1 Data for modem initialization Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM ae Section 9 4 3 Modem function system setting CHn Transmission control and others system setting CHn MC protocol system setting CHn Non procedure system setting CHnh Bidirectional system setting CHn Pre defined protocol system monitoring system setting CHn Transmission user frame No designation system setting System setting default System setting write Flash ROM write allow pro hibit designation X Y monitor test Modem function monitor test CHn T
304. emble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction e After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction e Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Operation Precautions A CAUTION e When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safe
305. eption errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred because of noise ee A timeout occurred for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 User s Manual Application Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Received the data length that was too long to store in the receiving area Section 7 1 2 Simultaneous transmissions occurred Section 7 3 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting the occurrence of a reception error 1 ERR occurrence is on 2 The receive error code is confirmed and read in data reception result address 258H 268n For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the Communication error clear request and to turn LED off address OH 1h 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BI
306. equest Clear x i request E Turns ON the interlock signal for LSET M100 communication stop during clear command i processing M100 UO H G128 HO RST M100 J After completing clear processing turns OFF the interlock signal for communication W100 Pinte ar eee ma E acai gt stop 1 i 2 Q Data communication processing il Interlock signal for communication stop 1 x1 Create a program in which data communication processing will not be performed while the interlock signal for communication stop M100 is ON 5 Precautions a Execute the programmable controller CPU information clear after communication with the external device is stopped And do not perform communication with the external device during the programmable controller CPU information clear processing If any data are received from the external device during the clear processing the data will be discarded b When a modem is connected cut off the line linked with the external device before executing the programmable controller CPU information clear The line is cut off at execution of the programmable controller CPU information clear c Do not execute the UINI instruction during the programmable controller CPU information clear If the programmable controller CPU information clear is attempted during execution of the UINI instruction the clear processing will be executed after completion of the UINI instruction 11 17 11 17 11
307. er access to the QCPU from the GX Developer is made possible through line reconnection from the Q series C24 callback Transmission costs after line connection from the Q series C24 side are borne by the Q series C24 side User s Manual Application 1 GX Developer cannot be connected to CH2 on the QJ71C24N and the QJ71C24N R4 2 GX Developer cannot be connected to CH2 on the QU71C24 1 OVERVIEW Function Remote password check Outline of function This function allows data communication after the external device completes the unlock processing of the remote password set ata QCPU It is executed when the QCPU is accessed from a remote location using the modem function of the Q series C24 in the following forms of data communication Communication using the MC protocol Communication using GX Developer Supported module MELSEC Q QU71024N QU71024 R2 R4 R2 Supported protocol Non procedure Bi directional Reference Pre section defined User s Manual Application Reference Manual Addition of non reception monitoring time format in non procedure protocol This function allows messages to be received in the non reception protocol by time out in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and received data count have been not determined User s Manual Application Transmission control start end free area desig
308. er CPU Use it as an interlock signal for a sequence program Restart the programmable controller CPU when the watchdog timer error is turned on reset the power and the CPU module x6 QJ71C24N R4 cannot be used Related to modem function signal e X10 to X16 For system e Y10 to Y16 Use prohibited x7 Pre defined protocol ready X1D is a signal that turns on when pre defined protocol communication becomes ready IMPORTANT 1 Of the input output signals to the programmable controller CPU the signals marked with Use prohibited must not be output ON x3 4 5 If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the programmable controller system may malfunction 2 When the modem function is not used or the QJ71C24N R4 is used X10 to X16 are used for the system and Y10 to Y16 cannot be used 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 The input output signals shown in this section are the signals used when a QnA series serial communication module program is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in Appendix In the QCPU the on off of input output signals to intelligent function modules is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to turn the signals on off by the sequence program except for the input output signals shown in the programming of each function reference page When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is also utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to repla
309. er instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction 1 simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same 2 occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later O Available X Not available 1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the BIDOUT instruction they are not used in the same channel ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR INPUT CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the BIDOUT instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2x occurs 3 Whether a BIDOUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BIDOUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change e Abnormal completi
310. er reer mer rereerre err ae 10 7 PIS foregone aaa ai eine 11 43 Parity Dity i a hese eae eae 4 15 Part names and functions e1ee 4 3 PRO cclidcccdeudieliel tered n EROR 11 44 Pre defined protocol c ccceeceeeees 8 1 OD LED i pee a 11 39 Data communication procedure 8 3 Protocol cancellation ceceeee 8 6 Number of protocol executions 8 6 Pre defined protocol monitor test 8 6 Execution log options 0 0 eee 8 7 Protocol execution log storage function 8 7 Processing time ccceeeeeeeeeeees App 16 QnAVA series module e0e App 8 EE T A etes tea else terete 11 11 Reading the RS 232 control signal status Ree eee eer eee te ere eerste errr 11 10 Reading the switch setting status 11 12 Receive area bidirectional 0 eee 7 4 Receive area non procedure 0 0 6 6 Receive complete code setting 6 22 Receive data bidirectional 7 6 Receive data non procedure s 6 8 Receive data clear bidirectional 7 14 Receive data clear non procedure 6 15 Received data count 6 22 Receiving methods bidirectional 7 2 Receiving methods non procedure 6 2 ROM RAM switch tests cece 4 26 RS 232 interface specification 0 3 3 RS 422 485 interface specification 3 7 RUN LED inniinn ienas 11 3
311. er switches refer to Section 4 5 x4 Recommended cables SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P are equivalent in the electrical characteristics but partially different in the outside diameter internal wire colors etc 5 See Section 3 2 1 3 for the recommended connector x6 Pre defined protocol communication is available for the QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 and QJ71C24N R4 3 2 3 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification The following shows the RS 232 interface specifications 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications The following shows the specifications of the RS 232 connector that connects the Q series C24 to an external device Pin No Abbreviation Signal name Direction C24 gt External device 1 CD DCD Data carrier detect t 2 RD RXD Received data lt lt 3 SD TXD __ Transmitted data gt 4 ER DTR Data terminal ready gt 5 SG Signal ground e gt 6 DR DSR Data set ready tM__ 7 RS RTS Request to send 8 CS CTS Clear to send 9 CI RI Ring indicator t H 1 The control signals are described below The pin numbers of the connector are enclosed in parentheses 1 CD DCD signal 1 The Q series C24 operates according to the setting CD terminal check see Section 9 4 5 of the Q series C24 Po CD terminal check enabled CD terminal check disabled The Q series C24 performs send and receive The Q s
312. erence Signal description section Device number CH1 Global signal ON Output instructed Reference Use prohibited System setting default request Section 9 4 12 ON Requesting Use prohibited CH2 Global signal ON Output instructed XIC System setting default completion ON Completed X1D_ 7 Pre defined protocol ready ON Ready X1E 4 Q series C24 ready ON Accessible Watchdog timer error WDT error XIF 5 Section 9 4 12 Section 8 1 5 ON Module error occurred OFF Module being normally operated 1 The device does not turn on off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used x2 The device does turn on off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used from ON to OFF Data read completed The mode switching X6 XD turns ON when the following function is executed e Mode switching transmission sequence initialization reception data clear by buffer memory user frame use enable disable designation UINI instruction programmable controller CPU information clear While the mode switching X6 XD is ON do not issue a communication request to the target interface The communication processing of the Q series C24 is stopped while the mode switching X6 XD is ON The Q series C24 ready indicates whether or not it is possible to access the Q series C24 from the programmable controll
313. eries or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test Since data is same time transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible interlock the devices so that cannot transmit simultaneously Communication error signal SIO turned on 11 45 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 12 Communication error CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR Symptom There is an error in the communication protocol or transmission setting There is an error in the on line mode switching designation On demand execution generated an error The Q series C24 Corrective action Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and change the switch setting to the correct setting Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and correct the designation contents Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and correct the designation contents Read the error code from the buffer memory Bidirectional MELSEC Q Non procedure detected an error while and take the corrective action corresponding transmitting data to the error contents The Q series C24 detected an error while Read the error code from the buffer memory and take the corrective action corresponding ERR LED turned _receiving data on When the ERR
314. eries C24 in a multiple CPU system it is necessary to specify the QCPU that controls the Q series C24 hereinafter referred to as the control CPU using GX Developer It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A in a multiple CPU system In this case it is only possible to access the control CPU CPU No 1 It is only possible to access the control CPU if data is communicated by means of frames other than the QnA compatible 4C frame When the Q series C24 is mounted on the extension base unit of the redundant system the access target control system CPU or standby system CPU and system A CPU or system B CPU that can be specified varies depending on each command For details refer to QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password function This section explains an overview of the remote password function when a remote password is set for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU See the User s Manual Application for a detailed explanation 1 Checking remote passwords If the following items are set to the QCPU using GX Developer the Q series C24 performs a remote password check whenever an external device accesses the programmable controller using the modem function of the Q series C24 a Setting using GX Developer When the remote password is set on the QCPU with the Q series C24 When the Q
315. eries C24 performs send and receive processing when the CD DCD signal processing regardless of the ON OFF status Full duplex receive carrier detection is ON of the CD DCD signal communication If the CD DCD signal is turned off during e Data communications is possible with an data communication the Q series C24 external device that cannot turn the initializes the transmission sequence CD DCD signal ON OFF Half duplex ee a a See User s Manual Application Setting impossible communication 2 RD RXD signal This is a signal to receive data 3 SD TXD signal This is a signal to send data 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 ER DTR signal 4 e When communicating data using the non procedure protocol the Q series C24 turns on or off on when data is receivable depending on the amount of unused memory in the OS area allocated for receive data storage if DTR DSR control is being performed Read the receive data from the sequence program as the receive data is stored in the OS area when the ER DTR signal is OFF If DTR DSR control is not implemented the ER DTR signal is always ON If an MC protocol or bidirectional protocol is performing data communication the Q series C24 turns ON when communications is enabled 5 DR DSR signal 6 During DTR DSR control if this signal is OFF the Q series C24 does not send data to the external device Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device i
316. ersion X Not usable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Checking serial number and function version The serial number and function version of the Q series C24 can be checked on the rating plate front of the module or system monitor window in GX Developer a Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the Q series C24 MELSEC G MITSU MODEL SERIAL B a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Serial No first 5 digits Function version Relevant regulation standards b Checking on the front of the module The serial number and function version on the rating plate is printed on the front at the bottom of the module The following Q series C24 is not included e QJ71C24 or QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N eo 100119000000000 6 l oa ee Cein No 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Checking on the System Monitor screen Product Information List To display the system monitor select Diagnostics System monitor gt Product Inf List button of GX Developer Function version Serial No Production number Product Information List x Product No QOSUDCPU 3 090421091210001 B 0 0 Intelli Q QJ71C24 R2 32pt 0000 090430000000000 B 0 1 7 None r
317. ersion enable disable Transparent code setting User frame setting See the relevant section for a description of operation according to the set contents and setting of each item e Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time out error e The Q series C24 data Note communications ATN e Error detection by the watchdog timer timer 0 to timer 2 monitoring time is set to Infinite wait or the monitoring time is too long is possible in the following cases When part of a message is skipped e When transmission from an external device is interrupted See User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time 11 40 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 6 The CPRTCL instruction execution is not completed although the RD LED blinked Symptom e When the CPRTCL instruction was executed for the protocol with Communication type set to Receive only or Send and receive RD blinked but the instruction execution was not completed 11 41 Incorrect protocol No is specified in the control data The CD terminal is OFF when CD terminal check enabled is set The user edited protocol setting in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function is inconsistent with the packet format of the external device The Q series C24 has not received
318. es 167 A7H 327 147H x For more details on the registration operation by GX Configurator SC see the explanation of the system settings of the corresponding protocol in Sections 9 4 5 to 9 4 8 For more details on the CSET instruction see the User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Protocol Ref nitia eference Decimal Hex Application Name yale Registration Section mc Non Bi Pa 6to 45 6H to 2DH 4 4 4 4 6 7 8 9 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off 0 ON No initialization request 1 OFF Initialization requested SD WAIT b0 CIN b4 SIO b1 NAK b5 PRO b2 ACK b6 For LED P S b3 NEU b7 and For system b8 to b15 Section 9 6 11 communi Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off Not allowed Section 11 1 1 cation error 0 ON No initialization request Section 11 1 2 clear 1 OFF Initialization requested SD WAIT b0 NAK b5 SIO b1 ACK b6 PRO b2 NEU b7 P S b3 CH2 ERR b14 CIN b4 CH1 ERR b15 For system b8 to b13 Register read delete instructions 0 No request 1 Register request 2 Read request 3 Delete request Frame No direction 0 No designation Other than 0 Frame No Registration read delete result storage For flash j Other than 0 Abnormal 0 Normal completion completion Number of data bytes register
319. es C24 s error codes and set devices on Section 4 6 ae programmable controller CPU side lUserframe SY frame Register the user frame in the flash ROM lol o ction Section 9 4 1 4 1 Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM o o f f pseonost Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM bol o o Section 9 4 3 Register the system setting values for model function in the Moden function system setting g a 7 O O Section 9 4 4 flash ROM Chin Transmission Control Set the transmission specifications with the other device DTR DSR control DC code control communication O Section 9 4 5 and others system setting method data communication monitoring timer value etc CHn MC protocol system Assign the buffer memory for on demand function set the i ction 9 4 6 Jonline setting user frame number etc Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol and change the setting values etc CHn Non procedure system setting Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the bidirectional protocol and change the setting values etc CHn Pre defined protocol Change the set value for data communication using the i O Section 9 4 9 system setting pre defined protocol CHn PLC CPU __ Set the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Section 9 4 10 monitoring system
320. es the data received via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices 2 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the BIDIN instruction or executing the BIDIN instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution CSET Pee OMe e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same BIDIN instruction and BUFRCVS instruction cannot be used at the same time However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same Ps e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later uw PUTE GETE O Available X Not available x1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the BIDIN instruction they are not used in the same channel e ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR INPUT CPRTC
321. eseeseesaeesaeeseeseesieesieesieesienieesinees 9 3 9 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package eee eeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeesaeeteetaeesaeeseesieetieetietieetieens 9 4 9 2 1 Handling preCautions ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneseaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaseaeeeeeeaeeeas 9 4 9 2 2 Operating Sivretta e E R EE E I E ERA R ER 9 7 9 3 Utility Package OPN AUN nea A A A RO 9 9 93 1 Opera OVO O a a aide at addenda als at ei 9 9 9 3 2 Starting the Intelligent function module utility oe eee eeee cent eeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaneas 9 13 9 3 3 Common utility package OPerAatiONS 0 0 ee eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeseeeaeeeaeeeas 9 16 9 4 System Registration to Flash ROM ccecceeceseceeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeseesieesieeseeseesieesieesieesieeteesieess 9 19 9 4 1 User frame registration 2 2 c0 di ide deeded indienne ddd tdenee denen deinded eee dine 9 21 9 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeas 9 22 9 4 3 Data for modem connection registration ccceecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeereeaeeas 9 23 9 4 4 Modem function system setting registration ee eeceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 9 24 9 4 5 Transmission control and others system setting cece eeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaee
322. essing by the user external device after the startup of the Q series C24 The ERR occurrence XE XF and the ERR LED turn on if remote password disagreements occur more than the number of times designated by this value the line is not disconnected x The user can clear the cumulative value counted by the Q series C24 at an occurrence of remote password disagreement using either one of the methods below e Set the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing to 0 in the modem function monitor test screen of GX Configurator SC e Write 0 to the storage area corresponding to the Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion processing address 8956 22FCu 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Modem function monitor test by GX Configurator SC It is possible to monitor the setting values for the remote password and the number of occurrences up to the present such as the designation of the number of times before notifying an unmatched remote password and the current number of occurrences It is possible to set each monitor value to 0 Monitored items in the modem function monitor test screen Buffer memory address Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200CH Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 200DH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 8955 22FBH
323. essing processing processing processing program i T A Execution of UINI i i UINI i i instruction ON Completion OFF f i ao e device ON_When failed Completion OFF i status When completed indication i f i i device i i P ion Mode switching OFF signal X6 XD ON l i ON Predefined CH1 or CH2 is in aw protocol i ready X1D predefined protocol mode i CH1 and CH2 are not in predefined protocol mode 4 Setting processing Communication not possible QJ71C24N R2 R4 i i i i i gt 4 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 6 Programming Example This section describes the programming example and the setting example of the predefined protocol function For the setting example the pre defined protocol support function of GX Developer and GX Configurator SC is used Serial communication module QJ71C24N and Mitsubishi inverter FREQROL A700 described as inverter or FR A700 hereafter as a connection target device are used in this setting example 1 System configuration wiring example The system configuration and wiring example are as follows a System configuration example The QJ71C24N to be used should be mounted on the slot 0 on the base unit and connected to the external device on a one on one basis using CH2 via RS 422 485 line For details of the system configuration refer to Chapter 2 8 DATA C
324. et port QCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDVCPU a Fee Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU lacpustation ss sd station The abbreviation for the programmable controller with QCPU installed QnACPU A generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Cc eo Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU QQnacru o A generic term for QCPU and QnACPU A generic term for AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C024 R2 A1SJ71C024 R4 A1SJ71024 PRF A2CCPUC24 and A2ZCCPUC24 PRF A series computer link modules UC24 Computer link module A generic term for the module below AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 Serial communication module QnA series AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N1 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 Q series QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QU71024 R2 A generic term for the C Controller modules QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V C Controller module Q24DHCCPU V and Q24DHCCPU LS Other generic terms and abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the data communication devices for the serial communication module The names model names are provided when it is necessary to explicitly identify the model being discussed The abbreviation for G BIDIN or GP BIDIN The abbreviation for G BIDOUT or GP BIDOUT A generic term for memory of the intelligent f
325. evice and CPU module in case of a communication failure Design Precautions A WARNING e Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system A CAUTION e Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise e When using the module while values such as buffer memory set values are registered in the Flash ROM do not turn off the power supply for the module loading station nor reset the programmable controller CPU If the power supply for the module loading station is turned off or the programmable controller CPU is reset while any values are registered the data contents in the Flash ROM become inconsistent and as a result the values must be set again in the buffer memory etc and reregistered to the Flash ROM Also this may cause failure and malfunction of the module Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction
326. ex Application Name sali Registration section MC Non Bi Pa Switch setting error and mode switching error status 0 No error Other than 0 Switch setting error and mode switching error CH1 Communication protocol setting No b0 0 Normal 1 Error CH1 Communication rate setting b1 0 Normal Error For confirmation CH1 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b3 l gt 0 Normal Error Section 4 3 of switch setting oo CH2 Communication protocol setting No b4 Not allowed Section 4 5 2 and mode na 0 Normal Error Section 9 6 10 switching oi n CH2 Communication rate setting b5 0 Normal Error CH2 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b7 0 Normal Error Setting station No b14 0 Normal Error Linked operation setting b15 0 Normal 1 Error Number of registered user frames 0 No registration 1 to 200 Number of registered frames User frame registration status for confirmation of registration No 0 No registration 1 Registered Section 9 6 10 ISH Bit correspondi istrati i 2051 to 21Dx For confirmation ponding to registration No is O OFF 1 ON 3 of user fame Registration No 3E8H 1000 Address 205x b0 to Not allowed Registration No 4AFH 1199 Address 211H b7 Section 9 6 10 a Number of registered default registration frames for system 21Ex User s Manual 2 0 Depends on registration status For confirmation Flash ROM system parameters write result ne of fla
327. f clear FROMP HO H4042 D4 KI command It TOP 0 0 OFF KI CYOE 11 8 Reads LED and communication error information from address 2014 Reads switch setting error data from address 203 Reads data transmission reception results from address 2574 to 258n Reads pre defined protocol function error data Writes initialization request LED initialization etc to address Ou Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q When data is communicated using the MC protocol the displayed ERR LED may not be turned on if the Q series C24 sends an NAK message to the external device in response to the command message Error codes see Section 11 2 corresponding to the error content when the NAK message is sent back to the external device are stored in the following areas When communicating with an A compatible 1C frame the error codes differ from the transmission error code To check error codes transmitted by the programmable controller CPU incorporate the following program in case of the interface on the CH1 side Top HO H25A KO K1 Clears error codes Read command FROMP HO H25A DO Ki Reads transmission error codes from address 25An Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 11 2 11 9 11 9 11 TRO
328. f communication timing adjustment a When communicating with MC protocol Increase the message wait time Especially in the case of Sequence scan time gt Message wait time an adjustment is required If the message wait time is too short the external device may not be able to receive all or the first part of a response message from the Q series C24 1 For the QnA compatible 3C 4C frames specify a message wait time in the buffer memory address 11EH 1BEx 2 For the A compatible 1C frames specify a message wait time in a request message sent from the external device b When communicating with the non procedure or bidirectional protocol Delay the data transmission timing 1 Data transmission from the external device to the QJU71C24N R2 R4 Delay the timing of transmission from the external device Adjusted on the external device side 2 Data transmission from QJ71C24N R2 R4 to the external device For communications with the non procedure protocol delay the data transmission by one scan in the sequence program For communications with the bidirectional protocol delay the timing of turning ON the reception data read completion signal by one scan as well App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module This section explains a comparison of the functions of the Q series C24 and QnA A series modules and explains how to utilize programs created for A series modules as well as how to install the Q
329. f data Q2 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 4 3 Data for modem connection registration Data for modem connection 1 to 30 Purpose MELSEC Q For data communication and notification using the modem function register the data for connection with external devices Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen Data for modem connection e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Data for modem connection Setting screen Data for modem connection li x r Module information Module type Module model name Serial Communications Module QU71C24N Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Data for modem connection 1 H0bb8 Pager receiver designation Telephone number Setting value 4 No notification Extemal line dialing Line types No externabline dialing M Pulse X Wait time for message transmission units sec Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 H0bb9 Pager receiver designation No notification X Telephone number Extermal line dialing No extemal line dialing Line types Daaa Pulse r Flash ROM setting Details Wine io Save file Select input Read from Load file module SSS No notification Notification Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Item Pager receiver designation Telephone number External line dialing Line types Wait time
330. fer memory m 258_ Data reception result For normal completion DO Interface number 1 D1 Reception result 0 ii 600 Receive data count D2 Receive data count n e OOM S D3 Allowable receive data count 10 m GS ee nae h e eee eee Receive data D10 Receive data 2 22222 TFFH to to Dm Receive data s When the receive data count is larger than the allowable receive data count only the data up to the allowable receive data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded For abnormal completion DO Interface number 1 D1 Reception result other than 0 From the buffer memory address 2581 D2 Receive data count n From the buffer memory address 6001 D3 Allowable receive data count 10 D10 Receive data oo donee to Data received prior to an error occurrence will be Dx Receive data stored in the receive data storage device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 1 MELSEC Q Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the
331. fer memory address 804 Default 0000 _ Write 4C43x 0000 No request Set by Q series C24 4C43H Requested b The programmable controller CPU information clear processing of the Q series C24 is executed 1 c Upon completion of the clear processing 0000 is written to the programmable controller CPU information clear request address 80n Set by the Q series C24 Clear request Buffer memory address 80H 0000H x Clear processing x1 The transmission sequence status address 255H 265n is also initialized 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 4 Executing the programmable controller CPU information clear request a Executing from GX Developer 1 On the Device test screen set 4C43H to buffer memory address 80H 2 Onthe Buffer Memory Batch monitor screen check that the value in buffer memory address 80h is 0000p b Executing from GX Configurator SC 1 Select Requested for the PLC CPU information clear request on the monitor test others screen and click Execute test 2 Confirm that the present value for the PLC CPU information clear request is No request c Executing from sequence program In the following program turning on the clear request command clears the programmable controller CPU information of the Q series C24 that is mounted in the position corresponding to I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F tt nov H4C43 m Programmable controller CPU information clear r
332. ffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions 1 MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device to be smaller than the size of the transmission data designation area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area 2 Size of data portion to be sent from the programmable controller CPU To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area or divide the transmission data before sending 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When ABCDEFG123 is sent Q series C24 Transmission area buffer memory Transmission data response message Transmission 5 Ps SSF a l data count 00x 05x Data nee B i A length designation 42 41 Di C H L 44n i 43x 41n 00 Transmission F E data designation as
333. following table lists the suitable connector shell for the RS 232 connector Connector shell 17 JE 23090 02 D8A CG 1 Manufactured by DDK Ltd 4 Tightening torque For details on the tightening torque for the RS 232 interface connector refer to Section 4 1 1 Confirmation of RS 232 control signal status Each status of the control signals ER DTR DR DSR RS RTS and CD DCD can be confirmed in RS 232 control signal status address 254H 264y Bit position ase side a amn eA a O a x1 System area for QJ71C24 R2 2 Designation of RS and DTR signal status The ON OFF status of the RS RTS or ER DTR signal which is normally set by the Q series C24 can be specified by turning ON OFF the corresponding bit in RS RTS and ER DTR signal status designation address 92H 132n klk 3 44 b15 S b3 b2 b1 b0 Buffer memory address 925 132 V0 1 0 Default 00051 X A oe L RS RTS ON ER DTR 0 0FF x 1 The RS RTS signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents e When data is communicated with half duplex communication When communication time and the RS and CS signals are controlled by the modem function x 2 The ER DTR signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents e When the DTR DSR signals are controlled e When data is communicated by the modem function x 3 After writing in
334. for all protocols and when this check is enabled ODD or EVEN is selected by a parameter For the MC or bidirectional protocol selected by a parameter Error detection For the non procedure protocol selected in the user frame Sum check code For the pre defined protocol whether or not a sum check code is needed depends on the selected protocol 6 Continued on next page 3 1 3 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from preceding page Specifications Item QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71024 QJ71024 R2 QJ71C24N R4 fe RS 232 RS 422 485 DTR DSR control Enabled Disabled z RS CS control Enabled Disabled Transmission control CD DCD signal control Enabled Disabled DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff control DC2 DC4 control Enabled Enabled e DTR DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user Line configuration RS 232 Connection 2 RS 422 485 1 1 1 n n 1 m n ee 4 4 4 n n 1 m n or er 2 communication 2 Non procedure protocol 1 1 1 1 communicati Bidirectional protocols 1 1 1 1 communicati communication 6 Line configuration Data R R S 32 S communication MC protocols p 1 1 1 n m n 1 1 1 n m n 2 communication Non procedure protocol T1 1n n 1 1 1 1 n n 1 communicati 422 Bidirectional 485 idirectional protocols 1 1 1 1 communicati Pre defined protocol begs 1 1 n 1 1 1 n 1 communication 6 Maximum 15 m Maximum 15 m issi RS 232 Tronsipission s
335. for errors including errors at the abnormal completion that may occur while the Q series C24 modem function is used The error codes for the modem function are stored in the modem function error code address 221H 545 The reference pages listed in the table below are found in the User s Manual Application Error code Hexa Error Contents Corrective action Reference section decimal 7FDOu There is an error in the designation of the notification execution designation JED 1x There is an error in the designation of the number of Set the number of connection retries in connection retries the range of 1 to 5 7ED2u Where is an error in the designation of the connection Set the connection retry interval in the Section 3 3 6 retry interval range of 90 to 300 s 7ED3 Modern There is an error in the initialization connection time Set the initialization connection time out function out designation ERR in the range of 1 to 60 s 7ED4n error There is an error in the designation of the number of initialization retries the range of 1 to 5 There is an error in the designation of the data number Designate the registered data number for Section 3 3 6 initialization or 0 Section 3 4 5 7FD5u AAE for initialization 7FD6x Recheck the pager receiver designation There is an error in the data for connection designated 7FD7n by the data number for connection Recheck the dialing number of the Section 3 4 4 exter
336. for message transmission units s Message Comment Buffer memory address Reference section User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 4 Modem function system setting registration Purpose For data communication using the modem function register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen Modem function system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Modem function system setting Setting screen Haii m Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Modem connection channel designation No connection Notification execution designation Do not execute Number of connection retries designation 3 Connection retry interval designation 180 90 300 Connection retry interval units sec Initialization connection timeout designation 60 1 60 Timeout units sec Number of initialization retries designation 3 Data No for initialization designation 0700 Input by the following value range O User send frame No designation HO7d0 HO7dd 05 registered initialization data HO9c4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801f Buffer memory initialization data r Flash ROM setting Details Sits to Save file module 7 Select input Read tom oad fle No
337. format 1 is received transmitted a Check the Q series C24 station No setting and message and RD message station No designation blinked but the Q Use the communication monitoring function to check The Q series C24 station series C24 did not the message from the external device ret rta Fesp nse No switch setting and message station No Se message NEU 3 When the station No designation is local station i designation do not match remains on and SD after the header byte set for each protocol and does not blink format is received the Q series C24 performs receive processing Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time out error e Error detection by watchdog timers timer 0 to timer The Q series C24 data 2 is possible in the following cases communications When part of a message is skipped monitoring time is set to When transmission from an external device is Infinite wait or the interrupted monitoring time is too long When a link error was generated while accessing another station over a CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 See User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time The path setting of the Check the path of the programmable controller CPU to programmable controller be accessed and set the path again CPU
338. g for REMTO instruction M200 to 203 Word byte units designation cceceeeeeeeeeeteeneeenreenreees DO Buffer memory head address designation for on demand S e E E P A perrrer Perrrereerrrert terete eter D1 Buffer memory length designation for on demand FUNCHON ooo eee ceeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeseneseneseneseneseneteneenes D2 Transmission buffer memory head address designation D3 Transmission buffer memory length designation D4 Receive buffer memory head address designation D5 Receive buffer memory length designation D6 Buffer memory settings used in this example i etree ecm tedeoma nme en Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function 0400 designation Data length designation for on demand function designation 0000H 162 B2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation OCO00H 163 A3H Transmission buffer memory length designation 04001 166 Receive buffer memory head address designation 0600H 167 A7H Receive buffer memory length designation 02001 App 51 App 51 APPENDICES 2 Program example lt Initial setting command gt MIO DO M100 M11 M200 DI D2 D3 D4 M102 M12 M201 DS D6 M104 M202 M203 MELSEC Q J Changes the initial setting command into
339. g methods are available a GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function The logs can be checked in the Protocol execution log dialog box For details refer to the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function b Checking the buffer memory The logs can be checked in the Execution log storage area address 4102H to 4701H CH1 4802H to 4E01H CH2 For details refer to Section 3 9 Do not perform the above two methods at the same time The latest execution logs are not in the buffer memory while they are being updated in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 2 Setting for protocol execution logs Whether to store all protocol execution logs or only the failed protocols in the Execution log storage area can be specified The following shows how the Execution log options area address 40E2H 40F2n in the buffer memory is set b15 bO Buffer memory address ft 40E2H 40F2H registration condition O OFF Register failed protocols only 1 ON Register all protocol execution states and results 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 1 5 Executing Condition of Predefined Protocol Communication The predefined protocol communication can be executed when the predefined protocol ready X1D is on Use the signal as an interlock signal when executing the predefined protocol communication in the sequence program However note that only th
340. g processing processing processing program 55 1 i i Reception data i read request X3 Reception abnormal l detection X4 Completion device OFF Status display device OFF at completion Normal 1 completion One scan 5 INPUT instruction 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the reception result S 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 10 13 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following example shows a program that stores data received via the non procedure protocol in D10 and later When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F x wo i _ rit 1 movp K1 DO Designate the receive channel tao X4 i T Clear the reception result and receive data count Emo KO l g storage device to 0 Move K10 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count G INPUT UO DO 10 MO J With normal completion the receive data within in i the allowable receive data count user designated is read from t
341. g the number of points that can communicate during random read write was designated MELSEC Q Non ne MC Proce Big Irex Pre ctional defined dure Corrective action Correct the data sent from the device If the protocol was edited in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function check the packet format of the external device to see if the number of digits is set correctly Check the data sent from the external device to see if 1 The Length value is correct or not 2 Any of the data corresponding to the conversion variable is missing or not If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for the conversion variable Check the data sent from the external device If GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function was used for protocol editing check the sender s packet format to see if an incorrect value is set for the conversion size 1 If it exceeds the range for word data change the conversion size setting to Double word 2 If it exceeds the range for double word data change the element to Non conversion variable Check the maximum allowable data length and specify the maximum length or less in the data length storage area Check the maximum allowable data quantity and specify the maximum quantity or less in the data quantity storage area Correct the valu
342. ger message 6 Remote communications using the modem function Details are explained in the User s Manual Application a Data communication can be performed with a remotely located external device b Modem initialization and line connection disconnection can be performed c Data communication can be performed using the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol 1 OVERVIEW 7 MELSEC Q Initial settings and communication settings without using a sequence program Various initial settings can be performed using GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later Connecting GX Developer and the GOT a Connecting GX Developer Details are explained in the GX Developer Operating Manual e By connecting a personal computer installed with GX Developer to the interface of the Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming monitoring and testing for the programmable controller CPU can be performed By connecting multiple personal computers installed with GX Developer to the programmable controller CPU or Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming and monitoring can be performed simultaneously by multiple operators Operating GX Developers using these simultaneous connections can improve program performance b Connecting the GOT Details are explained in the GO
343. gister the data for initializing the modem connected to the Q series C24 Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen Data for user modem initialization e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Data for user modem initialization Setting screen ix r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Data for modem connection 1 H0bb8 No notification Pager receiver designation E Telephone number External line dialing No extemalline dialing X Line types Pulse Wait time for message transmission units sec Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 H0bb9 Pager receiver designation Telephone number External line dialing No extemalline dialing ka Line types Pulse No notification X r Flash ROM setting Details Wre to Save file module x Select input Read f z ara Load fie No notification Notification Make text file Execute test Close Setting item Buffer Fie ee address Item Reference section User control data Data for user initialization 1 to liniialicaton command _ __ User s Manual Application initialization command command Use code to specify a field to register if GX Configurator SC is used for data for modem initialization Example To register the Q2 o
344. gnation 164 A4H Received data count designation O1FFH 600258 Datareceptionresut_ oS d o il App 42 App 42 APPENDICES 2 Program example MELSEC Q lt Receive read request gt X1003 i M10 Changes the receive read request signal into pulses lt Read of received data count gt M10 XIO1E Reads the received data count c H 2 REWFR 1 K1 KI HO H600 DO K1 M100 from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1 M100 M101 PLS M1 Received data acquisition command M101 SET M200 J Abnormal completion of REMEFR instruction lt Read of received data gt HI XIOIE Reads gaia aS many as me PE received data count from the m e HZ REWFR JI K KI Ho Hoot M pO W102 J communication area of the buffer W102 103 memory to D1 H LSE M300 F Normal reception completion M103 LSE M201 J Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction SE Y1001 J Turns ON the receive read completion signal lt Receive error detection gt OOO lll L LLL LLL F x1004 SE M301 J Abnormal reception completion Tags 1 PLS M12 J Reception result acquisition command lt When receive error detected Read of data reception result gt w2 XIO1E ye Reads the data reception result z REMFR Jl K1 Kl HO H258 D8000 Kl M104 7 of the buffer memory to D8000 M104 M105 r _ _ fit M202 F Normal completion of REMFR instruction M105 SET M203 J Abnormal
345. gnation for condition agreement transmission and non procedure data transmission 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for condition agreement transmission and non procedure data transmission 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for condition agreement transmission and notification OBB8u to OBD5n 8001H to 801FH Data No for connection MELSEC Q Name intial Registration Reference section User s Manual Application User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address us Applicable heat Initial A Reference Decimal Hex Application Name l protocol Registration section MC Non Bi Pa 8281 to 8537 to For designation Block of programmable pate monitoring controller CPU k devices No The structure of each area is the same as the first block monitoring device 2 area Allowed See 1 for the details of each area Use prohibited System area 20E5n Transmission pointer designation for condition agreement transmission and non procedure data transmission 0 No designation 8422 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth 20E6x Send the user frames designated in the
346. gram so that upon completion of one CPRTCL instruction G execution another is executed concurrently executed Incorrect control data are specified for the CPRTCL instruction Correct the control data for the CPRTCL instruction The user edited protocol Check the packet format of the external setting in GX Configurator device and correct the protocol setting SC Pre defined protocol 1 When a conversion variable exists in the support function is receive packet check for an error in the inconsistent with the setting of Conversion Sign character packet format of the Number of decimals Delimiter or Number When the pre external device of digits defined protocol is executed the ERR LED turns on 2 When an error check code exists in the receive packet check for an error in the setting of Processing method Code type Data length Data flow Complement calculation or Calculating range 3 When Length exists in the receive packet and a conversion variable is included in the calculating range of the Length check for an error in Code type Data length Data flow or Calculating range set for the Length An expected packet was e Using Circuit trace communication data not received and a monitoring function of GX Configurator SC monitoring timeout error Pre defined protocol support function occurred check the data sent from the external device If the data sent from the external device is corr
347. h binary code in a QnA compatible 4C frame a Non procedure protocol For communication using non procedure protocol m Bidirectional protocol For communication using bidirectional protocol Set to the CH1 side when CH1 and CH2 interfaces are used in linked operation For linked operation setting operated with the communication protocol of the CH2 side Pre defined protocol For communication using pre defined protocol Setting prohibited Ooo gt y ROM RAM switch test For self diagnosis of the modules Individual station loopback test For checking operation of each interface of the modules 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q d Station number setting switch 5 common for both CH1 and CH2 sides e This setting is for communication using the MC protocol e When several the Q series C24s are connected on the same line with multidrop connection set the station number designated in the data items of the transmission frame in each external device to 0 to 31 OH to 1FH x This number designates which external device is to be communicated with the Q series C24 e Set the station number to 0 when the system configuration of the external device and the programmable controller CPU is 1 1 External device Q series C24 Station 0 Station 1 Station 2 Station 31 If the communication of data with external device is to be started check the specifications of the functions to be used and then ma
348. he Make text file function of GX Configurator SC which can be used as the setting value recording sheet Module No Recording sheet 1 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting GX Developer Set data Data item name setting screen Setting value Intelligent Interrupt pointer start No Po CPU side 7 function module Interrupt pointer No of modules 2 fixed interrupt pointer Intelligent Start I O number Input format Hexadecimal setting module side Start SI number O fixed Input format Decimal Input format Decimal Recording sheet 2 Remote password setting GX Developer Set data Data item name setting screen Setting value Password Password Input format Character strings Remote settings password Password Modelname name QJ71C24 CMO Input format Selection settings active module Start XY Input format Hexadecimal settings sheet 3 Intelligent function module switch setting Switch number number Description CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Transmission setting Switch 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 Switch 2 CH1 Communication TE setting CH2 Communication rate T CH2 Transmission T b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 i ae i a ca GG a H Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Check the setting values in the next page and record them App 62 App 62 APPENDICES MEL
349. he control data for the BIDOUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the BIDOUT instruction is executed 4 A response message for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received 5 When the response is received the Q series C24 transmission processing completes and the device that has completed the BIDOUT instruction turns ON When the BIDOUT instruction ends abnormally due to the reception of an NAK message the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON and the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F MOV ABCDEFG rov l ov Mov s t Lit BIDOUT U0 DO M if 20 _ _P Fri HOAOD KI KO K5 D11 Ml Ly SET 01 SET RST RST M50 I J Transmission command is converted to pulse Transmission data is stored Designate the number of the interface CHT that will send the data Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes 7 The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent After the BIDOUT instruction is executed J the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan Storing the transmission
350. he following procedures 1 Checking the module status and error codes in the detailed module information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information r Module Module Name QJ71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B 170 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot r Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type a Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Nothing r Eror Display 1 7F68 HEX C DEC 2 7F68 3 7F68 4 7F68 The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error 5 7F68 The latest error is displayed in the line as under Display format e Present Error F68 l r Error contents Disposal Contents Framing error a Data does not match the stop bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the xl Disposal Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request YE ZYF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data x HZW Information
351. he base unit 2 general specifications range of the CPU module MELSEC Q Protocol Non MC Proce dure Bidire ctional Pre defined e Correct the setting value in the control data HH Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 11 29 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table The following table lists the error code error contents and corrective action for errors generated during A compatible 1C frame communications Protocol Corrective action Bidire ase ctional defined dure Ch the setting to Enable writ e Awrite command was designated when ede Bue PANDI aaa ONS during RUN and restart dat Disable write during RUN was set meee i oe ici harass Disable during RUN Bara SIG or sequence bioarahi was communications e A prog Stop the CPU and restart data written during RUN rare communications Error code
352. he external device and the received data length See Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 8 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFu Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00x to be used as the receive area in the user definable area address 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory if any of the functions below are used concurrently make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with the buffer memory addresses assigned for storing transmission receive data with the functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Pre defined protocol function Transmission reception data storage area Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data to the Q series C24 from the external device one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained 1 Reduce the send data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage
353. he receive data storage area in the It af Mov 2 20 J buffer memory e Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user rBMOV D10 110 KOZO q designated read completion signal MO turns ON 7 for 1 scan Mi e The reading of receive data and switching of the SET M100 ON OFF status are performed by the programmable controller CPU X100 H RST M100 J The abnormal completion flag is reset by an j external command x 1 When the completion device is off execute the INPUT instruction If the INPUT instruction is executed when the completion device is on data may not be received properly 10 14 10 14 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 5 G P BIDOUT Data can be sent using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function Index register data ace user File register JO O module device Constant Others 1 Word EE E ERE IRE uoco Instruction Executing code condition Command G BIDOUT G BIDOUT Un S1 S2 D Command GP BIDOUT ae GP BIDOUT Un S1 S2 D Set data Set data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the module BIN46 bit i 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit S1 Head number of the devices in which control data is stored er Device name S2 Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored w J D Bit device number to
354. heck and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Signal N Hexa Description 9 Corrective action on Bidire a name MC Proce decimal ctional dure transmit message and restart data MC protocol e There is no data ETX CR LF etc 7F23x ae aes following the character area or 2 designation was incorrect communications Check the sum check code of the external device e The sum check code calculated does Check the horizontal parity code not match the sum check code calculated of the external device received Check CRC 16 of the external device e The horizontal parity code calculated If GX Configurator SC Pre defined 7F244 Sum check error does not match the horizontal parity protocol support function was used for code received protocol editing check the sender s Check and correct the external device e The calculated error check code does packet format to see if an incorrect Q mo po Correct the data length that is 7F 30x e The OS of the Q series C24 detected 1 some error transmitted from the external device Simultaneous e The Q series C24 and an external 7F31H ict device started transmitting transmission error i simultaneously Change the word byte units set by the 7F32 System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected i y some error not match the received error check value is set for Processing method c
355. heck if the following condition for element placement are satisfied in the packet setting or not If any elements of 1 and 2 are in the same packet 1 must be placed before 2 1 Conversion variable fixed number of data fixed number of digits 1 to 10 no sign character e Conversion variable fixed number of data fixed number of digits 1 to 10 variable decimal point e Conversion variable fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 1 delimiter set 2 Non conversion variable variable length Conversion variable variable number of data e Conversion variable fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 1 no delimiter Conversion variable fixed number of data variable number of digits number of data is 2 or more e Non verified reception variable number of characters 2 When function data not supported by the Q series C24 are included in the protocol setting data Check the version of the Q series C24N to confirm supported functions The user edited protocol setting in GX e The ERR LED turns on Configurator SC Pre defined protocol when protocol setting support function has an error data are written to the Q Or function data not supported by the Q series C24 series C24 are included in the protocol setting data Set the protocol within the range of supported functions if any unsupported function is applied 11 56 11 56 11 TROUB
356. ia approx 4 7 kQ 1 4 W can prevent the reception of erroneous data RDA 4 7kQ 1 4W Terminating resistor 4 7kQ 1 4W Receive data External device When there is a pull up or pull down resistor at the external device erroneous data is not received The following describes the case when a pull up or pull down resistor is not installed to the external device When no station is sending the send line becomes high impedance and noise etc may cause the send line to change and the external device to receive erroneous data In this case there is probably a parity error or framing error Therefore skip the erroneous data Since the first data during data reception is fixed in the following cases also skip the receive data until the fixed head data is received e When using an MC protocol to send data the first data is fixed according to the frame and format the user uses e When transferring data using user frames with non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol the first data is selected according to the user frame that the user registers to the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 RS 422 485 interface operation 1 RS 422 485 interface construction _ SDA Driver The following illustration shows the construction of the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface driver send receiver receive 1 Output control input also called send gate of the driver send section of the il
357. ial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 ij 0000 erial Co ions Module z Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module model name QJ71C24 N N A4 p Module side Module side PLC side 2 Setting tem Buffer size Transfer Were i Ad rs zs direction agit Module implementation status Flash ROM access register read delete 1 1 gt Hee Start 1 0 No Module model name CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt DOO QI7IC24NZN AA siaha CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt Switch setting error mode switching error 1 1 gt Number of registered user frame 1 1 gt Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 gt Modem function error code 1 1 gt Modem function sequence status 1 1 gt x Make text file End setup Cancel Monitor Test Exit See Screen 4 6 Monitor Test Select a module to be monitored tested Monitor Test screen Stnt No See Section 9 4 See Section 9 6 1 When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the programmable controller CPU to resume data transmission 2 With the Q series C24 monitoring testing and reading writing of setting values can be performed via online operation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q The following diagram illustrates the overview of a procedure in which GX
358. igence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Not
359. ignal ceseeeeeeeteeeeeee M10 e On demand function designation command eeeeeee M11 e On demand data transmission flag ceceeeeeeeeeeteeeteeees M12 e On demand execution result acquisition command M13 e LED ON status acquisition Command c ccceeeeeeeeeeeees M14 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO IAS UUICION sesiapa aa cadesadecdevnacaccdvaacacdeesacasceraanss M200 to 204 e Normal abnormal completion of on demand data transmission ccccccccesesssceeeeeeecsseseeeeeeeeccssesueeeeeeesensessaeeneeeess M300 M301 TRANSMISSION Cala wisics tied aniehanineeas ad ar aA AROR DO D1 e Buffer memory head address designation for on demand FUNCOM naiiai paaa edana aa aaa aaa ceaereate aeiaai D2 e Data length designation for on demand function 0 D3 e On demand execution reSult ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeetens D8 e LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side b TA Setti Switch No Description emg Position Designated value value value oN Enabled b8 to b15 es a c Buffer memory settings used in this example Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation e bits C H bit O7E2H 513 201H LED ON status and communication errorstatusonCHtside 598 256H On deman
360. in the buffer memory to the flash ROM Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the programmable controller CPU Monitor the execution status of the modem function Monitor the status of interface control signals values set from the GX Developer etc Can be used only via online operation Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and i Section 9 6 5 setting values in the buffer memory Monitor the setti d ting status of th onitor the setting values an opera ing sta us o e O O Section 9 6 8 programmable controller CPU monitoring function Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted jefe Section 9 6 9 Monitor the data reception result error occurrence status etc Section 9 6 10 Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module Section 9 6 11 Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and setting values in the buffer memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Can be used Non procedure protocol only via P Clear the currently received data O Section 9 7 y receive data clear online operation Abbreviations used in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol Pd Pre defined protocol 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules The following table lists the parameters that
361. ing in progress x03 Reception data read request x04 Reception abnormal detection x06 Mode switching XDE ERR occurrence X14 Global signal lt 07 CH2 Transmission normal completion x08 Transmission abnormal completion x09 Transmission processing in progress Flash ROM setting Details Write to Save fil Current value Monitoring module ital lec display Cannot execute test Read hom Load file Make text file Stop monitor Close Monitor Test items X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress x06 CH1 Mode switching O X06 CH1 Mode switching X0E CH1 ERR Occurrence X1A CH1 Global signal X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion a Y1C System setting default request ee Reference section Section 3 8 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 6 2 Modem function monitor test Purpose for monitor test MELSEC Q Monitor test the operating status and setting values of the modem function Operating procedure Monitor screen Modem function monitor test Monitor Test screen r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Modem function error code 0000 Modem function sequence status Idle status C indicates callback
362. ion error PRO cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecaeeceaeeeeaeescaaeeseaeeseaeeecaeeeseeeesaeessneteaees 11 44 11 3 11 Communication error Sl a E a eE E aa a eaa a ae A a eai atalei 11 45 11 3 12 Communication error CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR cceccceeecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeessneeeeaes 11 46 11 3 13 Communication is intermittent ccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaceeseaeeseaeessaeeeeaeeesieeeteaeeseaees 11 49 11 3 14 Undecidable data are transmitted or received ccceecceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseneessnees 11 51 11 3 15 Whether the communication error is caused on the Q series C24 or external device is unclear EEE EEE E EEEE E EEE EEA E EE A AE EE EEE E CEEE lacus 11 52 11 3 16 Communication is not available via the MOCEM ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaeeeeeeeeseaeessaees 11 53 11 3 17 Communication is not available with the ISDN sub address cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeteetenees 11 54 11 3 18 Periodic transmission is not performed normally ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeetieesieesieetiees 11 54 11 3 19 Condition agreement transmission is not performed normally cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeteeees 11 54 11 3 20 Data cannot be received due to an interrupt program cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeesenees 11 54 11 3 21 Data cannot be written to the flash ROM cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesceeseaeeecaeeesieeetenee
363. ion is enabled or disabled for CH2 of the QU71C24N R4 The echo back of the QJ71C24N R4 is defined as the function that when data are sent through RS 485 2 wire type from the RS 422 485 interface the same data are also sent to RDA or RDB of the QJ71C24N R4 Whether to receive the returned data or not discard can be specified Sending data QJ71C24N R4 Target device ss SDA lt SDA SDB KS SDB RDA l l RDA J RDB Receives or not receive discards the data 1 Application 1 Disabling the echo back will eliminate the processing for ignoring unnecessary data which has been programmed for non procedure protocol communication 2 When the same message format is used for request Command and response in the pre defined protocol communication proper communication with the other device can be performed by disabling the echo back 2 Setting method 1 Setting by GX Configurator SC Enable or disable the function on the CHn Transmission control and others system setting screen For details refer to Section 9 4 5 2 This function is set in sequence programs In the echo back enable disable setting area address 450 1C2H set either of the following values Default 0 When the QJ71C24N R4 sends data it also receives the sent data 0 Enable echo back Ved in its own RDA or RDB When the QJ71C24N R4 sends data it does not receive the sent 1 Disable echo bac
364. ious page 1 Step 3 Write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM Module write Module selection 1 0 address Model Please save in the protocol setting file pcf because the data to be written to module does not include the following information Non written data manufacturer packet name protocol detailed setting type version explanation packet setting element name l Step 4 Execute the protocol with a dedicated instruction CPRTCL Pre defined execution protocol command ready ___J p gprTcL uo NO J 1 IT ae l MOV Ko D300 Set values are in the Send data storage area MOV KI D12 Protocol No 1 is specified K2 Ki D10 NO Protocol is executed SET N101 Normal completion flag ON SET W102 Error completion flag ON uov D10 D100 Error code is stored Step 5 Confirm the protocol execution in the protocol execution log Protocol execution log Object module 120 Address 00 Type QJ71C24N Channel CH1 Start time and date End time and date Model Execution Error Protocol name result code 19 04 17 FR E700 2009 04 17 10 22 43 2009 04 17 10 22 4 QJ71C24N 2009 04 17 10 22 22 2009 04 17 10 22 4 FR E700 2009 04 17 10 22 22 2009 04 17 10 22 2 QJ71C24N 2009 04 17 10 21 05 2009 04 17 10 21 2 FR E700 2009 04 17 10 20 44 2009 04 17 10 21 0 FR E700 Update log H7B RD Opera Send amp rece Sending Send Recv Mor Functional H7B RD Opera
365. ission control and other RS 232 control signal status CS CTS monitoring tests RTS RISS sesiwter __ designation o o o jx x x x mene o x Transmission control start free area O TO O TO x x x section Transmission control end free area O TO O OT x x x s4s5 Transmission EerRecv data monitoring designation TO O TOTO XY section controland Acionforbufertul SSCP OO TO TOL OT XY x I amp 988 othersystem StopbyTimerQeror OT OT OT OT Xx x X oe erie ae ee hes o Monitor buffer size POLO x Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to g 10th otote tetet e OOE a a e a n a OTOToTopo Lope monitorltest Timeout at No protocol O TO TOTO X x x joss App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Software version SWOD5C vera QSCU E __ Reference Screen Additional setting item 5 40E section 20W 11M 06G 00A 10L 30D p 20C Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function Protocol cancel specification O x x x x x x Pre defined protocol Execution status x x x x x XxX 18 1 3 monitor test TE Pre defined protocol function error code 9 6 7 11 2 1 Section 9 6 7 Section 9 6 7 Pre defined Section setting 9 4 9 Section Station No Instruction setting No Station No Instruction setting setting HH Section Communication error clear request for CHO and to x x x x 9 6 10 turn LED off Section Monitor test others 9 6 11 Section
366. ission specifications and communication protocols for communication with external devices Setting procedure PLC parameters I O assignment setting Switch setting For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module x Input format v Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Oo p oO Switch 1 ra ly aaa az z aa i Display description 1 Switches 1 to 5 Set the transmission specifications and communication protocol of each interface using the combinations of setting values for each switch with 16 bit binary data according to the following table Switch number b15 to b8 b7 to bO uals CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Transmission setting See a anidib Switch 2 CH1 communication protocol setting b15 to b8 b7 to bO suet CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting 566 a and b Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting X For settings to perform linked operation between two Q series C24 interfaces see 2 When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to the Q series C24 on a 1 1 one to one basis The interface switch setting connected to GX Developer or a GOT is not required for accessing or monitoring a QCPU If the switches are not set the GX Developer connection mode will be active When GX Developer or a GOT is connected to
367. ithin the range of an AnACPU device x2 A multiple block batch read write function can be used for the local station QCPU to which the Q series C24 is mounted and the next CPU module which will be another station via CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Programmable controller CPU Function QCPU QnACPU Q2AS H Q4AR Multiple block batch read write All allowed 9707B or later products gt x All allowed This function is added to modules showing 9707B or later in the package indication and the DATE column of the rating plate x3 Access to other stations cannot be performed via data link system MELSECNET II MELSECNET B 4 Transmission is only possible using the printer function 5 When the Q series C24 is used it is possible to read write a maximum of 960 words in case of QC24 N it is possible to read write a maximum of 480 words x6 230400 bps can be used via CH1 of QU71C24N R2 R4 only The maximum transmission speed of QU71C24 R2 is 115200 bps x7 Accessible to link direct device LW10000 or higher 8 Accessible to extended data register D65536 or higher and extended link register W10000 or higher x9 Available for only the CH2 side of the QU71C24N R4 App 9 App 9 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 Using programs designed for the QC24 N and installing the Q series C24 into existing systems This section explains how to use programs designed for serial commu
368. its of the serial No are 11062 or greater The QJ71C24N R4 only Monitor Test available Version 2 18U or later System registration into the flash ROM can be performed Version 2 20W or later Version 1 31H or later Pre defined protocol communication Execution of the protocol selected from the pre defined protocol library Execution of the created or edited protocol Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 10122 or greater Addition of Sign character Number of decimals and Delimiter settings to Conversion variable setting for Non verified reception Variable number of characters Acquisition of protocol setting data error information Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 11062 or greater Setting execution log options to buffer memories System registration of the execution log options to the flash ROM Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 10122 or greater Function version B or later first 5 digits of the serial No are 11062 or greater Version 8 78G or later Version 2 18U or later Version 2 20W or later Version 1 24A x or later Monitor Test available Version 2 18U or later System registration into the flash ROM can be performed Version 2 20W or later Usable no restrictions depending on the v
369. ive data and receive Receive data Valid Does not wait for a response massage 1 2 in result to the programmable controller reply to data transmission 1 1 CPU through the buffer memory while checking time out after data discards the received data SPIE f transmission 1 1 is complete Does not transmit a response message Transmission data Valid i Posts normal end or abnormal end according 2 2 Receive data Invalid to whether or not the programmable controller Does not inform the programmable CPU received a response message through controller CPU that data was received the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission error to Ignored data reception 2 1 and the programmable controller CPU through the discards the receive data Transmission data Invalid Receive data Invalid buffer memory after data transmission 1 1 Does not transmit a response message Does not wait to a response massage 1 2 in 2 2 reply to data transmission 1 1 Does not inform the programmable E to receive the response message 1 2 Ignores data reception 2 1 and controller CPU that data was received m is the number showing the correspondence with the messages in the illustration shown in Section 7 3 2 7 24 7 24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions occur Examples of the Q series C24 communication da
370. k bog i data in its own RDA or RDB The data are discarded 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Example of setting in sequence program Send command 1H Mov K1 Do Set echo back to Disable Set the value in the echo back CTO HO H1C2 DO K1 J enable disable setting area address 450 1C2H Data transmission program The echo back enable disable setting must be done before sending data Any setting changed during transmission does not take effect 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List The following table lists the functions of the Q series C24 Function Communication with Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 ASCII code exist for each SommuMcaupn with Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame binary code Batch read write in bit word units Monitoring of device memory Batch read write of multiple blocks Read write by extension designation Accessing other stations via network system Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Reading writing from to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Reading writing from to sequence program files Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function Status control of the programmable controller CPUs remote RUN STOP etc Turning on off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device global Data transmission from a program
371. ke the external device skip the data up to transmission of the head data ENQ NAK etc of the message from the Q series C24 Before communicating data through the RS 422 485 interface check Q series C24 specifications given in Section 3 3 Data bit settings When adding a sum check code to a message set the data bits to 8 bits using the transmission setting of GX Developer For more details on the data bit settings see Section 4 5 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL Data can be transferred between the QJ71C24N R2 R4 and an external device using GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function with a protocol appropriate to the external device Protocols can be selected from the pre defined protocol library offered or can be created and edited arbitrarily Since registered setting data are written to a flash ROM the program volume in a programmable controller CPU can be reduced 1 Data communication using the pre defined protocol Using non procedure protocol communication QJ71C24N External R2 R4 device Communication format definition program Send command definition program Data transmission processing program Data reception processing programReceived data check program Enormous amounts of sequence programs must be created QCPU QJ71C24N External R2 R4 device Dedicated instruction for starti
372. ke the settings and connect the cables Configure the following switch settings from GX Developer if there is to be no communication if the cables are not to be connected at the interface e Communication protocol setting Set any of OH to 7H or 9H e Transmission setting communication rate setting Set all to OFF 2 The setting and data flow in linked operation a Set the related switches as follows when two Q series C24 interfaces are in linked operation Switch number Setting value Operation setting b0 OFF Switch 1 Transmission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH1 side Ps the same specification Communication rate setting Match the external device Switch 2 Communication protocol setting Communication rate setting Match the external device Switch 4 Communication protocol setting Ou to 6H Switch 5 Station number setting Set according to d of 1 Operation setting Po ON Switch 3 Transmission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH2 side Ps the same specification 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Do not use the above settings for the following cases because linked operation cannot be performed 1 When using the QJ71C24N R2 or QJ71C24 R2 When an external device is not connected to either of the interfaces When using the bidirectional or pre defined protocol When communicating data with an external
373. l PRO turned on e A device No outside the designated range was designated A remote RUN STOP request was issued while remote STOP was applied from another module 11 44 MELSEC Q Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined e Check the Q series C24 communication protocol setting and the message from the external device and match the settings or correct the message and restart data communications Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device Check and correct the external device message and restart data communications Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device Only the data 0 to 9 and A to F can be handled as character area data during communications using an MC protocol ASCII mode Therefore when transmitting a character string as data convert the ASCII code of each character string to 2 byte binary code Examples e Transmitting the character G The ASCII code for the character G is 47H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34H 37H Transmitting the character A The ASCII code for A is 41H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34h 31H If the ASCII code 41n for the character A is transmitted unchanged the Q series C24 ASCII BIN conversion will convert it to AH 10 and pass it to the programmable controller CPU e When designating a device check Device setting of the paramete
374. l is terminal was set the CD turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change the terminal was turned off wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time Check if a message is transmitted without transmitting DC1 11H after the external device transmits DC3 When DC control is 13H during DC1 DC3 external control selected the necessary Check if the next message is transmitted without adding DC codes are not DC2 12n after the external device transmits DC4 transmitted 14H during DC2 DC4 external control Use the communication monitoring function to check the message from the external device The end code was not Check if the end code set at the Q series C24 and the end received or fixed length code transmitted from the external device are the same An external device data was not received Check if the external device transmitted the fixed length transmitted a designated at the Q series C24 message and RD Check if the trailer frame was transmitted during blinked but the read communications by user frame request signal Use the communication monitoring function to check the X3 XA was not message from the external device turned ON e When the send data from the external device is correct take the corrective action described in Sections 11 3 10 and 11 3 11 The Q series C24 setting The data count basics message format etc depend on and message format do the following settings not match e ASCII BIN conv
375. le controller module make sure to perform an operation check App 11 App 11 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 Using programs designed for the computer link module and installing the Q series C24 into existing systems This section describes how to use programs created for A series computer link modules and installing the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting screen The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are available in the computer link module for A series Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link module The data communication between the programmable controller CPU and external device as well as other programmable controller CPU that has been performed by A series computer link modules hereinafter abbreviated as UC24 C24 S8 can also be performed using the Q series C24 However UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 have major differences in the following points For programmable controller CPU side create a new program according to the explanation in the section of the function used Differences between UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 e Initial setting items and the setting method
376. led explanations a To learn about the communication functions Section 3 4 describes an overview of the serial communication module functions b To learn about detailed explanations of the communication functions The basic communication methods are described in Chapters 5 to 7 e Special functions are described in the User s Manual Application To learn about data communication functions and programming a To learn how to read data from and written to the programmable controller CPU e Data is read from and written to the programmable controller CPU with a communication function using the MC protocol x Details are described in the Reference Manual e Appendix 7 describes an overview of the communication support tool MX Component that supports communication using the MC protocol b To learn how to send and receive data between the programmable controller CPU and the external devices e Data communication between the programmable controller CPU and the external devices is performed with a communication function using the non procedure protocol or the bidirectional protocol e Chapter 6 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the non procedure protocol e Chapter 7 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the bidirectional protocol c To learn how to transfer data between a programmable controller CPU and an external device using the protocol of the external devic
377. lement name lement setting Header ENQ Variable unset error gt HE Fixed number Number of data 1 Digit 2 Padded Conversion variable _ Inverter Station Number Static data Instruction Code 7B 2 byte Static data Waiting Time OUT byte Check code Sum Check Object element2 4 Sum check Hexadecimal No calculation Forward 2 byte Terminator CR 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 The Element setting Conversion variable screen is displayed In the Send data storage area field enter D300 Click the button Element setting Conversion variable Send Element name Inverter Station Number Conversion HEX gt ASCII hexadecimal Fixed number of data Fined number of data Variable number of data Number of send data T Number of send digits of data z Blank padded characteratsend 5 Conversion unit Sign Sign character Number of decimals Delimiter No delimiter Data storage area specification Send data storage area p300 1 word 1 D300 Specitiable device symbol J X Y M L B D W R ZR G Buffer memory 6 The Packet setting screen is displayed The packet setting of Packet name H7B RD Operation Mode has been completed Click the Close button 7 The Protocol setting screen is displayed Repeat the steps 3 to 6 described above to configure the packet setting of Packet nam
378. les for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station App 37 Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program Conditions ceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees App 37 Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using Sequence program ccccceeeeeeteeeees App 39 A 14 A 14 Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand data cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseaeessaeeesaneesaes App 40 Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol 00 App 42 Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol 0 00 App 44 Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data ccccccecceescceeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeesaceesaeeseaeessaeessneeesineeeaes App 46 Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user fraMeS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeaeesseeeeneeeeaes App 48 Appendix 9 8 When performing initial Setting ceccceeecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeteneesseeeeieeessaeenes App 51 Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeseaeeeeaeeteeeeseaeesseeseieeess App 53 Appendix 9 10 When reading user frame c cceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseneeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeteneeteeeseeeess App 55 Appendix 9 11 When deleting User frame c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeseeeseieeees App 57 Appendix 9 12 When ch
379. ll in progress without resetting the programmable controller CPU or turning off the power Operation procedure Procedure 1 Display the Non procedure monitor test screen See Section 9 6 5 Procedure 2 Set Clear request issued for Receive data clear request Procedure 3 Click on Execute test The received data will be cleared Clear the received data when transmission reception are not in progress with the external device Executing a receive data clear while the data transmission is in progress causes the Q series C24 to stop the data transmission abruptly resulting in an abnormal completion of the dedicated transmission instruction The transmission completion signal will not be lit When the receive data clear is executed while the data reception is in progress the data received up to that point will be cleared 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming when using intelligent function module functions This chapter describes the dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 which is part of the functions of the QCPU in Q mode explained in this manual 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated instruction list The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter Application D edicateg Description of function Explanation instruction page On demand function Send
380. llowing program receives data from the external device by communication using the nonprocedural protocol then turns ON the reception data request X1003 and reads the received data from the QJ71C24N buffer memory to the programmable controller CPU a Devices used Error code read Sigmal eccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeeeeaeeeas X1023 e Receive read request signal c eceeeeeseeeeeeneeeneeenteeteees M10 e Received data acquisition comman0 lt d cccceeteeeeees M11 e Receive result acquisition command ccecceeeeeeeees M12 e Completion device for REMFR instruction 1e M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR instruction M200 to 203 e Normal abnormal completion of reCe ive cccceeseceteeees M300 M301 e Received data count ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseneeteeessaees DO e Received data when 5 word data are received D1 to D5 e Data reception result cccccceccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaees D8000 b Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Setting Switch No Description Position EE value value OFF O OFF Data bit e bits OFF orF _ Transmission orF_ setting EE bit 07COn oF ON es on O Enabled b8 to b15 essa seg ts c Buffer memory settings used in this example E Ases eoma Haasem nme ee Name value 150 96H Word byte units desi
381. llowing tests in sequence and repeat them one test cycle takes approximately one second x End testing when all test results become abnormal 1 Check communication with the programmable controller CPU Read and check the model type of the programmable controller CPU 2 Check transmission and reception functions of the interface Perform communication while changing data 4 The LED corresponding to a test item flashes when the test starts e The CH1 NEU LEDs flash when checking communication with the programmable controller CPU e The SD and RD LEDs of the interface being tested flash when checking the communication functions of interface 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 4 Checking the results of an individual loopback test 1 This test is performed repeatedly When the ERR LED is off the test is being executed normally 2 The test is completed with an error when the ERR LED is lit Check the error description on one of the following screens The ERR LED is lit upon error occurrence and the test is completed e The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 9 6 10 The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for operation method x When checking for errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the LED ON status and communication error status address 2011 2024 Check the error descriptions on the screen
382. log Upper 8 bits Month Lower 8 bits Last 2 digits of year b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99h last 2 digits 0 No log Upper 8 bits Hour b0 to Day 01H to 31H Upper 8 bits Second Lower 8 bits Minute b15 Second 00H to 59x b8 b7 bo Minute 00H to 59x 0 No log Lower 8 bits First 2 digits of year Lower 8 bits Day of week b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Year 00H to 99h first 2 digits Day of week 00H to 06H 00H Sunday to 06H Saturday 0 No log Upper 8 bits Month Lower 8 bits Last 2 digits of year b15 to b8 b7 to bo Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99h last 2 digits 0 No log Upper 8 bits Hour b0 Day 01H to 31H Hour 00H to 23H MELSEC Q Reference section Not allowed Section 8 1 4 Operating Manual Not allowed Not allowed Pre defined Not allowed Initial Protocol vai fmc non Bi Pa Registration protocol support function Section Section 8 1 4 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Decimal ao ner Initial Protocol z Reference Hex Application Registration vai fmc non Bi Pa ii 0 No log toel isio Upper 8 bits Second 4130H 48301 ci ee ar b7 to b0 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H Section 8 1 4 Execution i Operating Checking log 1 0 No log Pes E
383. loper 1 Match settings in this area RS and DTR signal status designation 306 0 Off 1 On 92H 1324 Signal setting RS RTS signal b0 Allowed Section 3 2 1 ER DTR signal b2 07 OE DC1 DC3 Xon Xoft code designation SERION S9 designation of DC1 code b0 to b7 308 transmission User s Manual 941 1341 control OOM to FFH BT cone Application DC3 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC3 code DC2 DC4 code designation Allowed 1 309 DC2 code b0 to b7 95x 1351 00H to FFH DC2 code DC4 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC4 code Word byte units designation eee 1361 For designation 0 Word units 1 Byte units 150 96h Section 9 4 5 of communication 151 311 control CD terminal check designation for RS 232 Section 3 2 1 97H 1371 0 Check 1 No check Section 9 4 5 144 145 146 147 148 49 DTR DSR ER DR Transmission control b0 3 0 DTR DSR control 1 DC code control 93H 1331 DC1 DC3 control b8 0 No control 1 Controlled DC2 DC4 control b9 0 No control 1 Controlled 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Application Name iial Proa Registration neterenge Nak fuc non si Pa For designation Communication system designation for RS 232 of communication oe sh 98H 138H 0 Full duplex communication 1 Half duplex communication control 153 313 For half duplex Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation Sh
384. loper select Project Open project Save Save as 2 On the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Intelligent function module parameter Open parameters Save parameters 3 From GX Developer select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Intelligent function module parameters Alternatively from the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q lt Flash ROM data gt a This means the data set in Flash ROM setting and they can be stored in any directory separately from projects of GX Developer b Steps 4 and 5 in Figure 9 1 are performed as follows 4 This operation can be executed from the Flash ROM setting screen or Monitor Test screen of the utility Flash ROM setting screen Load file Save file Monitor Test screen Load file Save file 5 This operation can be executed from the Monitor Test screen of the utility Monitor Test screen Read from module Write to module lt Make text file gt a Clicking Make text file on the Auto refresh setting or Monitor Test screen creates a text file This feature is useful for documentation of users GX Developer GX Configurator SC Personal computer boas ee ee a QCPU 000 A Intelligent function module para
385. lustration at the left determines whether or not data from SDA SDB is output to the outside Send data Output control input 1 Receiver Receive data 2 RS 422 485 interface operation When the Output control input in the illustration above is ON the interface enters the low impedance state state in which data can be sent When the Output control input is OFF the interface enters the high impedance state state in which data cannot be sent Timing to start sending and to complete the transmission processing for the Q series C24 Timing to start sending During data transmission the Q series C24 outputs the actual data after sending a mark for 2 characters or longer after the high impedance set by the operations described in 1 and 2 above is reset e Transmission processing completion timing The following times are necessary as H W gate OFF time from the time that data transmission is completed until transmission processing is completed the state changes to the high impedance state The transmission rate set in the Q series C24 is the object When the transmission rate is 600 bps or higher Data transfer time of less than 1 bit When the transmission rate is 50 bps 300 bps several ms Output control input External device Data Q series C24 Data Output control input a gt pa a mark for 2 characters or longer Data send time range H W gate OFF time Prag See explanation above Output cont
386. ly read write of device memory is possible For the range of devices that can be accessed see the Reference Manual x The devices added to the QCPU i e the latch relay L and step relay S are accessed using commands for QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames It is necessary to create new programs c Accessing other stations 1 When accessing other station s programmable controller CPU via the MELSECNET 10 Valid module during other station access must be designated in the parameter setting by GX Developer 2 Check the stations that can be accessed in the Reference Manual and access the programmable controller CPU from the external device 3 When it is necessary to access other stations on other MELSECNET 10 data communication must be performed in a QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Create a new program for the external device side according to the Reference Manual 4 Itis not possible to access other stations via the MELSECNET II B d Transmitting data to the external device by the on demand function 1 The program for data transmission on the programmable controller CPU side is different from when UC24 C24 S8 is used Create a new program on the programmable controller CPU side according to the Reference Manual 2 Data to be sent to the external device is identical to when the UC24 C24 S8 is used 3 Data communication using the non procedure protocol a Data transmission reception 1 The same data transmission reception a
387. m Automation initialization of Callback Remote password check Function version B Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 03043 Function version B Function version A or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 02092 Version 7 or later Version 6 or later SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Version 1 0 or later Versions prior to SWODSC QSCU E 40E are not SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation O Version 2 or later Transmission control start end free area O Version 2 or later 05h OB 11H 17H 04H OAH E5xH EBH Reception according to user frames reception according to format 1 O Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 06062 Function version B Function version B SWOD5C QSCU 20C or later Version 2 or later Version 2 06G or later SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission Function version B SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later Version 1 15R or later Switching the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode O O O O Communication data monitoring function O Version 8 or later Version 2 or later Version 1 15R or later UINI instruction Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the seri
388. mable controller CPU to an external device on demand function Data transmission reception in any format Data transmission reception using user frames Communication using Data reception by interrupt programs non procedure protocol Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU User s Manual 2 monitoring function Application Read write of device memory Communication using MC protocol 1 Chapter 5 Reference Manual Q Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Data transmission reception in any format Chapter 7 Communication using Data reception by interrupt programs bidirectional protocol on User s Manual Application gt gt o o Q Q Qa Q fe fe a D fe fed Q Q J n n 3 3 N n O O O O gt gt oO oO O O o oO oO oO a a O O pe oe oe Me p gt gt o o Q Q TE T W W Z Z Q Q gt O pei pi lt lt oO oO fo fo d d O O Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Data transmission reception by a protocol selected from the pre defined protocol Chapter 8 Operating Manual Pre defined protocol Communication using pre defined protocol 2 Data transmission reception by a created or edited protocol support function Communication via Communication with MC Protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol public network etc modem function User s Ma
389. me 49 2 ft 49 2 ft O O CNE Maxi 1200 m 3937 ft Maxi 1200 m 3937 ft distance RS 422 485 arimu agom o axina 1209an 0 J overall distance overall distance Flash ROM write count Maximum 100 000 times to the same area Number of occupied I O points 32 points per slot I O assignment Intelli 32 points 3 RS 232 7 0 127 OP HRV SV Outside diameter 8 5mm 0 33in or more Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd Applicable number is specified in O Recommended A F z T F She SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P Outside diameter approx 6 5mm 0 26 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries RS 422 485 LTD SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P Outside diameter approx 7 5mm 0 3 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries LTD 4 Applicable connector for external wiring D sub 9 pin male screw type 5 Pos Ste _ il 5V DC internal current consumption 0 31A 0 26A 0 39A 98 3 86 in H 27 4 1 08 in W X_ 90 3 54 in D fmm 0 20kg 0 44 1 Set to transfer data with external devices using a full duplex communication system when the Q series C24 is started For switching to a half duplex communication system refer to the User s Manual Application 2 Indicates possible combinations when connecting the programmable controller CPU and external devices external device side programmable controller CPU side The total number of n and m n is up to 32 stations 3 In order to use the Q series C24 it is necessary to set the GX Developer switches To set the GX Develop
390. me of the programs written to a programmable controller CPU can be reduced because protocol setting data are written to a flash ROM The debugging support function allows monitoring and analysis of communication data on the network enabling a shorter system startup time Pre defined protocol support function The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The abbreviation for G INPUT Intelligent function module devices A generic term for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the programmable controller CPU setting values monitor values etc Intelligent function modules A generic term for the Q series programmable controller modules that are operated by commands from the programmable controller CPU equivalent to the A series programmable controller special function modules Examples e CC Link interface module A D and D A conversion modules e Ethernet interface module e Serial communication module MELSECNET 10 The abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system MELSECNET H MX Component The abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system The abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later ONDEMAND The abbreviation for G ONDEMAND or GP ONDEMAND Operating Manual Protocol FB support function GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function Operating Manual Pre defin
391. ments etc and other applications and then start Intelligent function module utility again from GX Developer To start the intelligent function module utility a In GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for PLC series and specify a project If any PLC series other than QCPU Q mode is selected or if no project is specified the Intelligent function module utility will not start b Multiple Intelligent function module utilities can be started However Open parameters and Save parameters operations under Intelligent function module parameter are allowed for one Intelligent function module utility only Only the Monitor test operation is allowed for the other utilities Switching between two or more Intelligent function module utilities When two or more Intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side select a screen to be displayed on the top of others using the task bar FE Start MELSOFT series GX Deve Intelligent function Module JA Intelligent function W 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 6 Number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator SC When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of parameter settings must not exceed the following limit When intelligent function modules are Maximum number of parameter settings installed to Initial setting Auto refresh setting aoosaooaoaceu iT 256 aozaozHiaosHiatzHiazsHopu 52 26 O
392. meters B Flash ROM data C Data created by Make text file and saved 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 System Registration to Flash ROM Purpose Display the menu screen for flash ROM registration which is used to change the initial values set in the Q series C24 s buffer memory Operating procedure e Online operation Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or later Online gt Monitor Test Select monitor test module gt Monitor Test Monitor screen Startup from the system monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer Diagnostics System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt gt Monitor screen e Offline operation Tools Flash ROM setting Flash ROM setting screen Setting screen Screen displayed during online operation 1 Screen displayed during offline operation lolx Flash ROM setting r Module information S 7 Module type Serial Communications Module StatI ONo 0000 petalis se Module modelname QJ71C24N Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Current value Setting value Module model name QU7IC24 N CHT ERR occurence m n ICH2 ERR occurrence Off L Turning off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test
393. mmand was designated 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Signal Hexa Error Description name decimal Device No error e The head device No is out of range e The written CPU model name and the CPU monitor name in the monitor request are different Monitor CPU model name error Written number of monitoring points overrun error e The written number of monitoring points exceeds the designated range e Anonexistent extension file register block No was designated e A block No being used as an extension comment area sampling trace area or status latch area was designated The OS of th ies C24 detected mAN some error e A write command was designated when Disable write during RUN was set Parameter or sequence program was written during RUN Extension R block No error Cannot execute a command during RUN o O The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Unusable command e An unusable command is issued to the error access target CPU The written monitor network No and the monitor request network No are different The OS of th ies C24 detected fs some error PC No designation e APC No other than FF or O to 120 error 00x to 78x was designated The OS of th ies C24 detected ia some error e The received message length has exceeded the allowable range some error data error monitor data was written some error Programmable co
394. mory Reception error causing data RUN Receive data A o mea count storage 3 Receive oo SCO el area 00n 03x Head data complete code bad data 411 021 stx a B c pD Ef F c H ETx INPUT storage area C B H 02H 411 425 43H 44 45x 461 47x 48 031 instruction 43 42 lt E iD is 45x 1 441 Transmission data External device RS 232 i Th Q series C24 ready X1E Reception data read request X3 Reception abnormal detection X4 INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete device INPUT instruction complete device 1 normal completion abnormal completion Receive data count address 600n Receive data addresses 6011 to Receive data ERR LED lights up J Reception abnormal detection data Data reception x When the data from G to in the reception message shown in the figure above is received normally the data is stored in the Q series C24 OS area The receive data stored in the OS area will be read to the programmable controller CPU in the succeeding read operation 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete code settings The following default values have been set for the received data count and receive complete code that are used for data reception with the non procedure protocol The received data count and the receive complete code set
395. mounted on Directly connect the CPU or change the an extension base unit of the communication path so that it is routed Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU the through an intelligent function module communication path set in GX on the main base unit Refer to Section Developer is incorrect 2 5 In Transfer Setup of GX Developer select Not specified for Target system Refer to Section 2 5 writing to the flash ROM Communication with GX Configurator Write the data again to the flash ROM SC was interrupted during writing to the flash ROM e When data is written to the Check the procedure for writing data to Programmable controller the Q series the flash ROM and write the data to the C24 of the Intelligent Function Module flash ROM again tab is not set as a target memory on the Online Data Operation screen When using GX Works2 The data written to the flash ROM are not valid 11 55 11 55 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 22 Troubleshooting on the protocol setting data reading writing N i ce Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined In Protocol setting data error information buffer memory 4086H to 4089h locate the error part protocol No packet No or element No and correct it Check the protocol setting for an error paying attention to the following and write corrected data to the Q series C24 again 1 When an error was detected in the user edited protocol C
396. n Sum check is specified with the transmission setting in GX Developer it is necessary to add a sum check code at the end of the message 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks and processes the sum check code received It cannot be read from the sequence program When No sum check is specified once a data portion of message corresponding to the data length is received the succeeding data received will be ignored up to the control code that follows See a The following example shows the contents of a sum check code in the message 2 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The sum check code to be transmitted is calculated and added by the Q series C24 When No sum check is specified no sum check code is transmitted lt Arbitrary data _ _ gt Data gt Data length 000CH OCH OOH 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 4TH 48H 49H 4An 64H 00H Added value 03271 L b15 to b8 b7 to b1 bO 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q e Error code The error code indicates the definition of the error during NAK response For more details on the error codes see Chapter 11 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 For error codes from the external device transmit the codes specified by the user The error codes
397. n they are not used in the same channel e OUTPUT PRR INPUT BIDOUT BIDIN BUFRCVS CPRTCL If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the ONDEMAND instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2H occurs Except for the BUFRCVS instruction 10 4 10 4 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error 10 5 MELSEC Q 3 Whether an ONDEMAND instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ONDEMAND instruction e Normal completion Off with no change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t 7 Completion of reading user frame if Execution of ONDEMAND J by ONDEMAND instruction instruction ONDEMAND i I i instruction i ON l i Completion device geeen O A oaae i y Abnormal i i i i i ON completion at completion Normal completion lt lt One scan i i Status di
398. n Xoff control Ce E EEE DTR DSR control eee control XIXIXIXIX Mode switching noe a l al eal Data ransmission reception at low speed transmission speed 60 o O rE cowicRSRTS aWENDT priser E Control of RS RTS and ER DTR signal states e Pe Data communication monitoring time a Se E E ES E E EA Monitoring testing of initial settings ar and values with utility package C YP a oe ee ee GX Developer and GOT connection enn ons Sar mote SiwET O Support for multiple CPU system Communication with non control CPU using the MC protocol Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame ASCII code Formats 1 to 4 ae Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame binary code Fomt5s o olx Multiple CPU setting using GX Developer I O assignment switch setting interrupt pointer setting x etc App 2 App 2 APPENDICES App 3 gt x x2 4 x5 x6 MELSEC Q Usable Usable Model serial no limited Usable There is restriction on serial no of the Q series C24 or programmable controller CPU that can use the function For version verification see section 2 7 The data reception using format 0 refers to the method of receiving data by user frame which was supported in the Q series C24 of function version A The Q series C24 of function version A is capable of setting one pair of transparent code and additional code per interface for both transmission and reception This function c
399. n by specifying transparent code o lolo Specification of Receive transparentcode OO Specification of Transmission transparent 1st 3 o olo Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th o Jof amp Reception data clear by dedicated instruction CSET instruction App 1 App 1 OJO O APPENDICES MELSEC Q function version Function R4 a a Communication using bidirectional protocol Data transmission reception in any format HHH Data reception by interrupt programs Oo lolo ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion o lolo Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Specification of Receive transparent code o lolo Specification of Transmission transparent 1st 3 o ey a Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th cme keane a Communication using pre defined protocol Execution of the protocol selected from the pre defined protocol library A gt X Eeuton orie created or eatea powa aoj net rin on a Cae a SIENE Registration of user frame for data communication Registration of changeable data added 05n OB 111 and 17H gt Registration of changeable data added 04n and OAH _ Registration of changeable data added E5x and EBn pee ft Communication via public network etc modem function Automatic initialization of modem petals Remote password check gt o DC code control including Xo
400. n is incorrect transmission setting condition agreement The cycle time is affected by some Remove the causes or designate the transmission setting causes cycle time anticipating the causes 11 3 20 Data cannot be received due to by an interrupt program Bidirectional Pre Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure protocol defined protocol Interrupt issuance was not designated e Designate interrupt issuance e Receiving by instruction other than Use BUFRCVS instruction to receive BUFRCVS interrupt data the interrupt program setting or Interrupt pointer setting system setting Interrupt pointer are not set on the programmable setting on the programmable controller controller CPU side or the settings are CPU side incorrect Cannot receive data with e Parameter setting PC system Review Parameter setting PS 11 54 11 54 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 21 Data cannot be written to the flash ROM Bidirectional Symptom Cause Corrective action recone Pre defined protocol not set to allow to allow the switch settings by GX Developer setting by GX Developer e When a multiple CPU system is used a e Connect GX Configurator SC to the target CPU is specified in Multiple CPU control CPU of the Q series C24 and setting of Transfer Setup in GX save the system setting data to the flash e Cannot write data to Developer ROM Flash ROM e When the Q series C24 is
401. n ovo fo oo For system Buffer memory address 202 Information of CH2 side SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK ACK NEU CH2 ERR CH1 ERR 2 H W SW Information Parameter The switch information of the Q series C24 is displayed Numbers 1 through 5 correspond to switches 1 through 5 shown in Section 4 5 2 See Section 4 5 2 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Checking by GX Configurator SC Have the Monitor test others screen displayed For displaying the screen see Section 9 6 10 of the User s Manual Basic 4 LED ON status and communications error status Status Description when ON Description when OFF Related protocol Initial signal Description when LED is turned when LED is turned state MC Non Bidirectional Pre name on off 0 procedure protocol defined 1 oe Waiting for data er 1 SDWAIT Transmission wait status oS Data transmission start OFF transmission OFF Overrun or framing error occurred 2 SIO SIO error status OS area is full Received data was deleted 13 PRO Character error status Normal OFF Status of parity error or 4 P S Error occurred Normal OFF sum check error Access status with the 5 C N programmable controller 1 Normal OFF CPU NAK Abnormal completion Abnormal completion Normal completion OFF status transmission transmission Normal completion Abnormal completion ACK Normal completio
402. n status eae ae OFF transmission transmission Neutral status Waiting to receive Neutral Command reception command Error occurrence status on Switch setting error CH2 ERR Mode switching error Transmission error Reception error Error occurrence status on On demand error 10 CH1 ERR CH1 side Flash ROM write error Flash ROM write count over limit error x1 C N turns on in the following cases e An external device issued a data read request to the programmable controller CPU when write during RUN is set to prohibit in the switch settings by GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 For functions that cannot be used when write during RUN is set to prohibit see the explanation section in each command list of the Reference Manual When an error has occurred during access between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU x2 NEU is valid when a target interface is set to use the MC protocol When the target interface is set to other than the MC protocol the status of NEU is off 11 4 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 b c d MELSEC Q When a communication error occurs take corrective action according to Section 11 3 The initial status of the LED ON and communications error indicates the status when the Q series C24 starts up by turning on the power or resetting the programmable controller CPU Each of the communications error status C N to SIO CH1 ERR and CH2 ERR turns on when an error o
403. n the designation of the no e Designate the no communication Section 3 3 6 communication interval time interval time in the range of 0 to 120 Pi Clear the A lated t of unlock The number of remote password mismatch exceeded fe eee ee ee ie pyres process abnormal completion Section 3 3 3 the value designated at the address 200Du processing address 22FCu to 0 Callback denial exceeded the value designated at the e Clear the callback denial accumulated Section 3 3 4 address 20021 count address 22F 11 to 0 we x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom The following table lists the troubleshooting of trouble generated d
404. nal line 7FD8x The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Lele 1 After the modem has been initialized Section 3 4 6 Section 3 4 7 External destination is connected to network or connect to the network if the external destination is not connected to the network or report it Designate a registered number for the Section 3 3 6 data for connection Section 3 4 6 modem has not been initialized for connection Developer connection There is an error in the data for connection designated connection designation Recheck the waiting time for the notification message part of the message Section 3 4 4 transmission e Recheck the telephone number in the data for connection Check if the destination is ready for a connection by the data number for connection Section 3 3 6 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 4 A connection time out error occurred Modern 3 Recheck the set value of the function E connection time out Recheck the initialization command Check if there is any problem with the modem TA by seeing the operation manual of the modem TA Connect the modem TA to the Q series C24 Check the connection cable by seeing the operation manual of the modem TA Check if the Q series C24 is faulty or not talking the procedure shown under 1 Modem connection channel number is not designated z Set 1 to 2 to the modem connection Designated value of modem connection channel is Section 3 3 6
405. nation This function allows the designation of the available capacity of the OS area that notifies the data reception failure at the time of transmission control DTR DSR signal control and DC code control User s Manual Application Addition of changeable data to the user frame 05H OBH 11H 17H Addition of changeable data to the user frame 04H OAH E5H EBH Adding a reception function through the use of user frames These functions allow the following codes to be registered as the changeable data of user frames for data communication Horizontal parity code Sum check code of two s complement number This function allows reception of a message consisting of the head frame and any data field when receiving data by specifying the head frame The data length of the data field can be specified freely for each combination of user frames for reception set by the user Receiving 1 byte providing ACK NAK only is also possible by setting the data length of the data field to 0 User s Manual Application User s Manual Application Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission Switching to the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode This function allows specification of a maximum of 10 types of transparent codes for transmission per interface when sending data using one of the following protocols Non procedure protocol e Bidirectional pr
406. nd receive processing is performed using dedicated instructions OQUTPUT INPUT X23 pf P_ rg mi5 Reception Reception clear clear request request pulse M15 SET M6 Reception clear Reception request pulse clear acknowledgement COOS OSOE lt Execute reception clear processing gt M16 M11 M12 M7 M18 1 X3 X4 1 af if H H H T HO HOA8 K1 K1 Reception OUTPUT INPUT Clearing Comuni Reception Reception clear in execution in execution reception cation read request abnormal acknowledgement i disable detection 1 SET M17 Clearing reception lt Execute reception clear processing gt M17 FROM HO HOA8 DO K1 Clearing reception DO KO RST M16 Reception clear acknowledgement RST M17 Cleaning reception fn aaa aaa a SET 18 i H Communication i disable 1 M18 H K10 o 1 T100 1 1 i Communi r cation 3 1 disable 1 l T100 i s m8 i 1 Communication disable i M16 M7 M18 9 Reception Clearing Communication Communication clear reception i disable i able acknowledgement 777777 1 prorat x1 Add the dotted line portion to the sequence program when the function version A Q series C24 is used Carry out communications when M19 is ON 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 5 How to detect reception errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device The
407. nel is within the tolerance range x A linked operation setting check is performed when values are set as follows e Communication protocol setting on the CH1 side 8H e Operation setting in the transmission settings on the CH2 side bit 0 ON Procedure 3 Checking results of ROM RAM switch tests 1 The test is completed when the NEU LED on CH1 side is lit approximately 2 seconds 2 The test is completed normally when the ERR LED turns off 3 The test is completed with error when the ERR LED turns on Check the error description in one of the following screens e The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 9 6 10 The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for the operation method When checking errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the following buffer memory Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Address CH1 side CH2 side CH1 CH2 side Description when corresponding bit is on Corrective action Bit location 2014 2024 2031 b1 sio When linked operation ee F Review setting value b2 PRO setting Protocol setting error E 2 see Section 4 5 2 poss Wren independent po NT __ operation setting Protocol setting error b5 to b es oo o y w l Test completed Oooo l b8 to b13
408. ng Format DO D4 0 szReadData else MessageBox Show String Format Read Error 0x 0 x8 HEX __box iRet POPP ETEEEREER TES CAP RENT II Disconnection PREP ES ERERER READ SENS CH private System Void button3_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet Disconnection iRet axActEasylF 1 gt Close if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The disconnection was successful else MessageBox Show String Format Disconnection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX __box iRet App 31 App 31 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 3 When Visual Basic 6 0 is used Private Sub Command_1_Click tkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Connection tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Get LogicalstationNumber ActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn ActEasylF1 Open If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Read tkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Long Dim idata 5 As Integer DO D4 are read rtn ActEasylF 1 ReadDeviceBlock2 D0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox DO D5 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Su
409. ng QCPUs in a multiple CPU system using the MC protocol or through GX Developer it is possible to perform data communication such as reading writing device data by specifying the QCPU to be accessed e When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system a QCPU controlling the Q series C24 hereinafter abbreviated as the control CPU should be specified using GX Developer It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A ina multiple CPU system and access to the only control CPU CPU No 1 External device Q series C24 Peripheral device control CPU Communication through GX Developer Communication using MC protocol aaa Q series C24 Setting from non control CPUs 1 CPU No 1 GX Developer 2 CPU No 2 3 CPU No 3 4 CPU No 4 1 Module controlled by CPU No 1 2 Module controlled by CPU No 2 b When a Q series C24 CPU of function version B is used in a multiple CPU system the following forms of data communication can be performed with the Q series C24 1 It is possible to perform data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols from the control CPU 2 It is possible to read the buffer memory from non control CPUs Input output signals can be used as contacts External Non control CPU Control CPU Q series C24 device FROM TO instruction Buffer memory gt Dedicated instruction Data communication FROM instruction
410. ng the protocol Protocol setting data Executable with one dedicated instruction Simply registered in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q For details refer to the following manual Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function A protocol used in the pre defined protocol function is a means for communicating with an external device It comprises of the following information e Packet element packet format e Packet data e Communication type Send only Receive only or Send and receive The function cannot be used when the QJ71C24N R2 R4 is used with the following modules e Redundant CPU e C Controller module e MELSECNET H remote I O station 2 Numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered The following are the maximum numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered e Protocols Up to 128 e Packets Up to 256 Once a protocol is registered a packet determined for each protocol is registered to the packet data area Because of this the available number of protocols is 127 or less when 1 The number of registered packets reached the maximum 256 2 The usage rate of the packet data area reached 100 The usage rate of the packet data area can be confirmed in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function Note that the usage rate of the packet data
411. ng value you wish to change then change the default value as explained in Chapter 9 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the serial communication modules unless otherwise specified 1 Generic terms and abbreviations of relevant modules In this manual the following generic terms and abbreviations are used to indicate the programmable controller CPU and other modules used for the data communication functions of the serial communication modules Module model names are provided when relevant model names are needed to be shown Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation The abbreviation for QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and QJ71C24 R2 type Q series C24 C24 serial communication modules Indicated as C24 in the diagrams A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 A1SJ71QC24N and A1SJ71QC24N R2 QC24 N A generic term for QC24 and QC24N Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU Redundant CPU A generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU A generic term for the QQQUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU QO03UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDVCPU Universal model QCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A generic term for the QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDVCPU Built in Ethern
412. nication modules in the QnA series and the installation of the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting screen The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are available in the serial communication modules for QnA series Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N The data communication between the QnACPU and external devices as well as other QnACPUs which has been performed in the QC24 N can also be performed by the Q series C24 The following explains how to use programs designed for QC24 N during data communication using the Q series C24 1 The communication programs directed to the QC24 N on the external device side and the communication programs on the QnACPU self station side to which the QC24 N is mounted can be used for the Q series C24 However note the following points e There is no function that allows data communication with other station s programmable controller CPUs by a data link instruction Delete the part of data communication program by data link instructions e When using a new function create a new program 2 Make sure to check operation when using communication programs for QC24 N on th
413. nnel If the transmitted data and the received data are the same transmit and receive processing is performed normally When two Q series C24 are available set one Q series C24 to the non procedure protocol and the other Q series C24 to the MC protocol and transmit an MC protocol message from the non procedure protocol station If the MC protocol station returns the transmit message normally transmit and receive processing is normal 11 52 11 52 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 16 Communication is not available via the modem Non Bidirectional Symptom Cause Corrective action procedure olodi Pre defined protocol p AE EAEN Check the error code and execute A modem initialization error occurs A processing accordingly PEPE TRES Modem connection channel designation Set Modem connection channel Auto modem initialization is not performed designation cannot be executed REVWA ETE Saati _ Review the switch settings Set it to There is an error in the switch settings in f g Si the local station modem and the the GX Developer Communication protocol setting is Set the communication protocol to MC Data cannot be incorrect protocol format 5 communicated with GX Transmission setting does not match the 3 e Review the transmission setting Developer supporting the external device Q series C24 Communication rate does not match the external device The product is no
414. nse monitoring time shown in the illustration is described in the User s Manual Application POINT When the transmission control see User s Manual Application is performed and the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation sets that the receive data is valid and transmission data is valid the Q series C24 performs message transmission and message reception processing as described below During message transmission processing time check by timer 1 response monitoring time is performed 1 Message transmission 1 1 in the illustration If the Q series C24 receives a terminate transmission request DC3 received DR DSR signal OFF from the external device during message transmission it terminates data transmission e When the Q series C24 receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DR DSR signal ON it restarts data transmission 2 Message reception If the Q series C24 cannot send a response message to the external device in response to message reception because the external device issued a terminate transmission request DC3 received DR DSR signal OFF it transmits the response message after it receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DR DSR signal ON from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 4 Data Communications Precautions The following are the precautions when performing data communications using the bidirectional protoc
415. ntents Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 8 1 3 POINT Section 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 Section 3 1 3 6 3 9 Section 4 2 4 4 1 2 a Figure 4 6 1 Chapter 5 all Section 6 1 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 Section 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 2 2 Section 8 1 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 Section 9 2 to 9 7 Section 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 8 10 3 18 Appendix 1 1 2 Appendix 2 all Appendix 3 2 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Addition Entire manual add the explanation on MELSECNET H remote I O station The Manual s Use and Structure Section 2 1 Section 3 1 Table Section 4 4 2 1 d 4 9 2 Section 8 3 2 POINT Section 7164H 7E70H Appendix 3 1 Jun 2001 SH NA 080006 C Put Windows base software product together from Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEC Series to Mitsubishi integrated FA Software MELSOFT Series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to Product name GX Developer Standardize the name from utility package QSCU to Product name GX Configurator SC Correction Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Program Examples Section 6 1 4 6 2 3 Section 7 2 3 Section 9 3 9 5 Appendix Section 1 2 1 d 1 2 4 b Diagram 1 2 8 b 1 3 Section 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 7 Section 3 1 Table 3 2 1 3 3
416. ntroller access Monitor network No error Frame length error 71544 System error e CPU model name cannot be confirmed error 714Cu e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error 11 19 MELSEC Q Non made Corrective action Bidire C Proce ctional dure e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications or data write e Monitoring was requested before the e Write the device to be monitored before device to be monitored was written issuing a monitor request or PC No e The written PC No and PC No in the CIN le Rewrite the monitor data monitor request are different e Rewrite the monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Correct the designated block No and restart data communications e Change the setting to Enable write during RUN and restart data communications e Stop the CPU and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications If no error is found in the command clear the programmable controller CPU information and retry Refer to Section 11 1 7 Check and correct the other station access valid module No in the network parameters Rewrite the monitor data e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Review the transmission message
417. nual Application 4 w Programmable controller access from GX Developer DC code control including Xon Xoff control DTR DSR control Independent linked operation of each interface Section 4 5 2 Monitoring testing of initial settings and setting values with utility software Chapter 9 Supporting multiple CPU system Reference Manual Remote password check o Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface Section 3 3 4 x1 If the external device is capable of incorporating a program and communicating data using a protocol of a MELSEC programmable controller it is possible to access the programmable controller CPU using the MC protocol Communication of any data is also available using the bidirectional protocol Transmission control 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 MELSEC Q When the protocol of an external device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader must be used data communication is available by the non procedure protocol or pre defined protocol e Data communication by non procedure protocol Using user frames makes send receive data processing easy e Data communication by pre defined protocol The protocol of the external device can be simply selected created or edited on the screen of GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function This can eliminate some communication control programs appropriate to the external device reducing the steps for creating sequence programs 3 SPECIFIC
418. o 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Communication error clear request for CH1 No request and to tum LED off Request1 SI0 PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED Request2 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED Request3 Al CH2 SD WAIT status SIO status OFF PRO status P S status C N status NAK status r Flash ROM setting Details Write to Save fil Current value Monitoring module HL display Select input Read from i 5 z module Loadfile EOE Request Request2 Request3 No request Stop monitor Execute Close 1 Display the Monitor test others screen 2 Select any of Request 1 to 3 for Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off Setting range Target of LED off communication error information initialization Request 1 SIO PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED 1 Request 2 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED Request 3 All of Requests 1 and 2 x1 The ERR LED is turned off However it is not turned off if an error has occurred on either the CH1 or CH2 side 3 Click on Execute test 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear This section explains how to clear the received data using the non procedure protocol By using this function the receive data can be cleared from GX Configurator SC while the communication with the non procedure protocol is sti
419. ode Code type Data length Data flow Complement calculation or Calculating e The length of the received data F29 Data length error exceeds the receive area size Q series C24 to byte units e Increase the receiving area of the Q series C24 e No reception watchdog timer timer 0 7F40u F time out occurred Time out error P e Response watchdog timer timer 1 7F41H 3 time out occurred e Transmit watchdog timer timer 2 time 7F42u AG out occurred transmission 7F50u to 7F54u Svstari eror e The OS of the Q series C24 detected 1 7F60u y some error to 7F66H e Decrease the data transmission rate and restart data communications e The Q series C24 received the next ene Wnether a temporary stop has 7F67 Overrun error data before it completed receive Secured inthe stationin which the Q i cnet ar tie pinta data series C24 is installed For the QOPU P 9 P this can be checked using special register SD1005 If a temporary stop has occurred remove its cause range of the check code e Another command was received before Perform the communication after the 7F264 Command error an unlock processing while the remote unlock processing is normally password is registered completed 11 26 11 26 e Process by agreement with the external device e When necessary change the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation setting by GX Configurator SC address 9Bx 13Bx e Check if data was dropped from the
420. odel name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 ERR occurrence Off CH2 ERR occurrence Off Tuming off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Off Clear request X CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request X XZY monitor test XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans control monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor X Flash ROM setting Write to 2 TAR Save file Read from 5 modile Load file Details Current value Monitoring display Select input Make text file Setingrange ooo Clear request Off Start monitor Stop monitor Execute rR Close 1 Display the Monitor Test screen 2 Select Clear request for CHO ERR clear request 3 Click on Execute test 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 2 Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off on Monitor test others screen This is used to turn off the CHO LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the communication error information The CHO LED on status and communication error information can be confirmed on the Monitor test others screen Operation procedure Bax Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 N
421. oes not clear the user data reception area in the buffer memory 2 Ifthe CSET instruction is executed while the reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 3 Simultaneous execution of dedicated instructions The following table lists the handling for when executing another instruction during execution of the CSET instruction or executing the CSET instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of simultaneous Handling of simultaneous execution execution ONDEMAND Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later BIDOUT However simultaneous execution is available when channels to Instruction 1 BIDIN be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of INPUT CSET e Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOn occurs in the CSET instruction the right column However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same When instructions are executed in order of CSET INPUT e Simultaneous execution is available e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction has been completed However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same CSET PUTE GETE as ISPBUSY UINI
422. of addresses and special application areas of the buffer memory e Input output signals for handshake e Dedicated instructions of the programmable controller CPU 1 Initial settings for special application area in buffer memory 1 Inthe Q series C24 the addresses for special application areas in the buffer memory are different from those of UC24 C24 S8 The Q series C24 has more initial setting items The setting method is different such that the settings are performed using the utility package GX Configurator SC 2 Register necessary initial setting values according to Chapter 8 3 The default value for the CD terminal check setting is changed to No check 2 Data communication using the MC protocol identical to the communication functions of the dedicated protocol of UC24 C24 S8 a Communication protocol setting Data communication is performed using an A compatible 1C frame by setting the communication protocol setting of the Q series C24 specified by GX Developer to the same form as set in the mode setting switch of UC24 C24 S8 App 12 App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q b Command message and response message 1 The message format used in the data communication using the A compatible 1C frame is the same as the message format of UC24 C24 S8 2 Check available commands and devices that can be accessed in the Reference Manual and access the programmable controller CPU from the external device 3 For the QCPU on
423. ogram executes the INPUT instruction and reads the receive data Before executing the INPUT instruction check that the INPUT instruction complete device MO is off 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 The device completing the INPUT instruction turns ON when the reading of receive data is completed When the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When the Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F x3 MO move KI DO J Designate the receive channel X4 i r q Clear the reception result and receive data count LEONE 1KO pi 7 J storage device to 0 wove K10 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count G INPUT UO DO D10 MO J With normal completion the receive data within ii the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the 1 i ov K 7 buffer memory s Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user Bwov D10 D110 KOZO J designated read completion signal MO turns ON for 1 scan Mi g _ The reading of receive data and switching of the SET moo ON OFF status are performed by the programmable controller CPU X100 H RST M100 q The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command Q series C24 Address ___ Buf
424. oi DR DSR s i Lise When using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter to connect the external device and the Q series C24 use a converter that is compatible with the external device and programmable controller CPU system configuration 1 1 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Connection examples a Connection example with an external device capable of turning on and off the CD DCD signal No 1 pin Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name CD DCD 1 CD DCD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD ER DTR 4 ER DTR SG 5 SG DR DSR 6 DR DSR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS CI RI 9 x The CD terminal check setting is set according to the specification of the external device When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed b Connection example with an external device not capable of turning on and off the CD DCD signal No 1 pin 1 Connection example 1 Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name CD DCD 1 CD DCD RD RXD 2 m OR SD TXD 3 SD TXD 4 ER DTR 5 SG DR DSR 6 DR DSR RS RTS ic RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS CI RI 9 x When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed 2 Connection example 2 Q series C24 Signal name Pin No CD
425. ol 1 When the transmission sequence is in the initial status it indicates that data transmission and reception processing has not been started The Q series C24 transmission sequence is initialized in the following cases The power is turned on the CPU is reset e When operating or the mode is switched e When a response message ACK NAK etc was received in reply to data transmission e When a response message ACK NAK etc was transmitted in reply to data reception When the CD DCD signal was turned off during data communications using Check CD terminal in full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface As a data transmission procedure data transmission from the external device or the Q series C24 should be performed after a response for the immediately preceding data transmission has been received The external device and programmable controller CPU must agree so that the units of the data length word count byte count in the message to be transmitted and received is the same The programmable controller CPU units can be set using the GX Configurator SC word byte units designation Make the length of the data area in the message to be transmitted and received the size of the Q series C24 buffer memory transmission data designation area and receive data storage area or less NAK code response 1 Response from the Q series C24 to external device After the error detection message reception complete i
426. om the menu bar Fie save Fie read Close See Section 9 4 Module type Select the module type and To each setting screen module model name Module model name OJ7IC24N Cancel Module model name QJ71C24 N User frame AmE p Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Setting item Setting value The data which can be changed is shown by Hif and the following byte Please specify the registering part of registering a 5 bytes of data STX 02H C24 E TX 03H User frame 1 H0368 2 H03e9 3 H03ea 4 HO3eb 5 HO3ec a i The various setting values to be registered in the Q series ae C24 s flash ROM can be saved in a file of the personal computer via offline operation Use online operation to write system setting values to the oe Q series C24 See Sections 9 4 1 to 9 4 11 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 When using online operation 2 When setting auto refresh Select Online Monitor Test from the menu bar Enter Start I O No and select Module type and Module model name Select monitor test module screen Auto refresh setting screen Select monitor test module E Auto refresh setting Bee Select monitor test module Module information Start 1 0 No Module type Module type Ser
427. ommand M10 e Receive clear command pulse signal M15 e Receive clear acceptance flag cee eeeeeeeeneeneeteeeneeenteees M16 Receive clearing fag cccsccccccescesseeseeeeeeseeneeeneeeneeeneeeses M17 e Communication disable flag ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeneeees M18 Communication enable flag 0 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenreenteees M19 e Completion check flag cecceceeceeeneeeeeeeneseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaes M20 e Receive clear processing execution status acquisition COMMA E E A E A E E E E E M21 e Receive clear processing execution status judgment COMMA ata site oan EEEE EE E E T M22 Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO Tals a0 0 0 0 rer M200 M201 e Receive data clear request area information 0 DO Clear regestis acuan aeae aia D1 Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Setting Switch No Description Position saps ae value value a bits i 07C0H bit n b8 to b15 sn seg ts Stationo 0000 c Buffer memory settings used in this example ei etree Deomal tedeoma nme a Name value 168 A8H Receive data clear request App 46 App 46 APPENDICES lt Receive clear command gt 2 Program example 1025 PLS a i SET 1 L r t M16 M17 l M18 X1000 X1001 X1003 X1004 Y1000 Y1001 PLS Lee I lt Receiv
428. ommunication with an external device for which transmission receive control programming is allowed data communication is performed in a sequence of data transmission and response receipt b Error check of received data can be performed using the sum check code while the occurrence of a reception error at an external device can be checked via an ACK NAK response oooooo g ENQ Data length Any data Sum checkcode Sending completed normally Errorcode Sending completed abnormally c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function ASCII QCPU Q series C24 cg ASCII BIN conversion Binary data 1 VERVIEW L MELSEC Q 4 Data communication using the pre defined protocol Details Chapter 8 the Operating Manual Pre defined protocol support function a Data can be transferred by using a protocol for the external device GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function allows simple protocol setting required for communication with the external device thermal regulator barcode reader etc A protocol can be selected from the pre defined protocol library or newly created and edited Communication control programs appropriate to the target device such as programs for creating send packets and analyzing receive packets can be elimina
429. ompletion 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit i 22FFH disconnection CH1 CH2 communication protocol status 1 252H 262H Section 4 5 2 Transmission status 1 253H 263H Section 9 6 3 RS 232 control signal status 1 2541 264H Section 11 1 Transmission sequence status 1 255H 265H On demand execution result 256H 266H Sections 9 6 4 to 9 6 6 Data transmission result 257H 267H f Section 11 1 Data reception result 258H 268H MC protocol transmission error code 25AH 26AH Receive user frame nth 25BuH 26BuH Section 9 6 5 User frame being transmitted B6H 156H User s Manual Application rao Operation status 2204H 2304H PLC CPU monitoring A arei Execution result 2205H 2305H Section 9 6 8 unction Number of transmission 2206H 2306H User s Manual Application Monitoring condition arrival block No 2207H 2307H Pre defined protocol function error code 4042H 4052H Section 11 2 1 x1 See Section 11 1 for the contents of the buffer memory 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Devices a Set the word device of the programmable controller CPU which stores information in the setting item field when using the auto refresh function between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU b The devices used must be of the types X Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR If bit devices of types X Y M L or B are used a number that can be divided by 16 points e g X30 Y120 M16
430. on 3 Clear the reception data by GX Configurator SC see Section 9 7 When transmitting data to an external device from the Q series C24 do not execute a clear request of the reception data shown in this section If a reception data clear request is executed when transmitting data to an external device The Q series C24 stops data transmission and terminates the dedicated instruction for transmission abnormally The transmission completed signal does not go ON If a reception data clear request is executed during data reception the data received up to that point are cleared 1 Receive data clear processing The Q series C24 performs the following procession when the receive data clear is performed The data received up to that point can be ignored The receive data count up to that point is 0 The receive area in the buffer memory is not initialized e Set to the status prior to the start of data reception Procedure for clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET This instruction clears the reception data up to the present without interrupting the data transmission processing Procedure for clearing In case of the CH1 side interface 1 Execute the CSET instruction If the CSET instruction is executed while the reception data read request X3 XA or reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 2 The reception
431. on for confirmation of registration No MELSEC Q Reference Registration g section For confirmation of modem function 551 to 552 227H to 228H 0 No registration 1 Registered Bit corresponding to registration No is O OFF 1 ON Registration No 9C4H 2500 Address 227H b0 to Registration No 9E1H 2529 Address 228H b13 Number of notification execution Depends on registration status 553 229h 0 Not executed 1 or more Number of executions Notification execution data No 0 Notification not executed BB8H to BD5h 8001H to 801 FH Notification executed notification execution No Section 9 6 2 554 22An 555 to 557 22BH to 22DH 558 to 561 22EH to 2314 562 to 565 232H to 235H Data storage area 1 Not allowed Chapter 3 of User s Manual For Application confirmation of notification status System area use prohibited Data storage area 2 Data storage area 3 566 to 569 236H to 239H Data storage area 4 570 to 573 23An to 23DH Data storage area 5 574 to 590 Pe The configuration of each area is the same as the data storage area 1 For confirmation of Station No instruction setting station No setting status Section 4 5 2 Not allowed Section 9 6 3 Section 11 1 6 Depends on module status 591 24FH Communication protocol status switch setting 0 GX Developer connection 1 MC protocol format 1 2 MC protocol format 2 3 M
432. on Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 10 16 10 16 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Operation during execution of a BIDOUT instruction END END processing MELSEC Q END END Sequence processing program t I i BIDOUT instruction Execution of BIDOUT instruction processing processing Completion of transmission by BIDOUT 1 Completion device OFF Status display device OFF at completion Error Normal completion i One scan i 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 Program example The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the bidirectional protocol When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F 10 17 X20 H PLS W50 H Mov ABCDEFG Hov HOAOD uov KI Hov KO s K5 Fr BDU uo DO DiI HO Mi f WF SET m H Woy
433. on he 5 f Transmission receipt buffer settings out receipt buffer setting of range error Write to Flash ROM was requested 7EC5 Flash ROM access when the setting modification error enable disable switch in GX Developer was set to OFF 7EC6 Flash ROM access e There is an error in the Flash ROM Terror read write request contents The OS of th ies C24 detected aoe some error Interlock handshake the send requests Make the transmission data count smaller than the transmit buffer size Make the non procedure protocol transmit buffer size larger Designate the first address and size of transmission receipt buffer in the free area range of the user When writing to Flash ROM set switch shown left of the given interface to ON and restart the Q series C24 e Check the read write request data and designate the correct data 1 e Increase the transmission time by performing handshake with the external device etc e Perform handshake with the request source external device O e The next data was received before processing of the previous data was 7F01n Buffer full error completed issued for one channel 7F02 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected to System error sorienor 1 TFO6H e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received An odd number of bytes of data was received during d
434. on 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Application Section 9 6 4 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Application Section 9 6 11 CH2 ERR occurrence Section 11 1 2 ON Error occurring Section 9 6 2 Application Device number Y1 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD Y10 Y11 Y12 6 Y13 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 a oa Reference Signal description i section CH1 Transmission request ON Requesting transmission CH1 Reception data read completion ON Data read completed CH1 Mode switching request Pare Applicat ON Requesting switch ON Requesting error clear ON Requesting error clear 6 Connection request ON Requesting connection Use prohibited ON Requesting transmission ON Data read completed CH2 Mode switching request Applicati ON Requesting switch pplication Use prohibited Section 9 6 11 Section 11 1 2 Moden initialization request standby request ON Requesting initialization Section 9 6 2 Application Modem disconnection request ON Requesting disconnection Use prohibited Use prohibited Flash ROM read request ON Requesting Flash ROM write request ON Requesting Flash ROM system setting write request ON Requesting 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device Signal d ot ignal description number 9 P Reference section MELSEC Q ies Ref
435. on No g 104 PC No error transmit message and restart data set in the network parameters aoe communications Send again e Anerror was detected upon access to g 11H Mode error the programmable controller CPU Conduct individual station recovery test and check the Q series C24 Special function Check and correct the external device f e A special function module does not x module designation transmit message and restart data exist at the specified position o error communications e An error was detected upon access to a Check the error and take corrective action special function module at the specified according to the manual of the position corresponding module Special function module bus error N 11 30 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q e f an error occurs during A compatible 1C frame communications the Q series C24 adds a 2 character error code 00H to 10H 42H to the NAK code and returns the NAK code to the external device and stores the error code equivalent to QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame error code to buffer memory address 25AH CH1 or 26AH CH2 The exact error contents can be checked by reading the value stored to the buffer memory See Section 11 2 1 for a detailed description of the error codes 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Error code list while modem function is used The following table lists the error codes contents and corrective actions
436. on an extension base unit from GX Developer Therefore the pre defined protocol communication is not available Connect a personal computer with a communication path indicated below EMCC eke ECE O Main base unit Jefe B S ES 16 Extension base unit GX Configurator SC cannot be used Direct connection to the CPU Connection through an intelligent function module on the main base unit Through Ethernet module MELSECNET H module or CC Link module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Writing to the flash ROM e On the Transfer Setup screen of GX Developer select Not specified for Target system e A system switching during data writing may cause the data not to be written to the flash ROM Change the operation mode of the Redundant CPU to Separate mode before writing to prevent such situation from occurring If a system switching has occurred during data writing write the data to the flash ROM again 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 6 Use on MELSECNET H Remote I O Stations This section describes the use of the Q series C24 at a MELSECNET H remote I O station It is not necessary to read this section if the Q series C24 is used with the QCPU 1 System configuration Example Remote master station Remote I O station QJ71 QCPU LP21 25
437. on monitoring time timer 2 designation units 100ms __9En 43EH_ Word byte units designation G 1361 User s Manual Application RTS RS designation na DTR ER designation o o n asia User s Manual Application 7 7 7 Chapters 6 and 7 es 2030H to 2130H to la Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th User s Manual Application 2038H 2138H Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 F 1cm sectionssa 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 4 MC protocol monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data communication using the MC protocol Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO MC protocol monitor Monitor screen 9 43 9 43 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items Buffer ean a ee address Item cH Reference section Transmission sequence status On demand execution result Data transmission result Data reception result MC protocol transmission error code X00 CH1 Transmission normal ee X07 CH2 Transmission normal ee X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal ee ree e Chapter 11 X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal eres ure X09 CH2 Transmission processing in progress X1A CH1 Global a d X1B CH2 Global a d Y00 CH1 Transmission ee Y07 CH2 Transmission ee Buffer memory head address designation Data length designation remy 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC
438. on procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data Measure the noise When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the ERR clear request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data Measure the noise When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices Use DTR and DC control and perform data communications so that the buffer does not become full Perform RS CS control when the modem function is used If the Read Request signal was turned ON execute read immediately Recheck the CD DCD signal control of the external device Send while the CD DCD signal is ON Set no CD terminal checking and perform communication Transmit data after line connection processing on the interface side that uses the modem function 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal Description Error Protocol setting data e e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7FBCu 7FCOn to 7FC4u There is an error in the protocol setting that was edited in GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function The p
439. on system between the Q series C24 and the external device See Section 4 5 2 in this manual T A setting that automatically refreshes the Perform auto refresh setting status of the Q series C24 and error data to with GX Configurator SC the GX Configurator SC device See Sections 4 6 and 9 3 in this manual oo d It is possible to change setting values for various functions including special functions See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals See Chapter 9 Configure details of the pre defined protocol communication In GX Configurator SC configure or change the settings y e Transmission and reception for the data communication system Transmission and receive data See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using Communication using non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol MC protocol special functions Pre defined protocol see Chapter 6 see Chapter 7 see the Reference see the User s see Chapter 8 Manual Manual Application 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Part Names and Functions Part names of Q series C24 are shown below QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 1 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 4 RUN ERR 1
440. on used in the program examples of this section is shown below QJ71LP21 25 Remote master station 2 MELSECNETH H remote I O net network No 1 Control target pet QJ72LP25 25 Remote I O station Station No 1 x1 x2 App 37 It is assumed that the QJ71C24N is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the starting I O No is 0 Set the network parameters of the remote master station as below 1 Network type MNET H Remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000H 3 Network No 1 4 Total stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt R station M station lt R station a StationNo v id x x Points Stat End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End 1 64 1000 103F 64 oooo O03F 64 1000 103F 64 co00 _oO3F_ v 7 Refresh parameters Link side PLC side a Dev name Points Start End w name Points Start End Transfer SB SB 512 0000 DIFF B 512 0000 DIFF Transfer SW SW 512 0000 OFF wW 512 0000 O1FF Random cyclic Random cyclic LW Transferl Transfer2 Transfer3 Transfer4 Transfer5 Transfer tere 1000 103F 1000 103F trrrt E App 37 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Program example for interlocking the remote master station and remote I O station Interlocks should be applied to the programs according to th
441. onitoring time longer When accessing another station s CPU check if the routing parameters match e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error 1 some error e Do not issue continuous requests from the external device e Set the timer 1 monitoring time to the external device time out time e Make arrangements between the target device and programmable controller CPU so that mode switching is not executed during data transmission Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Recheck the frame No Write the frame beforehand Change the frame No and restart data communications Recheck the frame No Change the write destination to an unwritten frame No When overwriting delete the given No beforehand Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Set to ON at GX Configurator SC Set to ON at GX Developer Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code Signal N Hexa Error Description z Corrective action on Bidire name MC Proce decimal sure ctional defined e Cannot write to Flash ROM normally Ea e Re execute the write operation Flash ROM write z i 4 ror e Power is turned off during writing to CHn If the error is genera
442. onnection tkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Dim rtn As Integer Disconnection rtn AxActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub 2 When Visual C NET 2003 is used PP PEEESEAS REE EERE SERS RE Il Connection kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk private System Void button1_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet Get LogicalstationNumber axActEasylF 1 gt ActLogicalStationNumber Convert Tolnt32 textBox1 gt Text I Connection iRet axActEasylF1 gt Open if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The connection was successful else MessageBox Show String Format Connection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX _ box iRet App 30 App 30 APPENDICES MELSEC Q kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk II Read PPR private System Void button2_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet short sData 5 String szMessage String lpszarrData int iNumber String szReadData DO D4 are read iRet axActEasylF1 gt ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if iRet 0 lpszarrData new String 5 lpszarrData 0O DO D4 II Storage of data to display the results for iNumber 0 iNumber lt 5 iNumber lpszarrData iNumber sData iNumber ToString szReadData String Join lpszarrData MessageBox Show Stri
443. or damage to or deterioration of the product e To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw e Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product e Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions A CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring are completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attached e Perform correct pressure displacement crimp contact or soldering for external wire connections using the tools specified by the manufactures Incorrect connection may cause short circuits fir
444. or serial communication in order to achieve the data communication described below By using a modem terminal adapter a public line analog digital can be used for data communication with a remote location Programmable controller data collection change from the external devices See the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Programmable controller monitoring and control from the external devices See the User s Manual Application e Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications See Section 1 2 2 3 and 4 e Collection of measured data from a measuring device See Section 1 2 2 and 4 e Operation of a programmable controller CPU that is connected to a personal computer installed with GX Developer See the GX Developer Manual Collection of measured _ data QU71C24 R2 Programmable controller data ate TA collection change RD RD e Programmable controller monitoring and control from an external device ay e Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications GX Developer e File writing reading Collection of read data e Device monitoring testing x Being a convenient means of connection among different devices personal computers display devices printers etc the serial communication line is the most widely used medium on the market today 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Feat
445. orcode o x x x Programmable controller CPU monitoring Monitoring device error 2205 2305H function execution result Pre defined protocol function Sree 4042 4052 Pre defined protocol function error code x x x O 2 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 9 6 11 a When turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes By making the CHO ERR clear request on the Monitor Test screen the ERR LED of the Q series C24 turns off and the stored error codes are initialized b When initializing the communication error information By making the CHO LED off Communication error clear request on the Monitor test others screen the LEDs ERR NEU of the Q series C24 turn off and the communication error information is initialized 3 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by sequence program a Input signals used to notify of error occurrences and output signals used to initialize the error code Initialization of error code is continuously performed when ERR clear request YE YF is on The CHn side error information can be initialized by the LED off Communication error clear request address OH 1H By using the ERR clear request YE YF the error codes stored in the above buffer memory can further be initialized cleared However protocol execution logs are not cleared even if the ERR clear request YE YF is used
446. ork CC Link IE field network or MELSECNET H g Ai x In the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 mode other stations including the A QnA series programmable controller CPUs can be accessed during data link operation x The MC protocol is equivalent to the communication function using a dedicated protocol that is supported by the A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Data communication using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 6 and the User s Manual Application a Data can be transferred in any message formats that conform to the specifications of external devices measuring devices personal computers etc b Fixed or variable length messages can be received in accordance with the external device specifications e How to receive the variable length data The external device sends data by adding at the end of the message the end code data CR LF or any one byte data that is set for the Q series C24 e How to receive the fixed length data The external device sends the amount of data equivalent to the size of the end data that is set for the Q series C24
447. ormation of CH1 and CH2 Input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of QC24 Example of TO instruction or Ho HO HOCOFFOOFF K1 Writes OOFF to address 0x and COFFu 1 to address 1n Initialization requests are valid only when write operation is performed The initialization requests clear all data in the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202n at the same time Furthermore when initialization of error information on the CH1 and CH2 sides is requested ERR occurrence XE XF also turns off Data written to the communication error clear request and to turn LED off address 0H 1h is cleared after initialization processing If errors persist even after completion of the initialization processing the corresponding communication error information is stored again and the corresponding bit in the LED ON status and communication error status address 201H 202n turns on 1 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q c Examples of programs that initialize displayed LED and communication error information The following shows examples of a program that reads error codes when errors described in 1 above occur in an interface on the CH1 side and initializes the displayed LED and communication error information Incorporate the necessary part of the program Input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 1 When data is communicated using the MC protocol Reads LED and communic
448. ot communicate via modem e Cannot communicate viamodem communicate via modem em Section 11 3 16 e Cannot communicate with ISDN sub address 4 Section 11 3 17 e Does not operate in the cycle time designated in the The programmable controller CPU Section 11 3 18 ee ji constant cycle transmission setting monitoring function does not operate D i i th jelmed tedi in the designated cycle time E P93 ve operatgin the T oe esignai A Section 11 3 19 condition agreement transmission setting Cannot receive by an interrupt program C t write setti lue in flash ROM of the Q Cannot perform initial setting E P R S Rre Section 11 3 21 series C24 x1 Ifan error occurs while performing data exchange using the modem function described in the User s Manual Application first check the following items and confirm whether or not the error is caused by the modem TA connection If an error relating to the modem function is occurring perform necessary corrective actions for each cause according to the reference sections given below Check the ON OFF status of current I O signals of the Q series C24 Check the storage status for error codes related to the modem function See Sections 11 2 3 Check the ON OFF status of the DR terminal of the modem TA See the manual for the modem TA 11 34 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 35 MELSEC Q The following are precautionary notes when data are exchanged with an external device
449. otocol This function allows the GX Developer connection mode to be switched by an external device or the programmable controller CPU User s Manual Application User s Manual Application Communication data monitoring function This function allows the monitoring of communication data transmitted on the communication network of the Q series C24 and an external device Application Operating Manual Protocol FB support function UINI instruction Specification of station No 65 to 120 by MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only 1 14 The UINI instruction allows change of the mode transmission specifications and host station No of the Q series C24 This function allows to access station No 65 to 120 of CC Link IE Controller Network and CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Application Reference Manual 1 OVERVIEW Function Access to link direct device LW 10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C frame only Outline of function This function allows access to link direct device LW10000 or higher Supported module MELSEC Q QU71024N QU71024 R2 R4 R2 Supported protocol Non procedure Bi directional Reference Pre defined section Reference Manual Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register W10000 or higher using MC protocol QnA compatible 4C 3C 2
450. our plate terminals are included to connect the FG terminals of both stations See section 4 4 2 6 When connecting the plug in socket block to the QJ71C24N R4 be sure to confirm the layout of the socket block and then insert it into the RS 422 485 connector on the QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24N R4 RUN ERR ON iat oe lt 4 coll f BS CH2 0 7 RS 422 455 Braided shield wire SDA yma SDB yma RDA pm Roj I Plate terminal included with product SG puma yy ro L I 1 QJ71C24N R4 Connect the external device according to its specifications See Appendix 5 for the bend radius of the connection cable Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex communications The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 232 interface for full duplex communications 1 Connection precautions a For further information about the following items see the explanation in the applicable section in the User s Manual Application e Controlling the communication on the Q series C24 side by the extern
451. parent code designation 0 Allowed User s Manual 0000H No designation Rw Application 288 448 Other than 0000 Designated below 1201 1C01 Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Additional code b8 to b15 01H to FFH Additional code ASCII BIN conversion designation Section 9 4 5 449 For conversion Hee H 1C 1H designation 0 No conversion 1 Convert nee Echo back enable disable setting for RS 422 485 interface 450 control 1C2h specification 0 Enable echo back RW Allowed Section 3 3 4 Use prohibited System area 1 Disable echo back For 512 firmati f 200 KESE NOS Station No switch setting setting status LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side 0 LED OFF no error 1 LED ON error 513 SD WAIT b0 C N b4 201H SIO b1 NAK b5 Section 4 3 Eoi IA i cu i Not allowed Section 4 5 2 confirmation of For system b8 to b15 Secton 26 10 LED ON status LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side and 0 LED OFF no error 1 LED ON error communication SD WAIT b0 NAK b5 error status SIO b1 ACK b6 pee PRO b2 NEU b7 P S b3 CH2 ERR b14 C N b4 CH1 ERR b15 For system b8 to b13 3 28 3 28 User s Manual Application Depends on parameter n 2 n 2 gt 3 fe E i e nN kel i D Qo D a 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Initial Powod Ref nitia eference Decimal H
452. pletion of transmission 006 M300 M301 e Transmission data COUNL ccccccccsccesssseeeeessseeeessseeeeesaes D10 e Transmission data 5 Words cccesceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenreenteees D11 to D15 e Data transmission re Sult cccccccssccecssseeeeessseeeeesseeeeessaes D20 b Intelligent function module switch e on Refer to Section 4 5 2 f i Setting Switch No o n O Position Designated value value OFF Operation setting Independent oF Data bit __ofF __ Parity bit OFF Transmission Even odd parity ore setting Stop bit 07COH sun heckcous No b8 to b15 Non procedure protocol 00061 Switch 2 Communication protocol setting or or bidirectional protocol 0007H c Buffer memory settings used in this example ne etree ecm teedeoma nme oe Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation 162 A2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 04001 163 A3H Transmission buffer memory length designation 0200H 599 257 Data transmission result a App 44 App 44 APPENDICES 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt X1024 X1000 X1001 Y1000 aaa lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E mov ABCDEFGH MOV HOAOD vov K5 Z REMTO J1 KI KI HO H400 D10 K6 lt Transmission request gt M100 M101 SE M101 f SE lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 SE RS lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X10
453. pplication or Application MELSEC Q L Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application User s Manual Basic or Basic Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic Windows 7 A generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Starter operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Professional operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate operating system and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise operating system Note that the 32 bit version is specified as 32 bit Windows 7 and the 64 bit version is specified as 64 bit Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP A generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Business operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate operating system and Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise operating system A generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF TERMINOLOGY The following table lists the definitions and descriptions of terminology used in this manual and related manuals for the Q series serial communication modules Terms Description A compatible IC frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communic
454. ption data read completion Y1 x1 When unit is in bytes S s 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device 6 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows how to send data in any format using the non procedure protocol Programmable controller CPU Transmission data 02H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 03H Q series C24 Transmission area buffer memory Peri 10 data count 001 0An A STX Transmission 411 1 02 data C2253 43H 421 1 2 E D OUTPUT instruction 451 444 G i F 47n 46x ETX H 031 48x External device Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction completion device OUTPUT instruction 1 Transmission data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction 2 Control data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction 3 When the OUTPUT instruction is executed the Q series C24 sends the amount of data designated by the transmission data count from the transmission data area to the external device in ascending order of the transmission data area addresses 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE
455. put head pointer designation frame designation Output count designation Timeout at No protocol 2014H 2114H User s Manual Application 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 8 Bidirectional system setting Purpose For data transmission using the bidirectional protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Bidirectional system setting Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen CHO Bidirectional system setting Setting screen CH1 Bidirectional system setting 15 x m Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Send receive valid m Flash ROM setting m Details Write to Save file module 5 Select input pema Load file Send receive valid Send valid receive invalid Send invalid receive valid Send receive invalid Make text file Execute test Close Setting item It Buffer memory address Ref i em eference section Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Section 7 3 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 4 9 Pre defined protocol system setting Purpose For data communication using the pre defined protocol register system setting values Operating procedure e Onlin
456. r Online Transfer setup Perform Write to PLC for the intelligent function module parameters in a multiple CPU system only to the control CPU of the Q series C24 Use GX Developer to perform Read from PLC Write to PLC operations for the intelligent function module parameters at the remote I O station GX Configurator SC can not be used Checking the required utility While the start I O is displayed on the Intelligent function module utility setting screen x may be displayed for the model name This means that the required utility has not been installed or the utility cannot be started from GX Developer Check the required utility selecting Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list in GX Developer 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 3 3 Common utility package operations MELSEC Q This section explains how to perform the common operations in the data setting auto refresh setting and monitor test screens 1 Control keys Special keys that can be used for operation of the utility package and their applications are listed in the table below Application Esc Cancels the current entry in a cell Closes the window Used in combination with the mouse operation to select multiple cells for test execution Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned l When a cell is selected clears all of the setting contents in the cell Back spac e Deletes the character where the cursor is po
457. r e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error Device point count error e Mode switching was executed during data transmission 7E4Exn 7E4Fu e Access point count is incorrect User frame No designation error e Auser frame No outside the range was designated e Anunwritten user frame No was designated Unwritten user frame error User frame e Awritten frame No overwrite request overwrite error was issued e A nonexistent command was designated in a subcommand e Byte count exceeding the number of bytes that can be requested was designated e Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation from GX Configurator SC is set to OFF e At the switch setting on GX Developer modification allowed switch was set to OFF User frame access data error Modification allowed error e There is an error in the user frame variable data User frame data error system enor e The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error 7E56x 11 23 MELSEC Q Non Bidire Pre MC Proce _ ctional defined dure Corrective action Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications To use the pre defined protocol function use a supported Q series C24N Use the QJ71C24N R2 4 whose first 5 digits of serial No is 10122 or higher Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Make the timer 1 m
458. r CPU status and the device memory data can be sent to the external device at fixed intervals when an error occurs in the machine equipment or when certain conditions are satisfied This function reduces the data read processing load on the external device side 5 Sending data from the programmable controller CPU to the external device A function for requesting data transmission from the programmable controller CPU to the external device is called the on demand function Urgent data that must be forwarded to the external device can be sent as on demand data to the external device by starting up from the programmable controller CPU 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data communication The data communication functions using the MC protocol correspond to the data communication functions using the dedicated protocol for the conventional products listed below e A series computer link module e QnA series serial communication module Therefore the message format and control procedure are the same as when accessing the programmable controller using these conventional modules The external device side can access the Q series programmable controller with a program used for accessing the programmable controller via a conventional module Example Data for the number of device points Number of device points x 4 characters No of device points code code 2 characters Head device cases Station No e c 2
459. rame Formats 1 to 4 exist o Oe e ASCII code Communication with A compatible 1C frame for each ese Jo Communication with soca F Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 O binary code o ol o Batch read write in bitword units o S O i Monitoring of devicememory OO OF Batch read write of multiple blocks Oo Jojo Read write of device Read write by extension designation EO Jofo memory Accessing other stations via network system OO OO Access to link direct device LW10000 or higher Access to extended data register D65536 or higher or extended link register A 1 X g W10000 or higher Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 O O Reading writing from to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Reading writing from to sequence program files Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function Specification of station No 65 to 120 Communication using non procedure protocol Data transmission reception in any format Data transmission reception using user frames Data reception using format 0 2 Data reception using format 1 Data reception by interrupt programs Monitoring the programmable controller CPUs programmable controller CPU monitoring function Transmission of the monitoring information using themodemfunction Oo fofx ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion OT OO Data transmission receptio
460. range Programmable controller CPU monitoring function error e Setting value of programmable e Correct the setting value of the controller CPU monitoring function is programmable controller CPU out of range monitoring function Transmission e Setting of transmission measure of the 7E63 measure setting programmable controller CPU error monitoring is incorrect 7E64 Registration point e Registration point word bit is out of e Correct the setting value of the range error range registration point word byte Programmable controller CPU abnormal monitoring e Correct the setting value of the transmission measure e Setting value of the programmable e Correct the setting value of the controller CPU abnormal monitoring is programmable controller CPU abnormal out of range monitoring number error Monitoring condition 7 e Setting value of transmission condition Correct the setting value of the error of monitoring Ei a is out of range ransmission condition device CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error e Setting value fixed value of CPU Correct the setting value fixed value of abnormal monitoring is out of range he CPU abnormal monitoring Transmission e Setting value of transmission condition Correct the setting value of the condition range error condition agreement transmission is ransmission condition condition of monitoring device out of range agreement transmission CPU abnormal monitoring
461. ransmission control and others monitor test CHn MC protocol monitor CHn Non procedure monitor test CHnh Bidirectional monitor CHn Pre defined protocol monitor test CHn PLC CPU monitoring monitor CHn User frame No designation monitor for transmission Monitor test others ERR LED off Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM Section 9 4 2 Register the system setting values for model function in the flash ROM Set the transmission specifications with the other device DTR DSR control DC code control communication method data communication monitoring timer value etc eel te acai via offline ERGA Section 9 4 8 operation Section 9 4 11 o o o Section 94 12 oO o o sections Assign the buffer memory for on demand function set the user Section 9 4 6 Can be used frame number etc via online operation Can be used Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol and change the setting values etc Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the bidirectional protocol and change the setting values etc Change the set values for data communication by the pre defined protocol Set the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc Reset the setting values in the buffer memory to their default values Write the setting values
462. re Protocol cancellation 40401 4050H defined protocol support function 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 8 PLC CPU monitoring monitor Purpose Monitor the operating status and setting values of the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Operating procedure Monitor screen CHU Monitoring monitor Monitor screen 9 49 9 49 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items Buffer ean a eel address l Item cm Reference section Operation status 2204H 2304H PLC CPU monitoring Execution result function Number of transmission TERANA transmission y 2051Hto 2151H to Head device No designation 2052H 2152H Read point designation 2053H 21534 User s Manual Application Monitoring condition 2054H 2154H a designation No 1 block monitoring Monitoring condition value device 2055H 2155H Condition designation agreement Transmission pointer vya 2056H 2156H transmission designation Output count designation 2057H 2157H Data No for connection 3 2058H 2158H designation ae 2059 to 2159H to No 2 to 10 block monitoring device 20A9H 21A9H Transmission pointer 20E6H 21E6H v designation Condition PLC CPU abnormal Number of output SONP __ agreement 20E7H 21E7H monitoring designation an designation transmission Data No for connection i 20E8xH 21E8H designation 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Config
463. read write This function reads and writes data from to the programmable controller CPU device memory of the local station or other station on the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 as well as the intelligent function module buffer memory By reading and writing data the programmable controller CPU operation monitoring data analysis and production management can be performed on the external device side Also production directions can be executed on the external device side 2 File read write This function reads and writes files stored in the programmable controller CPU such as sequence programs and parameter files By reading and writing files file management for the GX Configurator SC and the QnACPUs of other stations can be performed on the external station side Also execution programs can be changed replaced from the external device side 3 Remote control of the programmable controller CPU This function executes remote RUN STOP PAUSE latch clear reset operations Remote operations of the programmable controller CPU can be performed from the external device side using the programmable controller CPU remote control function 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Monitoring the programmable controller CPU This function monitors the operating status of the programmable controller CPU and the data in the device memory The programmable controlle
464. receive data e Check if DTR control etc interrupted reception e Check the status of the message transmission destination and restart data communications as required e Check if DTR control etc interrupted 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal 7F68H 7F69H 7F6AH 7F6Bu 7F6CH 11 27 Error Framing error Parity error Buffer full error CD DCD signal control error Transmission error Description Data does not match the stop bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the partner station was on or off Noise occurs in the network When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices Data does not match the parity bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the partner station was on or off Noise occurs in the network When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices OS receive buffer overflowed and receive data was skipped Data was received when CD DCD signal is OFF when CD terminal check enabled was designated Data cannot be sent because the line is not connected MELSEC Q Protocol Non ee Corrective action Bidire ctional dure Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the ERR clear request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the n
465. rformed using format 5 of the MC protocol for binary code communication or using the bidirectional protocol it is necessary to set it to 8 bits e If 7 bits are set the data is communicated by ignoring the most significant bit 8th bit 3 Parity bit setting e This sets whether or not a parity bit vertical parity is added for one byte of transmission receive data according to the specifications of the external device e The addition of the parity bit to the transmission data and the checking of the parity bit of receive data are performed by the Q series C24 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 Even odd parity setting This sets whether the parity bit vertical parity should be odd parity or even parity when adding the parity bit vertical parity according to the specifications of the external device 5 Stop bit setting This sets the stop bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device 6 Sum check code setting e This sets according to the specifications of the external device whether or not a sum check code is added to transmission and reception messages of each frame and format during data communication using the MC or bidirectional protocol For an explanation of the message configuration and sum check code when a sum check code is added set to Yes see the applicable explanation of each protocol 7 Write during RU
466. ries C24 are described in Chapter 8 The following concerns the data set from GX Configurator SC 1 Data set in the Q series C24 for the use of specific functions 2 Data set in the programmable controller CPU to communicate information between the Q series C24 and the programmable controller CPU of the mounting station This section explains the Auto refresh settings of the data mentioned in 2 above Setting purpose The auto refresh settings are defined to automatically store the information stored in the buffer memory of the Q series C24 in devices designated by the programmable controller CPU By this setting the users can see the module information without accessing the Q series C24 Setup procedure Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start gt Select a target intelligent function module screen Auto refresh For display screen see Section 9 3 Setting screen Auto refresh setting oix r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module side Module side PLC side al Transfer Buffer size Transfer ia Device irection word count i Po Setting item Flash ROM access register read delete result CH1 LED ON status communications error status CH2 LED ON status communications error status Switch setting error mode switching error status Number of registered user frame
467. rmats 1 to 4 QnA frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA extension frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in the Reference Manual One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and binary code data QnA compatible 4C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Format 5 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 QnA extension frame Format 5 Details are explained in the Reference Manual Data name when the fixed format portion of messages to be sent or received between a serial communication module and an opposite device is registered in the module and used for sending and receiving data with the functions listed below The contents of a user frame data should conform to the specifications of the opposite device ear Pane The data array of the head and tail sections of a message transmission control code C24 station number sum check fixed data etc to be sent and received is registered in the serial communication module before use MC protocol on demand function e Data communication function using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in the User s Manual Applications PRODUCT CONFIGURATION The following lists the product configuration of the Q series serial communication modules Item name Quantity QJ71C2
468. rol input Output control input ON time range OFF time range Low impedance state High impedance state gt a it Q series C24 is in the data Q series C24 is in the data transmission and data reception enable state reception enable status 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 2 When the external device and the Q series C24 connected in n 1 and m n configurations When the send signal of each device is connected as shown below if the Output control input is turned ON at two or more devices the relevant devices output send data at the same time For the external device to transfer data normally e Output control input must be turned ON only when sending data e Output control input must be turned OFF when not sending data The Q series C24 side automatically controls the output control input External device or converter Send data Output control input p p pD Receive data Send data Q series C24 Output control input Receive data Send data Output control input Q series C24 Receive data When the Q series C24 is used if operation of the two interfaces is linked see Section 4 5 2 2 the time to send one character becomes the Q series C24 H W gate OFF time The Q series C24 turns OFF the gate after the one character send time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 4 Enabling or disabling echo back of the RS 422 485 interface The echo back funct
469. rotocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Mode switching request Y2 Y9 Mode switching X6 XD Predefined ON ON protocol ready _ ij TOCCOA X1D i CH1 or CH2 is the CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode predefined protocol mode 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Communication protocol before change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 and CH2 are other than the predefined protocol mode Mode switching request Y2 Y9 Mode switching X6 XD Predefined ON protocol ready Saat CH1 or CH2 is the oe predefined protocol mode Sw CH1 and CH2 are other than predefined protocol mode 1 Based on either of the following condition the protocol setting data written to the flash ROM are normal or the protocol setting data are not written to the flash ROM 8 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE PRE DEFINED PROTOCOL b Timing for executing the UINI instruction Communication protocol before change CH1 and CH2 are other than the predefined protocol mode Communication protocol after change CH1 or CH2 is the predefined protocol mode Sequence program UINI instruction Completion device Completion status indication device Mode switching signal X6 XD Predefined protocol ready X1D END END processing pro
470. rotocol setting data written to the Q series C24N includes unsupported function data The protocol setting data written to the Q series C24N is corrupted 7FC9u to 7FCFu 7FDOu to 7FE5u The OS of the Q series C24 detected System error some error 7FE6x e The remote password is not registered e The remote password processing command was received on the interface side where the modem function is not used The GX Developer connection is selected in the communication protocol setting on the corresponding CH Processing disabled The number of remote password disagreements exceeded the value designated at the address 200Du CHn 7FE8u 7FEQuH CHn ERR e There is an error in the swi the GX Developer ch setting by 7FEF Switch setting error 11 28 MELSEC Q Protocol Non i MC Proce Bidire ctional dure Corrective action Identify the incorrectly edited protocol in Protocol setting data error information buffer memory 4086H to 4089H correct the setting data and write them again to the Q series C24N Check the version of the Q series C24N to confirm the supported functions Use the pre defined protocol function within the range of supported functions Write the protocol setting data again to the Q series C24N and execute the CPRTCL instruction If this error persists even after rewriting replace the module e Check the remote password and e Remote passwords do not match J G
471. rs written to the CPU and correct it to a device No within the designated range and restart data communications e Check if remote STOP is applied from another module and restart data communications 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 11 Communication error SIO Symptom Corrective action Eo e SESE stop bit setting settings are the same e Transmission rate is too e Decrease the transmission rate and restart fast and the next data is data communications transmitted before the Q series C24 completes processing of the receive data Bidirectional procedure Pre defined Data larger than the e Use DTR and DC control and interrupt receive buffer size was transmission before the buffer becomes full received Perform RS and CS control when the modem function is used e Increase the transmission interval and provide an ample programmable controller CPU read processing time Note The non procedure protocol stores the data received up to first the end code received or fixed length data to the non procedure receive buffer memory and turns on the Read Request signal to the programmable controller CPU If the next data is sent while the Read Request signal is ON the data is temporarily stored to the OS receive buffer When the OS receive buffer becomes full the Q series C24 skips the rest of the data and turns on the SIO LED e With a multidrop link two e Connect the external devices and the Q s
472. rtion srr 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Incorrect insertion lt Inserted horizontally KA e If data cannot be communicated with the external device at all the polarity of the external device could be wrong and should be checked again If the polarities of the Q series C24 and the external device do not match reverse the polarity of each signal on either device side and connect the devices with the cable this may enable the data to be communicated 1 For terminal resistor setting connection described in this section when the RS 232 to RS 422 converters or similar device is used at the external device at both ends of the circuit a terminal resistor must be set or connected at the converter When using the RS 232 to RS 422 converters to connect the external devices and the Q series C24 use a converter that is compatible with the external device and programmable controller CPU system configuration 1 1 1 n m n Device connected to the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface must be standardized as RS 422 or RS 485 including 1 n n 1 and m n connections 2 Connection examples a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration Q series C24 External device Signal name Signal name Terminal SDA E g 7 RDA resi
473. s 0 Waiting for receiving command 1 Receiving command 2 Command reception complete 3 Waiting to access programmable controller CPU 4 Accessing programmable controller CPU 5 Programmable controller CPU access complete 6 Response message transmission On demand execution result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Data transmission result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Data reception result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code System area Use prohibited MC protocol transmission error code excludes A compatible 1C frame communication 0 No error 1 or more Transmission error code Receive user frame nth 0 Not received 1 to 4 Combination of user frame No designations for reception message System area Transmission data count designation 0 No designation 1 or more Number of send data Transmission data designation Data to be sent to an external device Receive data count of data for which read is requested No receive data 1 or more Number of receive data Receive data Data received from an external device User free area 3840 words Determined by the user For registration No 8001H For registration No 8002H istration No 8003H istration No 8004H The user registration area has the following combined uses with For registration No 8005H data written by the user according to the purpo
474. s Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law The version indication for the GX Configurator SC has been changed as shown below from the SWOD5C QSCU E 40E upgrade product Previous product Upgrade and subsequent versions SWOD5C QSCU E 40E GX Configurator SC Version 1 10L 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications For general specifications refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications For the transmission specifications when communicating via the modem function see this section and User s Manual Application 1 Transmission specification Specifications Item QJ71C24N QJ71C024N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71024 QJ71C024 R2 RS 422 485 compliance RS 232 compliance RS 232 compliance 2 piece plug in connector socket D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin ree block ee RS 422 485 compli i compliance RS 422 485 compliance RS 232 compliance 4 R i CH2 2 piece plug in connector socket 1 2 piece terminal block D sub 9 pin block Line Full duplex half duplex communications MC protocols MERT ots Half duplex communications communication TOEN Non procedure protocol eee Communi
475. s ready to receive If DTR DSR control is not implemented the DR DSR signal status is ignored 6 RS RTS signal 7 The Q series C24 turns ON OFF the RS RTS signal as described below e When the communication system is full duplex communications if the Q series C24 ready X1E is ON the Q series C24 turns ON the RS RTS signal e When the communication system is half duplex communications when the Q series C24 sends data to an external device it turns ON the RS RTS signal e The RS RTS signal is not turned OFF even when the receive data cannot be stored in the Q series C24 7 CS CTS signal 8 e The Q series C24 does not send data to an external device when this signal is OFF e Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive 8 CI RI signal 9 e The CI RI signal is used when the modem status is monitored on the Q series C24 side It should be connected as needed The CI RI signal is not needed to be connected when the modem is not connected 2 The ON and OFF states of each signal indicate the following conditions Output side Input side ON oe 5V DC to 15 V DC 3 VDC to 15 VDC OFF 15 V DC to 5 V DC 15 V DC to 3 V DC 3 Interface connector Connectors of 9 pin D sub female screw type mating screw M2 6 are used as RS 232 interface connectors for the Q series C24 For the relevant models refer to Appendix 6 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q The
476. s App 12 Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link module eeeee App 12 Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing Systems ccceeeeeeeteeeeeeteees App 15 Appendix 3 Processing Time ccccscccesceceeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeceaneeeaneesaeeeeaeeseaceesaneeseaeeseaeessanessenesineesenees App 16 Appendix 4 ASCll Gode Table eea et cbiaventel veld aatbatel ytd ictbatel ell bashed bet Gad bleed App 19 Appendix 5 External Dimensions 2 cccccececceeeneeeeeeeeeceeceneeeeneeseaeeecacessaceesaeeseaeessaeessneeteaeesaeessaees App 20 Appendix G Intermacess t 2 c 2 tite pied aire ai lia oul eee ee ade eta App 22 Appendix 6 1 RS 232 interfaces used for the Q series C24 oo ees eeecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneetaes App 22 Appendix 6 2 Connection examples when using a converter c cceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeaes App 22 Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Componenn cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaees App 25 Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component ccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceeseaeeecaeescaeeeseeeseaeeseeeteseess App 25 Appendix 7 2 Usage procedure of MX Componentt 2 cccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseneeeeneeeeneeees App 28 Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data ccccescceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaees App 35 Appendix 9 Program Examp
477. s C24 sends data by adding the control code ENQ at the beginning of the data When Sum check is designated with GX Developer the Q series C24 adds the sum check code calculated by internal processing to the end of the message and then transmits the message When No sum check is designated with GX Developer no sum check code is sent A response for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received The execution of the BIDOUT instruction completes with the transmission processing completion of the Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data CH1 side This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the bidirectional protocol For details on the contents of transmission data see Section 7 1 2 3 1 Transmission area The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the programmable controller CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to SFFH CH1 side and 800H to 9FFH CH2 side address Buffer memory 400x 4014 to Transmission area 5FFu Transmission data count designation Transmission data designation
478. s Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negl
479. s by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Description when corresponding p as CH1 side CH2 side bit is on Corrective action mean T location m H 2024 a errors occurring in the CPU Error occurrence in the CPU module m dl ule Not enough power supply capacity Examine the power supply capacity Module is not mounted correctly Reinstall the module properly O botb O to b3 Check each module and remove the Error occurrence in the base unit extension cable CPU module or the Q series C24 cause of the error Reconnect the cable correctly the module correctly pt CH2 ERR _ CH2 side communication error Reconnect the cable correctly CH1 ERR CH1 side communication error Examine thentest winingconnection Procedure 5 Ending individual station loopback test a to b13 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test result Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish the test Upon error occurrence Remove the cause of the error according to the corrective action specified in the table above and test again 2 Perform the ending procedure for individual station loopback test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 1 to perform a ROM RAM switch test 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communica
480. s data using the on demand function of the MC Non procedure protocol OUTPUT Sends data for the specified data count Section 10 3 communication INPUT 1 Reads received data Section 10 4 Bidirectional protocol BIDOUT 1 Sends data for the designated data count Section 10 5 communication BIDIN 1 Reads received data Section 10 6 Predefined protocol CPRTCL Executes the protocol setting data written to the flash ROM Section 10 7 communication using the predefined protocol support function Communication status SPBUSY Reads the status of data transmission reception via a Section 10 8 confirmation dedicated instruction Receive d ta iene CSET Perform the receive data clear without stopping the Section 10 9 transmission processing during the non procedure protocol The user should not change data values control data request data etc designated by a dedicated instruction until the execution of the dedicated instruction is completed 1 To change the following values preset in the buffer memory for use of dedicated instructions use GX Configurator SC or execute the CSET instruction Initial setting before starting data exchange See the User s Manual Application e Word byte units designation address 96H 136H e Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function designation address AOH 140n e Transmission buffer memory head address designation address A2H 142n e Transmission buffer memory length de
481. s of the converter converter modem and modem and recheck the settings and etc the signal is aa interrupted at one of wiring the intervening devices 11 37 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 3 No response message is returned even though the external device transmitted a message and the RD LED blinked Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non procedure Pre defined e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area e Communication protocol is set incorrectly The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at communication protocol status address 250H 260 H Since the message is initialized skipped reading when the CD terminal is turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change the wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time When Check CD terminal was set the CD terminal was turned OFF Check if the external device sent a message matched to the protocol and format Use the communication monitoring function to check The header byte of the the message from the external device message is not data needed by the set protocol and format e The Q series C24 skips all the messages transmitted until the header byte set for each protocol and format for example ENQ 05x for e An external device
482. s used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the programmable controller CPU side in Chapter 6 of this manual and the User s Manual Application Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions App 13 App 13 APPENDICES b MELSEC Q 3 When data is received by a reception end code the external device side must send the end code data the default is CR LF code ODH and 0An at the end of the data sent to the programmable controller CPU side Once any end code is registered data can be transmitted in the same way as for the UC24 C24 S8 4 The external device side can receive data from the Q series C24 in the same ways as UC24 Message transmission by printer function when using programs designed for UC24 1 Message transmission using the printer function of the UC24 can be implemented by the data transmission function that uses a user frame 2 For the programmable controller CPU register and send messages according to the User s Manual Application Messages handled by the UC24 will become user frames in the Q series C24 4 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol a b Setting to add a sum check code to a message The setting to add a sum check code to a message has been changed It is set during switch setting operation by GX Developer Data transmission reception 1 The s
483. se of use by the TO instruction etc ion No 8006H See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area the data written etc 1 If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame e User registration frame User s Manual Application 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem function Initialization Data User s Manual Application Connection Data User s Manual Application For registra For registration No 8007H For registration No 8008H For registration No 8009H For registration No 800AH For registration No 800BH For registration No 800CH For registration No 800DH For registration No 800EH MELSEC Q Reference section Section 9 6 4 Section 11 1 4 Not allowed Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 6 5 Section 9 6 6 Section 9 6 4 Not allowed Section 9 6 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 7 Not allowed Refer to left Not allowed ae description 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Decimal Hex Application CH2 value MC Non Bi Pa 7486 to 7526 inal Protocol Protocol ROE Reference Registration section 1D3En to 1D66x For registration No 800FH Hea to 7567 n For registration No 8010H E to 7608 2 1D90H o 1DB8x For registration No 8011H 7609 to 7649 z For registration No 8012H The user registration area has the follo
484. series C24 after checking the error code and resetting switches y b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO D0O J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 0 1 Error description 1 Communication protocol number setting error D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting station number of the Q series C24 0 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 CH1 side Communication protocol setting number 9 D3 ololololol1lol1lolololol1lo 10 transmission setting description D4 0 0joloiojo ojolojolojolojojo 1 CH2 side COMMunication protocol setting number 1 D5lololololol 1l0ol10 111 0110110 transmission setting description Displays communication protocol number setting error status on the CH1 side 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 6 How to read the current operation status MELSEC Q This section explains how to read the current operation status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 9 6 3 The status of the switch settings by GX Developer can be checked by performing read operations as described in Section 11 1 5 e Refer to Section 4 5 for the switch settings 1 Operation mode status storage area The current operation status of the Q series C24 is stored into the following buffer Buffer memory address 252 262H Buffer memory address
485. series C24 into the existing system QnA A series modules are the products listed in the table below QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 A1SJ71QC24N R2 QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24 R2 UC24 C24 S8 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF AJ71C24 S8 Appendix 2 1 Functional comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A series modules The following table lists the functional comparison between the Q series C24 and the QnA A series modules The symbol in the model name columns indicates that the corresponding functions are compatible between the applicable models for more information see the manual for each module Ss Indicates functions that have been added to or modified from the QnA A series modules Function Communication using MC protocol Communication Communication in QnA compatible 2C frame __ with ASCII code A O 2 7 Multiple block batch read write 5 8 O 2 Accessing other stations via network data link O 3 Transmission from the programmable controller Arbitrary data O CPU on demand Communication using non procedure protocol O Communication using bidirectional protocol Transmitteareceived with arbitrary format o OE O Transmitted received with transparent code designation o x x App 8 App 8 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Communication using the pre defined protocol O e x p Non procedure protocol Interrupt processing at data reception Rea
486. setting CHn Transmission user frame No designation Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc O Section 9 4 11 system setting CHn Bidirectional system setting Reset the setti lues in the buff to theil System setting default PA ey ee D ee O O O Section 9 4 12 default values System setting write Nka the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash lol o o o fs ction 9 4 12 Flash ROM write allow prohibit Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Eras ction 9 4 13 designation X Y monitoritest Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the Section 9 6 1 programmable controller CPU Modem function monitor test Monitor the execution status of the modem function Ere T Section 9 6 2 CHn Transmission control Monitor the status of interface control signals values set ction 9 6 3 e others monitor test from the GX Developer etc an CHn MC ICHn MC protocol monitor monitor ction 9 6 4 CHn N d n on procedure Ng i O Section 9 6 5 used only monitor test Monitor the data communication result I O signal status a i CHn Bidirectional monitor jand setting values in the buffer memory Se ee ee Section 9 6 6 Monitor CHn Pre defined protocol p re defined protocol Section 9 6 7 monitor test CHn PLC CPU Monitor the setti d ting status of th n 3 onitor the setting values an opera ing sta us o e O Section 9 6 8 monitoring monitor programmable controller CPU monitoring function CHn User fram
487. sh ROM 0 Normal completion RW Not allowed Section 9 6 10 h write result Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion Modem function error code error code when modem function is A RW 545 being used 2211 0 Normal completion Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion Modem function sequence status 0 Idle 8 Callback Request reception 1 Waiting for initialization waiting 546 2 Initializing modem 9 Callback Modem disconnect 222 3 Waiting waiting 2227 4 Checking password 10 Callback Delay time waiting 5 Communicating 11 Callback Reconnecting Section 9 6 2 For confirmation T f mod 6 Notification in progress 12 Callback Rechecking password Not all d a mol Sm 7 Modem disconnected ot allowe User s Manual 547 function Number of data registration for connection Application 2231 0 No registration 1 to 30 Number of registrations Data registration status for connection for confirmation of registration No 3 548 to 549 0 No registration 1 Registered 224H to 225H Bit corresponding to registration No is O OFF 1 ON Registration No BB8H 3000 Address 224H b0 to Registration No BD5H 3029 Address 225H b13 550 Number of data registration for initialization 0 No registration 1 to 30 Number of registrations Depends on registration 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial Protocol j nitia Decimal Hex Application Name value Mc Non Bi Pa Data registration status for initializati
488. side when completing the data communication using the MC protocol The remote password is automatically locked when the modem is disconnected 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q The remote password should be set to a QCPU using GX Developer in order to use the remote password function of QCPU e Unlocking the remote password is possible only for the QCPU of the local station with the Q series C24 It is impossible to unlock the remote password for the QCPU of other stations See the Reference Manual for the command for unlocking the remote password When accessing the programmable controller using GX Developer the remote password should be unlocked when starting the online operation 3 Q series C24 setting and monitoring function when using the QCPU remote password function a Modem function system setting by GX Configurator SC 1 i Remote password mismatch notification count designation Designate the number of times before notification when a remote password disagreement occurs at the unlock processing by the user external device after the line is connected The Q series C24 automatically disconnects the line if more remote password disagreements occur than the number of times designated by this value Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation Designate the number of times before notification when remote password disagreements occur at the unlock proc
489. signation address A3H 143H e Receive buffer memory head address designation address A6H 146n e Receive buffer memory length designation address A7H 147n The dedicated instructions are executed based on the values preset in the 10 buffer memory at module startup or those that have been changed by the CSET instruction Initial setting 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal devices 9 ed File register Constant XY MULFV B TST C D W x1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Designation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 2 Available devices are given in each of the Constant field 10 10 2 10 2 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 G P ONDEMAND Data can be sent using the on demand function of the MC protocol Applicable device Set Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function i Index register data eara user File register JO O module device 7 Constant Others n S1 uoco wora aeee ie Instruction Executing code condition Command G ONDEMAND G ONDEMAND Un S1 S2 D Command GP
490. sing external device QCPU Q series C24 Dialup line 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 i 4 no o n a o a Communication through GX Developer Communication using MC protocol j i check GX Developer 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B Function Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT Control of RS RTS and ER DTR signal states Support for 230 400 bps MELSEC Q The table below lists the functions that have been added or changed in the Q series C24 of function version B 1 The added changed functions shown in this section includes the functions added in the first products of function version B or later For the function version serial No and software version of the Q series C24 and related products CPU module GX Developer and GX Configurator SC that can use the added changed functions refer to Section 2 7 See Appendix 1 1 concerning a comparison of functions in the different Q series C24 function versions Outline of function This function allows access to the programmable controller from a personal computer with GX Developer and a GOT connected to two different interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time This function allows the control of the on or off state of the RS RTS and ER DTR signals with the programmable controller program This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 230
491. sitioned Moves the cursor Page up Moves the cursor one page up Page Down Moves the cursor one page down Completes the entry in the cell 2 Operation Command Buttons Current value displa Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Write to module Read from module Save file Load file Displays the current value of the item selected Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format Starts monitoring of the current value field Stops monitoring of the current value field Registers the system setting data of the selected item in the flash ROM 1 To apply Execute test to multiple items simultaneously set the data for the corresponding items select the multiple items while pressing down Ctrl then click Execute test 1 The settings for receive data clear request and flash ROM write allow prohibit designation are written to the buffer memory Registers all system setting data for the Q series C24 in the flash ROM Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the flash ROM Saves all system setting data for the Q series C24 to the designated file extension UMD Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the designated file extension UMD 9 16 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 1 2 MELSEC Q Closes the screen that is currently open and returns to the previous
492. splay device OFF I 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 10 5 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q The following example shows a program that sends data stored in D10 to D11 using an on demand transmission When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F X53 PW _ iis M50 MOV MOV MOV MOV HOV W51 AR oP ONDEMAND uo o KI KO K2 H1234 H5678 RST RST 450 D1 D2 D10 DI W100 M101 M51 M100 W101 M51 On demand transmission command pulse Set the transmission channel to CH1 Set the send data count to 2 words Set the transmission data to D10 to D11 Reset the normal completion flag Reset the abnormal completion flag Set the transmission ready flag On demand transmission execution Normal completion Abnormal completion Reset the transmission ready flag 1 The status of communication via dedicated instructions can be read using the SPBUSY instruction
493. ssaees 11 55 11 3 22 Troubleshooting on protocol setting data reading writing ee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeetteeneees 11 56 41 3 23 The ERM LED isslitiziccts tesededs cesses ovesneaStueane acceetcuaecesausacesazasd E E R 11 57 Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 ceeccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteneessaees App 1 Appendix 1 1 Comparison of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC GX WorkS2 ccceceeeee App 1 Appendix 1 2 Precautions when updating the module from function version A to B 05 App 7 Appendix 1 3 Precautions when replacing the QJ71C24 R2 with the QJ71C24N R2 R4 App 7 Appendix 2 QnA A Seres Modules i tistessecit tacit ei ete a reek ctend ited dean App 8 Appendix 2 1 Functional comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A series modules App 8 Appendix 2 2 Using programs designed for the QC24 N and installing the Q series C24 INtO EXISTING SYSTEMS s ce eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetaeetaeesaeesaeesaeeseeseesieetieesieesieesieesieesieees App 10 Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N cccececeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees App 10 Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing systems ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeenneaeeeeeeeeeesesetaeeneees App 11 Appendix 2 3 Using programs designed for the computer link module and installing the Q series C24 into existing SYStEMS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeea
494. ssion error Reference section A transmission error occurred because of noise a A timeout occurred for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 A timeout occurred for the response monitoring time timer 1 i e RE User s Manual Application A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Designated the transmission data count that exceeded the transmission area size Section 7 2 2 Simultaneous transmissions occurred Section 7 3 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting a transmission error 1 he following device and input signal turn ON e BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 e ERR occurrence XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the BIDOUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result address 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 11 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 11 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the Communication error clear request and to turn LED off address OH 1H 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BID
495. stem setting Interrupt pointer setting For display screen see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting PlCside Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer No of module Inteli module side Start 1 0 No Start SI No J e ww d EN o o oo Ez oo o O o Setting description 1 Interrupt pointer start No on the PLC side Set the start number ranging from 50 to 255 of the interrupt pointer Ixx for use in the sequence program 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of units 2 of interrupt pointers I for use in the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 3 Start I O No on the intelligent module unit side Set the start I O No for the Q series C24 4 Start SI No on intelligent module unit side 1 2 3 Assign control numbers SI on the Q series C24 side to the interrupt pointers Ixx used in the sequence program Set the start SI No 0 of the interrupt control numbers The interfaces for data reception corresponding to the interrupt control numbers are as follows SI No 0 for interface on the CH1 side SI No 1 for interface on the CH2 side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC The settings defined with GX Configurator SC for operation of the Q se
496. stor Terminal SDB X X gt RDB resistor ROA leer 2 2 SDA RDB je S _ _ SDB SG RSA FG RSB FG CSA O CSB SG FG 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b External device and Q series C24 with 1 n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example 1 External device C24 1 spa l RI SDB Li l RDA RI RDB cable Linked C24 2 C24n l l l SD TXD RS 232 SD TXD SG HH 11 RD RXD RD RXD FG V p RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable R_ Terminal operation resistor 2 Connection example 2 External device C24 1 C24 2 C24n i PAER i ry A SDA SDA Lo SDA it 1 SDA R 1 1 i 1 TRI SDB SDB SDB SDB RDA Ra 4 pg ft tT RDA R Io l I TRI RDB RDB RDB J RDB SG SG _ SG 4 l SG G i I i l Vi l Fe F Vidai 4 O athe go Te Vaaa 27 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable Termina resistor c External device and Q series C24 with n 1 multidrop system configuration External device 1 External device 2 External device n C24 1 1 ina eaeaie eT epg tS eee O ape ee IA SDA SDA I l SDB SDB RDA l i RDA RI RDB 1 l RDB sG p 11 5G G A i G F Nee oe doen tr FG fy pet Fe v RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q
497. structions The following table lists the processing when executing another instruction during execution of the CPRTCL instruction or executing the CPRTCL instruction during execution of another instruction in the same channel Availability of Instruction simultaneous Processing of simultaneous execution execution e The next instruction will be ignored until the active instruction is completed CPRTCL x tas However simultaneous execution is available when channels to be used are not the same el ce i ox Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error 7FFOH occurs in the dedicated instruction attempted later ui O Available X Not available 1 Because the dedicated instructions listed below use a different communication protocol from that for the CPRTCL instruction they are not used in the same channel e ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR BIDOUT INPUT BIDIN BUFRCVS CSET If the dedicated instructions above are used in the same channel with the CPRTCL instruction the communication protocol setting error 7FF2x occurs Except for the BUFRCVS instruction 10 23 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Whether a CPRTCL instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns ON at the END processing of the scan where the CPRTCL instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END pro
498. t s Head number of the devices in which control data is stored Eees sem Gove name Device name S Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored ETE D2 Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _ Set by Set receive channel Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Si result by a BIDIN instruction are stored o ff H aa or O 2 Receive data count The number of data received is stored 1 or more system Allowable number of Set the allowable number of words for received data that S 3 1 or more User receive data can be stored in D1 G P BIDIN should be executed while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 10 18 10 18 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 19 MELSEC Q x1 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated as the unit types x2 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDIN instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the BIDIN instructions 1 The function stores in the device designated in D1 and succeeding devic
499. t e434 vst bo Le p AR NNN arm tov H1234 DI Sets the transmission data Wov H56AB D2 Transfers the setting value to the S72 RENTO JI Ki Ki Ho H400 po K3 M100 communication area of the buffer memory M100 MiOl 4 PLS M11 Transmission user frame designation E command NiOt nn M200 J Abnormal completion of REMTO to Situs instruction lt Transmission user frame designation command gt M11 XIOIE RS s L 0 D5 Let Sets the CR LF output vov 1 D6 Sets the output head pointer Mov 5 07 Sets the output count HOV 3F2 D8 First output frame No designation Rov 3F3 D9 Second output frame No designation po ov 8001 DIO Let Third output frame No designation MOV 8000 D11 Fourth output frame No designation MOV 41B D12 Fifth output frame No designation S7 RENTO Jt Ki Ki Ho HOB7 05 K8 M102 F Transfers the setting values to the o transmission user frame designation lt Transmission request gt 4102 w103 area of the buffer memory t SET Y1000 J Turns ON the transmission request signal W103 a i SET M201 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 k NS S eK s E M300 Normal completion of transmission RST y1000 Turns OFF the transmission request signal lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 E S
500. t re Frame ground gt acanna Gan Cee Frame ground gt 1 The following describes the control signals 1 SDA SDB signals These are signals to send data from the Q series C24 to the external device 2 RDA RDB signals These are signals for the Q series C24 to receive data from the external device 2 Terminating resistor Connect the termination resistor according to section 4 2 2 3 Terminal a Terminal block QJ71C24N Use 1 25 3 for the solderless terminal to be attached on the terminal block Use the UL certified crimp on terminal For crimping the terminal use the tools recommended by crimp on terminal manufacturers Crimp on terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be used b Plug in socket block QJ71C24N R4 Remove the shielded part of the cable and directly connect the cable to the plug in socket block Use the plate terminal supplied with the product to connect the braided shield wire to the FG terminal on the plug in socket block Refer to Section 4 4 4 Tightening torque For details on the tightening torque for the RS 422 485 terminal block refer to Section 4 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications The following table lists the RS 422 485 cable specification 1 Use a 1200 m 3937 ft or shorter cable that satisfies the following specification for the RS 422 485 cable cable to connect the Q series C24 terminal
501. t supported by the GX Confirm the GX Developer s S W Developer version The GX Developer does Check the GX Developer s connection not receive the callback There was an error in the GX Developer system signals from the Q series connection system Set the connection system on callback C24 reception waiting and connect There is an error in the GX Developer Set the modem s settings on Auto side s modem settings Reception Check the GX Devel ti There s an error in the GX Developer s Ra aaa cach SE Callback connections S system connection system o s from the GX Developer Correct the Q series C24 s settings are refused by the Q f g Check the telephone No There is an error in the connection series C24 Change the telephone No to the data system s telephone No for callback e Review the communication rate setting When performing Auto callback during fixed during designated There is an error in the GX Developer s number from the GX connection system Developer connection to the Q series C24 is There is an error in the telephone No of Check the GX Developer s connection system e Check the Q series C24 s settings Check the telephone No Change the telephone No to the data for callback refused the connection system Adjust each of the timer values for the The timer value for the status of the callback function on the GX Developer from the G
502. t transmits the NAK code to the external device 2 Response from external device to the Q series C24 Transmit the error code 0022H to 005FH immediately after the NAK response 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Perform error processing according to the error code received immediately 5 after the NAK message at the device that received NAK as the response message after data transmission Chapter 11 shows the error codes that are transmitted from the Q series C24 If the Q series C24 receives an NAK response while transmitting data to an external device it completes data transmission then reads the NAK perform abnormal completion If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it ignores the receive data corresponding to the data length If the data length is abnormal the Q series C24 ignores all the data up to the receive message head data ENQ etc received thereafter External device time out check When checking time out up to reception of the response message at the external device during data transmission from external device to the Q series C24 make the time out time the time shown below or longer Programmable controller CPU maximum scan time x 2 100 ms External device framing error When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device though the RS 422 or RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated in the external device Ma
503. ta is stored De D2 Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bto The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set receive channel e f e Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Reception result by an INPUT instruction are stored Se Reception result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code 1 S 2 Receive data count Receive data count is stored 0 or more system owable number oi Set the allowable number of words for received data Allowabl ber of Set the allowabl ber of words fi ived dat S 3 1 or more User receive data that can be stored in D1 1 The command of G INPUT cannot be converted into pulse 2 G INPUT should be executed while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 10 11 10 11 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 11 x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the INPUT instructions e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of the INPUT instructions Function 1 The function stores in the device designated in D1 and
504. ta processing for various settings of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation by GX Configurator SC are explained 1 Transmission valid reception valid 2 1 1 2 E A N Arbitrary data Sum check c External device Q code K Q series C24 E x N Arbitrary data Sum check Time check c Q code timer 1 K 1 1 2 2 When the entire message of 2 1 was received while transmitting the message of 1 1 in the illustration The Q series C24 sets Receive read request X3 X4 of 2 1 to ON after sending all of 1 1 2 Transmission invalid reception valid 2 1 Sum check code Arbitrary data Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Generates a simultaneous transmission error External device Q series C24 Sum check code Arbitrary data 3 Transmission valid reception invalid 1 1 1 2 Sum check code Arbitrary data External device E Ignores the receive N Arbitrary data Sum check Time check data of 2 1 Q code timer 1 Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Transmission invalid reception invalid 2 1 Sum check code Arbitrary data External device Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Generates a simultaneous transmission error Ignores the receive data of 2 1 Q series C24 Sum check code Arbitrary data Time check timer 1 respo
505. tart 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value ASZ contd signal saus ATSIRS SSCS DTR ER cD cs CTS RI Cl Communication protocol status GX Developer connection For GX Developer connection the following transmission status is invalid Transmission status Independent Operation setting Flash ROM setting Details Write to Current value Monitoring module display Pead from Load file Make text file Save file Cannot execute test Stop monitor Monitor Test items Buffer en ee address Item Reference section RTS IRTS RS sis DSR DR RS 232 control DTR ER 254H 264H Section 4 4 1 signal status CS o RI CI Transmission Section 4 5 2 253H 263H status Sum check code Write during RUM Setting modification 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Buffer ee address Item Reference section Transmission i Transmission speed 253H 263H Section 4 5 2 status 1334 ee eo User s Manual Application vane Half duplex communications control designation Simultaneous transmission priority non paonty designation pe User s Manual Application Sea Oe Retransmission time transmission method Gesignation INo reception monitoring time timer 0 designation units byte 9Cu 13Cu Response monitoring time timer 1 designation units 100 ms 9Du 13Du__ User s Manual Application Transmissi
506. ted Close the Monitor Test screen Close v End Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 13 Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 Each system setting sub screen See Section 9 4 The Monitor screen or each sub screen See Section 9 3 3 x1 To write all the new setting values to the flash ROM at once click on the Write to module button after all the applicable setting values have been changed All the setting values will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM Reset the CPU The Monitor screen or each sub screen See Section 9 3 3 2 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup Select in the Monitor screen See Section 9 4 13 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 9 3 2 Starting the Intelligent function module utility Operating procedure Intelligent function module utility is started from GX Developer Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start Setting screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW san 5 xj Intelligent function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 Serial Communications Module z Module model name QJZIC24N N R4 x Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh A O00 OJ71C24 N N AA Unavailable MET
507. ted Reset a flag for cancellation request 10 27 10 27 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 7 1 Functional protocol The following functions are available by executing functional protocols with the CPRTCL instruction e Receive data clear e Send receive data monitoring start stop e RS DTR signal condition designation 1 Setting Specify the functional protocol number of the function to be executed in the control data S 2 to S 9 of the CPRTCL instruction For details of the CPRTCL instruction refer to Section 10 7 2 List of functional protocols The following table lists the functional protocols described in this section Protocol 4 Protocol type Keyword Reference number Receive Data ae 201 Receive data clear cI a in this section ear Send Recv Send Receive data monitoring start Monitor Start b in this section Send Recv Send Receive data monitoring stop Monitor Stop Turns ER DTR signal ON 205 Turns ER DTR signal OFF DTR OFF Turns RS RTS signal ON 207 Turns RS RTS signal OFF c in this section 1 Character strings that are stored to the protocol name of the protocol execution log when functional protocols are executed a Receive data clear Receive data in the OS area are cleared b Send Receive data monitoring start stop Start or stop of send receive data monitoring is specified When the functional protocol 202 203 is executed a monitoring start
508. ted This can reduce the steps for creating programs b Writing registered protocol setting data to the flash ROM reduces the volume of the program to be written the programmable controller CPU The following is the procedure for the pre defined protocol communication 1 Use GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function to select or create edit the protocol of the external device Then write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 2 With a dedicated instruction CPRTCL execute the protocol written to the flash ROM GX Configurator SC Pre defined protocol support function 1 Write protocol setting data of the external device to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 Cu E External device Send packet o h mM Receive packet m ii lO O O og 2 Execute the protocol with the dedicated instruction CPRTCL c Use of the dedicated instruction CPRTCL allows a continuous execution of up to eight protocols 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q d By specifying transmission and reception data storage areas device or buffer memory data can be set in communication packets For sending The user can set a variable system dependent element such as a channel number in the specified device or buffer memory The QJ71C24N R2 R4 automatically places the value in the user spe
509. ted again replace Flash ROM ERR the module e Check and correct the contents of the iene e There was an error in the mode No or external device transmit message and Mode modification we f eee Sirot transmission specification designated restart data communications contents when changing the mode e Recheck the switch setting on the Q series C24 e Review the program e Writing to flash ROM was performed e Reset the Flash ROM write count Flash ROM write 1000 times after power on address 24011 to 0 and restart data count over limit error communications e Writing to flash ROM was performed CHn e When the number of writes reached 100 000 times ERR 100 000 replace the module Programmable e The programmable controller CPU controller CPU monitoring function is registered for the e Correct the communication protocol monitoring function communication protocol that does not 3 setting value registration error support the function 7E5F I O number error on e I O number of requested module is e Correct the I O number of the module to 5 requested module incorrect which data is sent Cancel the programmable controller Device monitoring e Programmable controller CPU i m g duplicate registration monitoring registration was performed i eae li P g i greg P programmable controller CPU O O error twice nate 2 monitoring registration again 7E61 Cycle time units e Setting value of cycle time units is out of range error
510. ted by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTSs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080006 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080006 B Add the contents of the function version B Correction Co
511. terface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 534 words is received by the CH1 side interface Complete code 511 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program Read data count Read data count 511 words 23 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL External device MELSEC Q 2 Reception by received data count If a specified receive data count is too large for the receive data storage area Receive buffer memory length address A7H 147n default 512 words minus 1 is used as the receive data count instead Receive data storage area gt Data length received from external device Example When 550 words of data is received through the CH1 interface in three parts when the CH1 interface receive area consists of addresses 600H to 7FFH default value 1st data 2nd data 3rd data 433 words 117 words 511 words 39 words 472 words 78 words Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program Read data Read data 1st 511 words 1st 39 words and 2nd 472 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the INPUT instruction for data reception see Chapter 10 vl X3 Read request 7 Mo l l 1 Cre
512. ternal devices that can install application programs and transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC programmable controller protocol can communicate with the programmable controller CPUs using the bidirectional protocol This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the bidirectional protocol Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the programmable controller CPU Regarding the additional functions listed below for data communication using the bidirectional protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application e Reading receive data using interrupt programs Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion e Sending receiving data using transparent code designation 7 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL This section explains the data reception from the external device 7 1 1 Receiving methods MELSEC Q The following shows how to receive data sent from the external device using the bidirectional protocol Since the size of each message received is recognized using the data length information contained in the message messages of any size can be sent from the external device Programmable controller CPU Q series C24 Sequence Buffer memory eis
513. the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR clear request YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side OUTPUT instruction Complete device 1 M1 1 XOE YOE 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 11 2 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 9 6 3 and 9 6 5 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 9 6 11 3 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code e GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 9 6 5 GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267H When a transmission error occurs the programmable controller CPU may not transmit all the designated data It is recommended that data communications be performed by establishing a user arbitrary communication procedure that can check normal transmission by reception of a response to data transmission 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 3 Data Communications Precautions The following describes the precautions to be taken during non procedure protocol data communications
514. the users lt Example of communication using MX Component gt U Gateway function communication Modem communication 2 Dramatic improvement of application development efficiency MX Component provides wizard style communication setting utilities The user only needs to select settings from menus displayed on the screen in an interactive manner to achieve the communication settings required to access the target programmable controller CPU Moreover once the communication setting has been performed it is possible to access the programmable controller CPU simply by specifying the logical station number that is stored via the communication setting utilities App 25 App 25 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 3 Support for wide choice of basic operating systems MX Component can be used on a personal computer with Microsoft Windows For operating systems that support MX Component refer to the operating manual for MX Component 4 Support for a wide variety of programming languages MX Component supports the following programming languages It allows the user to develop a wide range of customized applications Programmin Development software language Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual Basic NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C 6 0 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual C NET 2003 Microsoft
515. time the Q series C24 processing depends on the setting of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation with GX Configurator SC The GX Configurator SC setting value Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation is stored in the following areas of the buffer memory Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation addresses 9BH 13Bn The Q series C24 communication data processing for each setting is described in Section 7 3 2 Setting contents Value set to buffer Q series C24 processing contents gt satto buffer series C24 processing contents with GX Configurator SC Address 9Bu 13Bx Message transmit processing Message receive processing Waits to receive the response message 1 2 Transmits a response message 2 2 while checking time out after data after data reception 2 1 is complete i transmission 1 1 is complete Posts the receive data and receive Transmission data Valid f Posts normal end or abnormal end according result to the programmable controller Receive data Valid to whether or not the programmable controller CPU through the buffer memory CPU received a response message through the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission error to Transmits a response message 2 2 as the programmable controller CPU through the after data reception 2 1 is complete Transmission data Invalid buffer memory after data transmission 1 1 Posts the rece
516. ting using bidirectional protocol When the Q series C24 detects a reception error after the head data of a communication message for bidirectional protocol is received it returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination If the reception error is detected before the head data of the communication message for bidirectional protocol is received the received data will be disregarded When communicating using the pre defined protocol If a reception error occurs an error code is stored in the Data reception result area address 258H 268h of the Q series C24 Reception error codes can be also checked with the communication data monitoring function Take actions such as detecting a reception error or clearing the received data if necessary For details of the communication data monitoring function refer to the User s Manual Application 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 1 The RUN LED is turned OFF Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure Pre defined A transmission setting Set the switch by GX Developer correctly switch is set to an and after writing to the CPU reset the CPU unusable position e Remove the cause of the CPU error and reset the CPU e During the Q series C24 and external device loopback test the minimum Programmable controller CPU error parameters file must be written to the CPU beforehand e Calculate the 5 V current drain of each The Q series C24
517. ting value can be changed by the sequence program before data receive processing Refer to Section 6 1 6 3 The default value can be changed by Non procedure system setting of GX Configurator SC Refer to Sections 9 4 5 and 9 4 7 Setting data Default Allowable range Buiter memory addresswhere Remarks value the setting value is stored Received data 511 1FFH Less than the size of the A4u 144 Unit is in accordance with the count receive data storage area word byte units designation 00004 to OOFFH When any code is set Recei ODOA ecelve H A5H 145H When there is no receive complete code CR LF complete code REMARKS Other than through the setting using GX Configurator SC or the TO instruction at the startup of the Q series C24 the received data count and receive complete code setting values can be changed even after data communication has started if the timing is as shown in the chart below The following describes the procedure for changing setting values for data reception via the non procedure protocol after the start of data communication and for the resumption of data reception processing Specifically the module restrictions are explained along with the timing and procedure for changing the setting values 1 Data receiving method Reception using a dedicated instruction INPUT or an interrupt program 1 cannot be performed Transmission using a dedicated instruction OUTPUT can be performed Data must be receiv
518. tion describes the parts that are packed along with the serial communication module e Parts and components other than those packed with the module must be prepared separately by the user To learn about processing required to start up the serial communication module a To learn about the startup procedure e Section 4 2 describes the general procedures prior to starting the operation of the serial communication module b To learn about the connection with the external devices e Section 4 4 describes the connection methods for each type of interface c To learn about processing required prior to operation of the serial communication module e Section 4 5 explains the parameter settings with GX Developer in order to use the serial communication module e Section 4 6 and Chapter 9 describe the settings from GX Configurator SC to perform the initial setting of the serial communication module To change an initial value follow the procedure described in Chapter 9 d To check for failure in the serial communication module e Section 4 7 describes the test of the individual serial communication module e To learn how to check for a connection error with the external devices Section 4 8 describes how to perform the individual module test and the loopback test using MC protocol based communication x Details of the loopback test command are described in the reference manual 3 To learn about data communication functions and detai
519. tion reception data clear by buffer memory user frame use enable disable designation UINI instruction programmable controller CPU information clear gt e Multiple external devices accessed a remote station on the same network at the same time Errors detected by the CC Link module Errors detected by the Ethernet module Errors detected by the CC Link IE Field Network module he CC Link IE module Errors detected by Controller Network Errors detected by the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system Signal name Corrective action e Do not use dedicated instructions simultaneously e Correct the setting value of the communication protocol e Do not execute these functions during any other processing e Multiple external devices must not access a remote station on the same network at the same time e Take corrective action by referring the CC Link Master Local Module User s Manual Take corrective action by re the Ethernet Interface Modul Manual erring le User 0 S Take corrective action by referring CC Link IE Field Network User s Manual Take corrective action by referring CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Take corrective action by referring MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on t
520. tion with an external device Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with the external device Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Loopback Test A loopback test performs a communication test using the loopback test function of the MC protocol in order to check the connection between the Q series C24 and an external device the communication function of each device and the operation of the communication program of the external device Procedure 1 Connecting the Q series C24 to an external device Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect a communication cable to an external device to perform data communication using the MC protocol see Section 4 4 Procedure 2 Switch setting with GX Developer 1 Set the switch settings with GX Developer as shown in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU in order to perform data communication using the MC protocol 2 The following is an example of the settings when performing a loopback test on the interface on the CH1 side e Switch 1 0544 Transmission Operation setting Independent operation setting Data bit 7 bit Parity bit Yes odd Stop bit
521. tion before the monitoring setting 2 The MELECNET H remote I O station should be reset after changing the setting 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2 7 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version MELSEC Q This section provides the information on function versions serial Nos and software versions of the related products that support new functions of the Q series C24 and explains how to check them 1 Correspondence of related products for use additional functions of Q series C24 Function version of the Q series C24 Additional function Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT QJ71C24N R2 R4 QJ71C24 R2 Function version B Version of related product CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator SC O GX Works2 O RS RTS and ER DTR signal status designation Transmission specifications Support for 230400 bps low speed 50 bps Data transmission reception at Function version B Version 2 or later O Version 1 15R or later Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction O Function version B O O Programmable controller CPU information clear Function version B or later whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 08032 Version 2 11M or later Transmission of the programmable controller CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function Communication mode
522. tion is executed The station No setting can be changed only when the UINI instruction is executed For the mode switching refer to the User s Manual Application For the UINI instruction refer to the User s Manual Application 2 For the switch settings refer to Section 4 5 1 Setting status storage area The switch settings by GX Developer and setting error information are stored in different areas of the buffer memory shown below 1 Station No switch setting address 200n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 2004 0 to 31 Station number 2 Switch setting error and mode switching error status address 203H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 203 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 CH2 cH2 cH2 CH1 chifon TOEA Ignore including b2 and b6 Communication protocol number Station number of the Q series on CH _ side is outside the range C24 is outside the range Communication rate on CH side Linked operation setting error is outside the range see Section 4 5 2 2 Mode switching request was 1 Error 0 Normal issued when the setting modification allow prohibit was set to prohibit 3 Communication protocol status address 250H 260nH b15 to bO Buffer memory address 250 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 260H 0 to 7 9 Information on the CH2 side 4
523. tion is performed using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames of the MC protocol the header information for linked operation is added to messages directed to other stations linked by multidrop connection Processing performed by the Q series C24 connected to an external device The header information is added to the command messages received from the external device that are directed to other stations and sends them to the stations through the other interface The header information is deleted from the response messages received from other stations and sends them to the external device using the other interface The header information is also sent during m n connection 6 Operation of the accessed station The accessed station processes the request contained in the command message adds the header information to a response message and sends it using the interface that received the command message The following describes the header information that is added by the Q series C24 to a message in linked operation 1 When communicating with ASCII code formats 1 to 4 The following 13 or 15 character header information is added immediately before the control code ENQ STX ACK NAk at the start of each message 13 characters for formats 1 3 and 4 15 characters for format 2 2 When communicating in binary mode format 5 The following 10 byte header information is added immediately before the control code DLE STX at the start of
524. tion with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules e Mount a module within the number of I O points for the CPU module If the number of slots is within the available range the module can be mounted on any slot When using the Q series C24 with a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Mounting toa MELSECNET H remote I O station For the MELSECNET H remote I O station the number of modules and base units applicable to the C24 refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 2 Support of the multiple CPU system When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system refer to the QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System first 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Supported software packages a Software setting amp monitor tools 1 for the programmable controller Relation between the system containing the Q series C24 and software package is shown in the following table To use the Q series C24 GX Developer or GX Works2 is required iti eee Software version GX Developer GX Configurator SC GX Works2 Single CPU system Version 7 or later Version
525. tocol switching Independent linked operation of each interface Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package Connecting the GX Developer and GOT O Available X Not available x1 Communications are according to the MC protocol See the Reference Manual concerning the number of devices that can be accessed and the processing time The range of devices that can be accessed differs depending on the frame used in data communications 2 Use a Basic model QCPU function version B or later When using the function version 8 or later of GX Developer is required 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 5 Use with Redundant CPUs This section describes the Q series C24 on an extension base unit of the system where Redundant CPUs are used 1 Available functions For details refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 Access to Redundant CPU from external device For details refer to either of the following manuals e Section 5 1 4 e QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 3 Dedicated instructions The dedicated instructions are not applicable Create programs with the FROM TO instructions For sample program using the FROM TO instructions refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 4 GX Configurator SC a Connecting GX Configurator SC GX Configurator SC cannot be used for accessing a Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module
526. tored in SDO See the following manuals according to the error code and check take action according to the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 11 2 10 33 10 33 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following example shows a program that clears reception data on the Q series C24 side When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X Y00 to X Y1F KO DO Set the execution type K4 D2 Set the request type reception data clear D200 MO Execute the reception data clear MO M1 f SET M100 Normal completion Mi SET M101 Abnormal completion MOV DI D300 RST M100 Reset the complete flag by external command RST M101 10 34 10 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the definitions of errors that may occur during data communication between the Q series C24 and external devices and the corrective actions 11 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module 11 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial communication module This section explains how to check the status of communication between the Q series C24 and external devices the transmission status of the Q series C24 and the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When a communication problem occurs check the error status using one of t
527. ty before operation Failure to perform correct operations to change data program or the status may result in system malfunction machine damage or an accident Disposal Precautions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions x i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants opera
528. uction e The protocol was executed while Pre To prevent concurrent execution of the defined protocol ready X1D is OFF CPRTCL instruction set the CPU to Protocol not ready e The CPRTCL instruction was executed STOP before writing the protocol setting error during protocol setting data writing data e The CPRTCL instruction was executed Write the protocol setting data again to with abnormal protocol setting data the Q series C24N and then execute the CPRTCL instruction If this error persists even after rewriting replace the module 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal Protocol unregistered error Transmission monitoring timeout error Receive wait timeout error CPU response monitoring timeout error CPU response monitoring timeout error Protocol cancel request error Packet size error Too few digits error 11 21 Description The protocol No specified in control data for the CPRTCL instruction is not registered to the Q series C24N The CPRTCL instruction was executed with no protocol setting data written Transmission monitoring time has timed out Although the transmission was retried the specified number of times it did not succeed Receive wait time has timed out CPU response monitoring time has timed out during transmission Data to be sent to the device could not be acquired from the CPU within the set time CPU response monitoring time has timed
529. unction modules special function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the programmable controller CPU setting values monitor values etc The abbreviation for Z BUFRCVS A generic term for one of the external devices with which data can be sent received using the MC protocol or the bidirectional protocol The abbreviation for ZP CSET Data communication function A generic term for MC protocol non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol and pre defined protocol GETE The abbreviation for G GETE or GP GETE GX Configurator SC GX Developer GX Works2 VF The abbreviation for interface INPUT The abbreviation for GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later Initial settings for the module monitoring and testing can be performed without using a sequence program and without considering I O signals or buffer memory Intelligent function utility Converting sequence programs necessary for data communication processing into function blocks FB can shorten program production man hours In addition the monitoring and analysis of the transmitted received data by the communication network can shorten the system start up time Protocol FB support function Since the protocol required for communication with each external device thermal regulator barcode reader etc can be set easily the steps for creating transmission control programs appropriate to the external device can be reduced Also the volu
530. unctional protocol is executed 0 is stored ka Verification match receive 0 1 to 16 System packet number When the communication type of the 8th protocol executed is Receive only or Send amp receive the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send only 0 is stored If the error occurs to the 8th protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of the executed protocols is less than 8 0 is 1 The following are the descriptions of terms in the column e User Data set by the user before executing the CPRTCL instructions e System The CPU module stores the execution result of the CPRTCL instructions 2 When executing multiple protocols if an error occurs to the nth protocol the protocols after the nth protocol are not executed 3 For error codes relating to abnormal completion refer to Chapter 11 4 For details of the functional protocol refer to Section 10 7 1 10 22 10 22 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 23 MELSEC Q 1 The protocol setting data written to the flash ROM are executed by the module designated in Un The protocol is executed according to the control data stored in the device designated in S and the following devices The channel designated in n1 is used 2 Protocols are executed consecutively for the number of times designated in n2 maximum 8 in one instruction execution 3 Simultaneous execution of dedicated in
531. unication method for accessing to the programmable controller CPU from an opposite device This is called the MC protocol in this manual There are two communication methods one uses ASCII code data and the other uses binary code data Details are explained in the Reference Manual Message send function Printer function This function registers character data messages to be sent to external devices mainly printers in the serial communication module as a user frame in advance and sends the registered data for multiple user frames using the non procedure protocol sent by an instruction from the programmable controller CPU Multidrop connection A name of the connection when multiple external devices or other serial communication modules are connected in a 1 n or m n mode using the serial communication module s RS 422 485 interface Non procedure protocol A user s communication procedure and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the programmable controller CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 6 Packet A string of data used for communication with external devices by the pre defined protocol Pre defined protocol One of the data communication functions available for the QJ71C24N R2 R4 In data communication between the QU71C24N R2 R4 and an external device data can be sent and received by using a protocol for the external device This must b
532. urator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 9 Transmission user frame No designation monitor Purpose Monitor the setting value of output frame number used when transmitting data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Operating procedure Monitor screen CHO Output frame monitor Monitor screen Piel Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value cna ae Ist Flash ROM setting Details Write to 5 fil Current value Monitoring module Soe display Cannot execute test Read from Load file Make text fle Close Start monitor Stop monitor Monitor item Buffer E address Item Reference section BAu to 15An to Output frame No designation 1st to 100th 44D 4BDu User s Manual Application H 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 9 6 10 Monitor test others Purpose Monitor the result of access to the flash ROM the data communication status of each interface and the result of the intelligent function module switch settings using GX Developer Operating procedure Monitor screen Monitor test others Monitor Test screen Monitor test others 9 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor Test items Buffer reat a aes address Item cH Reference section Flash ROM access register read d
533. ures of the Serial Communication Module The following describes the features of the Q series C24 1 Data communication based on the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter referred to as the MC protocol Details are explained in the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual a External devices can read write the programmable controller device data and sequence programs and can monitor programmable controller equipment status With the exception of the on demand function described below the programmable controller does not require a sequence program because the programmable controller sends and receives data based solely on commands from external devices b Using the on demand function data can be sent from the programmable controller CPU to the external devices in each frame format of the MC protocol c Data communication can be performed using a program at the external device side that has been created for communicating data with conventional A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules d When an external device is a personal computer use separately sold communication support tools MX Component This allows a communication program for the external device to be created regardless of MC protocol s transmitting receiving procedure For details on MX Component refer to Appendix 7 and the operating manual of MX Component _ Command i Command request data CC Link IE controller netw
534. uring communications between the Q series C24 and external device according to the trouble symptom When trouble occurs first confirm the status of the Q series C24 and check the relevant item in the table below Protocol Symptom Symptom description 7 Non Bidirectio Pre Reference section Dedicated p E defined O Sedion1131 e Be cee not blink even through an external device SAA is transmitting a message e An external device transmitted a message and RD T blinked but the Q series C24 did not return a Section 11 3 3 response message LED turns on off check according to e SD does not blink even after a send request was e Anexternal device transmitted a message and RD blinked but the Q series C24 did not turn ON the Lie a read request e The CPRTCL instruction is not completed even EC o eT lt eee e The CiN wastumedON O o o f Section 11 3 8 e The P s wastumedON O o o Section 1 3 9 e The PRO wastumedON Jof secionnso The SIO was turned ON p Of o o f Sexton 118 41 Communication errors occurred e The CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR was turned ON Section 11 3 12 check according to Section 11 1 1 e Communications are intermittently established and o O O O Section 11 3 13 lost Data that t be decoded t itted and received e Whether the cause of the communications error is in Section 11 3 15 the Romine series C24 or the external device is unknown Cann
535. values and the testing of its output signals The monitor test operations can be performed only via online operation Operating procedure Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or later Online gt Monitor Test Select monitor Test module Monitor Test Monitor screen Startup from the system monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer Diagnostics System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt Monitor screen Monitor Test screen Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item Current value CH1 ERR occurrence Off Setting value CH2 ERR occurrence Off Turing off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Clear request CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request XZY manitor test XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans contral monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor Flash ROM setting Details Write to Save fi Current value Monitoring module es display Cannot execute test Perdon Load fie Make text file St
536. via one of the Q series C24 interfaces 1 When the power supply to the Q series C24 or external device is started the remote device that is connected may generate a reception error 2 If the remote device that is connected starts up while data is being transmitted the remote device side will generate a reception error When the Q series C24 error LED lights up because a reception error has occurred turn off the light if necessary in accordance with Section 11 1 Also if a reception error has occurred on the external device side handle the error by seeing to the operating manual for the external device Handle the occurrence of a reception error on the Q series C24 side using the following corrective actions When communicating with the MC protocol The Q series C24 will disregard the received data or returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination if it detects a reception error after receiving the head data of the command message in the set format If the reception error is detected before the head data of the command message in the set format is received the received data will be disregarded When communicating using non procedure protocol If the Q series C24 detects a reception error the reception abnormal detection X4 XB turns ON Perform procedures such as detection of reception error or clearing received data as required by following the explanations found in Sections 6 1 4 and 6 1 5 When communica
537. wing combined uses with For registration No 80134 data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the F bnNoaii TO instruction etc 1E0Bn to 1E3831 Orregistration No H See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each Pie to 7772 r 5 For registration No 8015H area the data written etc 1 If data communications is being carried out by user For registration No 8016H i registration frame rae to 7813 1E5Du to 1E85x F Refer to left dean io i EAE a For registration No 8017H User registration frame User s Manual Application Not allowed Sero E H H registration description 7855 to 7895 F z Chapter 9 1EAFH to 1DE7x For registration No 8018H bee tag g 7896 to 7936 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem 1ED8x to 1F00x For registration No 8019H function 7937 to 7977 gt Initializati a eer A 1F01H re 1F29H For registration No 801AH Initialization Data User s Manual Application Section 3 4 3 7978 to 8018 5 1F2An to 1F52H For registration No 801BH Connection Data User s Manual Application Section 8019 to 8059 1F53H io 1F7Bn For registration No 801CH 3 4 4 8060 to 8100 1F7CH es 1FA4n For registration No 801DH 8101 to 8141 1FA5SH to 1FCD For registration No 801EH 8142 to 8182 1FCEH o 1FF6x For registration
538. x1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation Below is an outline of the procedure before operation Check which functions and specifications are to be used Connect the module with an external device using a cable Connection of the Q series C24 and an external device See Section 4 4 in this manual Connect GX Developer and QCPU with a cable I O assignment setting of the Q series C24 4 Setting of operation mode and transmission specifications for the Q series C24 and the external device See Section 4 5 in this manual ROM RAM switch tests of the Q series C24 Self loopback test of the Q series C24 See Section 4 7 in this manual Perform various settings with GX Developer ee v Perform individual station tests with GX Developer When communication using the MC protocol is possible between Perform a loopback test from the the Q series C24 and the external device set the operation mode for external device MC protocol communication and perform a loopback test See Section 4 8 in this manual x Set an operation mode with GX Developer Set an operation mode for the data communicati
539. xternal device Off Processing the command message received from the external device 3 This LED can be made valid also when GX Developer connection OH is specified in communication protocol setting 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 4 External Wiring MELSEC Q This section explains wiring between the Q series C24 and external device As the wiring precautions external wiring which is resistant to the effects of external noise is a prerequisite for reliable system operation and full use of the Q series C24 function 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ground the shield at only one point When connecting with an external device using an RS 232 line use a connector shell as specified in Section 3 2 1 on the Q series C24 end When connecting with an external device using an RS 422 485 cable be sure to note the following QJ71C24N and QJ71C24 a b 1 2 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 The RS 422 485 interface terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Use suitable crimp on terminals for the terminals QJ71C24N R4 1 2 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 Be sure to strip the outer insulation layer by 7 mm before connecting the cable to the plug in socket block When connecting the braided shield wire inside the RS 422 485 cable use the plate terminals included with the product The braided shield wire can be connected without the plate terminal F
540. y Character B part the programmable controller 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Maintenance and Inspection This section explains the maintenance and inspection and installing and removing of the Q series C24 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection The Q series C24 has no special inspection items other than below For items other than listed below perform inspection according to the inspection items listed in the User s Manual of the programmable controller CPU module in order to always use the system in the optimal condition The Q series C24 inspection items 1 Check if the terminal resistors and cables are connected securely 2 Verify that the module fixing screws and the terminal block installation screws are securely tightened Be sure to read through the Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual regarding the Q series C24 inspection and maintenance 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the module Please read 4 1 Handling Precautions before mounting or dismounting the module and make sure to pay attention to safety and handle the module properly during the operation When replacing the Q series C24 and QCPU it becomes necessary to register the following data on the Q series C24 again for the module to be replaced Q series C24 System setting data in the flash ROM e QCPU PLC parameters I O assignment switch setting

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents